Import mmm-mode_0.5.7.orig.tar.gz

[dgit import orig mmm-mode_0.5.7.orig.tar.gz]

42 files changed, 16650 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44d1bb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+autom4te.cache
+aclocal.m4
+configure
+config.log
+config.status
+Makefile
+Makefile.in
+elc-stamp
+mmm.info*
+*.elc
+*.tar.gz
+script
+stamp-vti
+version.texi
+mmm-mode-pkg.el
+mmm-mode-autoloads.el
diff --git a/AUTHORS b/AUTHORS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..431255e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/AUTHORS
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+MMM Mode was originally designed and written by Michael Shulman
+<viritrilbia@gmail.com>.
+
+It was inspired by mmm.el for XEmacs by Gongquan Chen <chen@posc.org>.
+
+Recent contributors have included:
+
+bishop <bishop@platypus.bc.ca>
+Joe Kelsey <joe@zircon.seattle.wa.us>
+Alan Shutko <ats@acm.org>
+Michael Alan Dorman  <mdorman@users.sourceforge.net>
+Brian P Templeton <plovre@users.sourceforge.net>
+Yann Dirson <ydirson@fr.alcove.com>
+Marcus Harnisch
+
+and others...
diff --git a/COPYING b/COPYING
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d60c31a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/COPYING
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+     59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+	    How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+    Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307  USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year  name of author
+    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+  `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b507d79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -0,0 +1,1071 @@
+NOTE: This file is not kept up-to-date anymore.
+
+2004-11-18  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-myghty.el: New mode from Ben Bangert.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-major-mode-preferences): Added Python prefs,
+	also from Ben.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el (mmm-autoloaded-classes): Merged Ben Bangert's
+	Myghty class.
+
+2004-06-16  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* version.texi: Release 0.4.8.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el: Release 0.4.8.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el: Release 0.4.8.
+
+	* mmm-noweb.el (mmm-syntax-region-list)
+	(mmm-syntax-other-regions, mmm-word-other-regions)
+	(mmm-space-other-regions, mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions): Added
+	from Joe's email.  They're here right now, until a better place
+	can be found.
+
+	* configure.in: Incr version for release.
+
+2004-06-10  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-ify): Change defaults for front-delim and
+	back-delim to nil.  0 was breaking the no-delimiter case in
+	mmm-match-region.
+
+2004-06-02  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (html-js): Support JS version in language attribute.
+
+2004-06-01  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables): Updated cc-mode local
+	variables.
+	
+	* Makefile.am (lisp_LISP): Removed mmm-php.el, since it doesn't
+	appear to be in CVS.
+
+	* missing: Updated for automake 1.7.9.
+
+2003-10-18  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables): Add semantic stuff and
+	c-syntactic-eol.
+
+2003-03-25  Michael A. Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-mode.spec: Added file for building SRPMs, from bishop
+
+	* autogen.sh: Added file for building from CVS
+
+2003-03-22  Michael A. Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (html-php): Added new submode class.
+	(eperl): Corrected, added comment detection.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-insert-by-key): Added undo collapsing.
+
+2003-03-09  Michael A. Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-set-mode-line): Added support for "buffer mode"
+	display name.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-insert-by-key): Match and calculate names, and
+	store front and back positions for delimiter overlays.
+
+	* mmm-mason.el: Added match-name parameter.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Added delimiter-mode and match-name parameters.
+
+	* mmm-region.el: Restructured current-overlay functions.
+	(mmm-make-region, mmm-make-overlay, mmm-get-face): Create
+	delimiter overlays with modes and faces, add display-name and name
+	parameters, and handle evaporation intelligently.
+	(mmm-front-start, mmm-back-end, etc.): Use delimiter overlays.
+	(mmm-update-current-submode): Delete overlays whose front
+	delimiter has evaporated.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-ify, mmm-match-region): Added matching for
+	region names.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-delimiter-mode, mmm-delimiter-face): Added.
+
+2003-03-08  Michael A. Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-clear-overlays): Fixed bug so turning mmm
+	mode off now restores primary mode correctly.
+
+2003-03-03  Michael A. Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-noweb.el (mmm-noweb-bind-keys): Implemented a "local to
+	submode class" keymap binding.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-set-mode-line): Used correct name for variable.
+
+2003-03-02  Michael A. Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-mode): Removed ancient docstring, which had
+	references to long-deprecated and removed functions.  The info
+	file is now the official user reference.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-submode-region): Run hooks specified
+	by the region being entered, or the dominant if not.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-primary-mode-entry-hook): Added variable.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-subregion-invalid-placement): Renamed from
+	mmm-subregion-crosses-parents.
+	(mmm-primary-mode-display-name): Added variable.
+	(mmm-set-mode-line): Added function to allow display of specified
+	names outside regions.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-valid-submode-region): Corrected algorithm,
+	improved documentation, renamed error.
+
+2003-02-05  Joe Kelsey  <joe@zircon.seattle.wa.us>
+	
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-add-to-group): New function mmm-add-to-group
+	adds new private classes to an existing group.
+
+	* mmm.texinfo (Noweb): Add documentation about noweb mode.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el (mmm-autoloaded-classes): Add noweb to
+	autoloaded classes.
+
+	* mmm-noweb.el: Modified chunk naming to give noweb-chunks
+	different names so that they will be indented independently.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Make html-js look for language= or type=
+	attributes because you may have other script types.
+	
+2003-01-30  Joe Kelsey  <joe@zircon.seattle.wa.us>
+
+	* Makefile.am: Add mmm-cweb.el, mmm-php.el and mmm-noweb.el
+
+	* mmm-noweb.el: Add support for noweb.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-ify, mmm-make-region): Add support for setting
+	the NAME property on regions.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-insert-by-key): Add support for setting the
+	NAME property on inserts.
+
+2002-11-11  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* .cvsignore: Add semantic.cache.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables): Update C variables to
+	save, based on Emacs CVS.
+
+	* mmm-cweb.el (cweb): Tweaked indentation.  Add cweb to the 
+
+2001-05-16  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-mode-on): Make style variables buffer-local.
+	  Continue on all MMM errors.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables): Added all c-modes
+	  indentation style variables.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el, mmm-sample.el:
+	Added `sgml-dtd' submode class from Yann Dirson <ydirson@fr.alcove.com>.
+
+2001-05-15  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Added cweb to autoloaded classes.
+
+2001-05-14  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-region.el: Passed arguments to `signal'.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el: Defined new submode placement error conditions.
+
+2001-05-14  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-cweb.el: New file.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-valid-submode-region): New function.
+	(mmm-make-region): Allow nested submodes and put the priority in
+	the overlay.
+
+2001-02-23  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-mode.el, mmm-vars.el, version.texi:	Released 0.4.7
+
+2001-02-18  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-classes-alist): Document new keywords.
+
+	* mmm.texinfo (Region Placement): Document the front-match,
+	back-match and end-not-begin keywords.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-match-region, mmm-ify): Add front-match &
+	back-match keywords to specify which submatch to treat as the
+	delimiter.  Add end-not-begin key.
+	(mmm-match->point): Add front-match and back-match args.
+
+2001-02-12  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm-mason.el (mmm-mason-end-line,mmm-mason-start-line): Use bolp
+	and eolp.
+
+2001-02-03  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-mode.el, mmm-region.el, mmm-vars.el:
+	Added `mmm-primary-mode' variable so that `major-mode' can be saved.
+
+2001-01-27  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Added direntry for automated info installation.
+
+2001-01-26  Alan Shutko  <ats@acm.org>
+
+	* configure.in: Use elisp macros from w3 to check for emacs and
+	lisp dir.
+
+	* aclocal.m4: Pulled elisp-related checks from the W3 library, so
+	--with-emacs= will work. 
+
+2001-01-15  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-insert-by-key):
+	Use match-face and major-mode-preferences.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (mmm-here-doc-get-mode):
+	Try each word individually first.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el (mmm-format-matches):
+	Removed reference to `count' variable.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el, mmm-univ.el, mmm-utils.el:
+	Allowed language names for preference lookup as "mode names".
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-set-major-mode-preferences): Added function.
+
+2001-01-14  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-class.el, mmm-utils.el (mmm-format-matches):
+	Changed to allow accessing any subexp, not
+	limited by a numerical value of save-matches.
+
+2001-01-13  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el, mmm-vars.el: Modified CSS to use preferred mode.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables):
+	Added syntax and indentation variables for
+	cc-mode and variants.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-major-mode-preferences):
+	Added check for `jde-mode' for Java code.
+
+2001-01-12  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Added ePerl and JSP to autoload.
+
+2001-01-11  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Added ePerl submode class.
+
+	* mmm-mason.el, mmm-sample.el:
+	Modified classes to use preferred mode list.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el, mmm-region.el:
+	Added alist to keep track of user-preferred major modes.
+
+	* mmm-mason.el, mmm-rpm.el, mmm-sample.el:
+	Added flags telling which faces to use for which regions.
+
+	* mmm-class.el, mmm-region.el, mmm-vars.el:
+	Added multiple faces and optional levels of decoration.
+
+2001-01-09  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables):
+	Added `parse-sexp-ignore-comments', which
+	seems to fix indentation in php-mode.
+
+2001-01-08  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Hacked so `font-lock-keywords-alist' works.
+
+2001-01-05  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Added set-background example for XEmacs.
+	Added info-dir-entry.
+
+2000-09-29  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-apply-class):
+	Rearranged parameters so faces actually work.
+
+2000-09-18  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el, version.texi: Released 0.4.6
+
+2000-09-17  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* FAQ: Added Q about name capitalization.
+
+2000-09-16  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-compat.el (mmm-keywords-used): Added `:private'.
+
+2000-09-12  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* FAQ: Added file
+
+2000-09-12  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* Checklist: Added comment about adding files to the distribution.
+
+	* README: Added comment about installing with multiple emacsen.
+
+	* Makefile.am: Added FAQ
+
+	* mmm-mode.el: Created Emacs Lisp Archive Entry
+
+2000-09-05  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Set MASON_VERSION.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-display-insertion-key):
+	Prevented (nthcdr -1 ...); breaks in XEmacs.
+
+2000-08-29  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables): Added abbrev-mode variables.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Tested against `mmm-set-file-name-for-modes'.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-set-file-name-for-modes):
+	Changed to a list for finer control.
+
+2000-08-24  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-make-region):
+	Explicitly set keyword defaults in &rest parameter.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-ify):
+	Explicitly set defaults for keywords in &rest parameter.
+
+2000-08-23  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-region.el, mmm-vars.el (mmm-set-buffer-file-name-p):
+	Added to control file name setting.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables):
+	Added `mode-popup-menu' for XEmacs.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Added some tests for XEmacs 20 to prevent
+	errors and unwanted prompts.
+	Cleared modified flag before killing leftover temporary buffers.
+
+2000-08-21  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm.texinfo:
+	Added comments on RPM Spec, File Variables, and Here-documents.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Autoloaded `rpm'.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Autoloaded `rpm-sh' submode class from mmm-rpm.el.
+
+	* mmm-rpm.el: Added file (contributed by Marcus Harnisch).
+
+2000-08-17  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-never-modes): Added `forms-mode'.
+	
+2000-08-02  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el, version.texi: Released 0.4.5.
+
+	* mmm-compat.el (mmm-set-font-lock-defaults): Made into a macro.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Autoloaded `mmm-ensure-fboundp'.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Used compatibility wrapper for font-lock defaults.
+
+	* mmm-compat.el (mmm-set-font-lock-defaults):
+	Added compatibility wrapper function.
+
+2000-08-01  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* README.Mason, mmm.texinfo:
+	Added comments about `sgml-parent-document'.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el (mmm-ensure-fboundp): Created function.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (mmm-here-doc-get-mode):
+	Extended to recognize names like TEXT_EOF.
+
+2000-07-29  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el, version.texi: Released 0.4.4.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-get-class-spec):
+	Implemented autoloaded submode classes.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-add-group): Made subclasses of a group private.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Added autoloading of submode classes.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-ify-by-class):
+	Added completion on autoloaded classes.  Excluded
+	private classes from completion.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-classes-alist):
+	Updated docstring for new offset values and
+	include- flags.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (here-doc): Updated to use new front-offset values.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-ify, mmm-match-region, mmm-match->point):
+	Added new values for front- and back-offset.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-make-region):
+	Made sure overlays get the delimiter and sticky
+	properties even if they aren't passed explicitly.
+
+2000-07-26  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* configure.in: Changed output name from `mmm' to `mmm-mode'.
+
+2000-07-24  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Updated file-variables class to handle prefixes.
+
+2000-07-23  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Wrote File Variables submode class for the new syntax.
+
+2000-07-21  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-ify-by-class):
+	Added completion on all defined classes.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (mmm-here-doc-get-mode):
+	Signaled non-fboundp here-document names.
+
+	* mmm-univ.el (mmm-univ-get-mode): Signaled error on non-fboundp modes.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-match-region, mmm-ify):
+	Caught errors from :match-submode.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el: Added `mmm-no-matching-submode' error signal.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el:
+	Allowed here-documents in any mode with :match-submode.
+	Added insertion syntax to here-docs, javascript, and embperl.
+
+2000-07-14  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm.texinfo, version.texi:
+	Added MASON_VERSION variable to keep track of that.
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Wrote about changing key bindings and local variables.
+	Copied info from documentation of `mmm-classes-alist'.
+
+2000-07-13  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-run-major-mode-hook):
+	Added `ignore-errors' around each call.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables):
+	Changed `defcustom' to `defvar'.
+
+	* mmm.texinfo:
+	Wrote about global classes, highlight, mode line, and hooks.
+
+	* mmm-univ.el: Limited matches to letter/dash strings that are fboundp.
+
+2000-07-12  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* README.Mason: Added comment about `mmm-global-mode'.
+
+2000-07-12  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.4.3.
+
+	* mmm-univ.el: Changed %[...]% to [%...%] which looks much nicer.
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Wrote more about Mason.
+
+	* mmm-mason.el: Moved commentary code to README.Mason.
+
+	* Makefile.am: Added README.Mason to EXTRA_DIST.
+
+	* README.Mason: Created file.
+
+2000-07-11  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Used `mmm-make-temp-buffer'.  Put font-lock
+	property directly rather than setting the variable first.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-mode-off): Reset font-lock variables.
+
+	* mmm-compat.el (mmm-make-temp-buffer):
+	Added as workaround for make-indirect-buffer.
+
+	* mmm-region.el:
+	(mmm-enable-font-lock, mmm-update-font-lock-buffer, mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Conditioned font-lock usage on mmm-font-lock-available-p.
+
+	* mmm-compat.el (mmm-font-lock-available-p): Added flag.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-update-mode-info):
+	Killed any lingering temporary buffers.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-insert-by-key):
+	Made inserted regions beg- and end-sticky.
+
+	* mmm-compat.el (mmm-keywords-used): Added :classes.
+
+2000-06-30  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.4.2a.
+
+	* mmm-region.el: Reordered Inspection and Creation for byte compiler.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el: Moved mmm-mode variable to mmm-vars.el.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Added some autoloads.
+
+	* Makefile.am: Added mmm-univ.el.
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.4.2.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el (mmm-mode-on-maybe):
+	Conditioned font-lock updating on mmm-mode.
+
+	* mmm-region.el:
+	Removed use-local-map advice; no longer necessary (thank goodness!)
+
+	* mmm-region.el, mmm-auto.el: Fixed font-lock woes (hopefully).
+
+	* mmm-class.el: Allowed dynamically specified submodes.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el, mmm-mode.el, mmm-cmds.el:
+	Fixed font-lock woes (hopefully).
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Added Embperl.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-global-classes):
+	Added variable controlling global classes.
+
+	* mmm-univ.el: Created file defining `universal' submode.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Added Embperl.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el: Added def-edebug-specs.
+
+2000-06-29  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-fontify-region-list):
+	Saved local variables before moving.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el (mmm-check-changed-buffers): Checked for live buffer.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el (mmm-valid-buffer):
+	Checked against noninteractive and hidden buffers.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el (mmm-check-changed-buffers):
+	Added check against minibuffers.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-never-modes): Added `eshell-mode'.
+
+2000-06-28  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* NEWS, configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.4.1.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-overlays-in): Added DELIM parameter.
+	(mmm-submode-changes-in): Added strict flags calling overlays-in.
+
+2000-06-27  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.4.0.
+
+	* NEWS, TODO, mmm-auto.el, mmm-region.el, mmm-vars.el, mmm.texinfo:
+	Changed mmm-global-mode to use post-command-hook method rather than
+	stack-walk method.
+
+	* mmm-region.el:
+	Fixed bug saving variables when creating regions; need to set them first.
+
+	* mmm-region.el: Added creation-hook, fixed mode-name problem.
+
+	* mmm-class.el: Added mmm-[get,set]-class-parameters and creation-hook.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el, mmm-region.el, mmm-vars.el:
+	Fixed bug where font-lock-mode was set to `t' globally, causing
+	global-font-lock-mode to turn it off.
+
+2000-06-26  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-region.el:
+	Rewrote local variable functions, added new ones, changed updating,
+	fontification, and region creation functions to handle this.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el:
+	Added setting and clearing local variables with mode on and off.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variables):
+	Added extra parameters for saving type and modes, and updated documentation.
+	Created several variables to save buffer- and region- locals.
+	(mmm-temp-buffer-name): Created variable and changed references.
+
+2000-06-23  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-save-local-variable):
+	Added comment-line-start-skip for Fortran.
+
+2000-06-13  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm.texinfo: Added comment about (require 'mmm-mason).
+
+2000-06-08  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.3.10
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-overlays-in):
+	Added checks for point-min and point-max for XEmacs.
+	(use-local-map): Added the advice back in.
+
+	* configure.in, mmm-vars.el: Released 0.3.9.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (use-local-map):
+	Conditioned advice definition on not XEmacs.
+
+2000-05-28  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* .cvsignore:
+	Added info file and auxiliary compilation and texinfo files.
+
+	* .cvsignore: Added configure auxiliary files.
+
+	* .cvsignore: Ignored Makefile.in, Makefile, and configure.
+
+	* COPYING, INSTALL, install-sh, mdate-sh, missing, mkinstalldirs, texinfo.tex:
+	Added files required by automake.
+
+	* mmm.texinfo, elisp-comp, TODO, README, NEWS, ChangeLog, AUTHORS:
+	Added to CVS (formerly not under RCS).
+
+2000-05-24  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Pre-added major mode hook to text-mode-hook.
+
+2000-05-19  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-version): changed to 0.3.8.
+
+2000-05-18  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-region.el:
+	Moved `require's back to top level for byte-compiling.  Added dummy
+	definition of `mmm-real-use-local-map' to shut up byte compiler.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el, mmm-cmds.el, mmm-class.el:
+	Moved `require's back to top level for byte-compiling.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: `require'd mmm-vars at top level for byte-compiling.
+
+	* Makefile.am:
+	Added all the elisp files to EXTRA_DIST, since Automake doesn't see
+	them as sources for the distribution.
+
+2000-05-10  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-mason.el: Fixed bug: # is not allowed in symbols.
+
+	* mmm-mason.el:
+	Changed insertion key of <%doc> to `d' and added insertion of %#
+	comment lines with insertion keys `#' and `3'.
+
+	* mmm-mason.el:
+	Distinguished between Perl sections and pseudo-Perl sections.  The one
+	inserts ; at the beginning for indentation hack, the other doesn't
+	because the Mason syntax doesn't allow it and indentation is generally
+	unnecessary anyway.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el:
+	Fixed "sub"-insertion specs like <%perl> under <%TAG> not to insert
+	the interactor string.
+
+2000-05-03  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-mason.el: Added dependencies on mmm-compat and mmm-vars.
+
+2000-04-30  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* configure.in, Makefile.am: New file.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el, mmm-mode.el, mmm-region.el, mmm-auto.el, mmm-class.el, mmm-cmds.el, mmm-mason.el:
+	Changed (progn (require ...)) to (when t (require ...)) because the
+	first is still "top level" for the byte compiler.
+
+	* mmm-region.el:
+	Required font-lock and mmm-auto at top level for byte compilation.
+	Moved local maps to come before updating hooks for byte compilation.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el: Loaded CL at top level for byte-compile.
+
+2000-04-29  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-mode.el, mmm-region.el, mmm-sample.el, mmm-auto.el, mmm-class.el, mmm-cmds.el, mmm-mason.el:
+	Put all `require's not needed at compile-time into `progn's so the
+	byte-compiler doesn't load them (not at top level).  Only `mmm-compat'
+	and `mmm-utils' need to be loaded at compile-time, since they define
+	macros.
+
+2000-04-27  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* All: Started using RCS.
+
+2000-04-27  Michael Abraham Shulman  <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+	* mmm-sample.el (mmm-javascript-mode): Created customization
+	variable to select mode to use for javascript regions.
+
+2000-03-26  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el (mmm-get-insertion-spec): Insertion keys now have
+	symbolic names, although they have no definition.
+	(mmm-insertion-help): Command added to give help on insertion
+	keys, the way C-h does for command keys.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-get-all-classes): Reversed order, so
+	interactive classes take precedence (for insertion, mainly) over
+	`mmm-classes' which overrides mode/ext classes.
+
+2000-03-24  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-command-modifiers, mmm-insert-modifiers):
+	Switched defaults to be the way I think it should be. Users can
+	switch back with `mmm-use-old-command-keys'.
+
+	* README: Created file giving information on inital installation.
+
+	* Makefile: Created makefile to compile elisp files and make info
+	file from texinfo file.
+
+	* mmm-region.el: Gave up on conditional stickiness, since it
+	doesn't work in XEmacs and even FSF Emacs has been being flaky
+	with overlay after-change functions. Detecting ends in global
+	`after-change-functions' will work better anyway.
+
+	* mmm-cmds.el: Renamed from `mmm-inter.el'.
+	(mmm-end-current-region): Added command, with key binding.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-classes-alist): Documentation updated for
+	unified submode classes.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-ify): BEG and END arguments removed; just use
+	FRONT and BACK.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el (mmm-format-matches): Ignores non-string arguments.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-apply-class): Faces supplied for grouping
+	classes now override those on included classes. Parents will do
+	the same thing.
+
+	* mmm-inter.el: Bound `mmm-parse-block' to C-c % 5 as well.
+	(mmm-reparse-current-region): Added command, with key binding.
+
+	* mmm-insert.el: Deleted file, merging contents (insert by
+	keystrokes) into `mmm-inter.el'. Auto-detection insert will
+	probably go elsewhere.
+
+	* mmm-inter.el (mmm-clear-current-region): Uses `mmm-overlay-at'
+	with `all' inclusion type.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-overlays-at): Added `all' inclusion type.
+
+	* mmm-class.el (mmm-apply-class, etc.): Submode classes have been
+	unified--no more 'regexp, 'region, 'group, etc.
+
+2000-03-23  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-inter.el (mmm-parse-buffer, mmm-parse-region, mmm-parse-block):
+	Added "Operating...done" messages.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-make-region): Allowed caller to add extra
+	keyword arguments to be stored as overlay properties, anticipating
+	new future submode classes.
+
+	* mmm-update.el (use-local-map): Advised to keep track of changed
+	local maps.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-overlays-at): Added inclusion of boundary
+	points based on endpoint stickiness.
+	(mmm-match-front, mmm-match-back): Front and back overlay
+	properties can now be functions rather than regexps, in
+	anticipation of new future submode classes.
+
+2000-03-22  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-utils.el (mmm-valid-buffer): Renamed and added checking for
+	"never" modes.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el (mmm-never-modes): Added, to prevent "temporary
+	shell-mode buffers" and other unnecessariness.
+
+	* mmm-region.el (mmm-overlays-in): Fixed strictness so it doesn't
+	try to match delimiters of non-mmm overlays.
+
+	* mmm-update.el (mmm-local-maps-alist): Keep track of changed
+	local maps by buffer and major mode.
+	(mmm-update-submode-region): Update mode info for major mode.
+
+	* mmm-sample.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-auto.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mason.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-insert.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+2000-03-20  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* mmm-update.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-inter.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-class.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mason): Removed highlight for %doc regions.
+
+	* mmm-region.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-utils.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-compat.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* mmm-vars.el: Created file, removing code from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* TODO: Created TODO file, removing comments from `mmm-mode.el'.
+
+	* ChangeLog: Created ChangeLog file and (more or less) ported
+	existing Change Log to official format.
+
+2000-03-19  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+	        
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-global-mode): usurps and extends the role of
+	`mmm-add-find-file-hook'. Other modes can piggyback on our hack by
+	using `mmm-major-mode-hook'.
+        
+	Added :insert class parameters. Classes can now define skeletons
+	to insert submode regions with delimiters based on a keypress.
+
+	Added `mmm-insert-modifiers' and `mmm-command-modifiers' to
+	configure which keys do what.
+
+2000-03-18  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+	
+	* mmm-mode.el: Did a bunch of reorganizing. MMM-ification methods
+	are now submode classes, and what used to be called submode
+	classes are now just a type called :group. User interface is
+	mostly unchanged however. Replaced some gratuitous keywords with
+	normal symbols.
+
+	Added bells and whistles to :regexp class type, allowing custom
+	"plugin" functions to verify matches and get the delimiter forms,
+	the latter of which aren't used yet, but will be soon. Mason
+	class(es) are now all regexps with a plugin or two. Function class
+	type is not (yet?) ported to the new interface, holding back
+	eval-elisp and htp.p with it.
+        
+	Changed a couple of `eval-and-compile's to `eval-when-compile'.
+        
+	Added special "non-submode" regions, where the major mode holds
+	sway, but no submodes allowed (until parents are implemented).
+	Added %doc in text-mode and %text as a non-submode to Mason, and
+	added %flags, %attr, %method, and %shared tags for Mason classes.
+	These will be new in Mason version 0.82.
+        
+2000-03-14  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* Version 0.3.7a released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el: Put `turn-on-font-lock-if-enabled' back in for FSF
+	  Emacs. Don't know why I thought I could take it out.
+        
+2000------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* Version 0.3.7 released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el: Set insertion types of markers added to history to
+	coincide with sticky ends of overlays. It's not perfect, but it's
+	better.
+
+	Renamed mode and submode hook variables to start with `mmm-'.
+
+	Added "class hooks" run whenever a class is first used in a
+	buffer.
+
+	Changes for XEmacs compatibility:
+          - Loaded XEmacs overlay emulation package.
+          - Renamed some overlay properties when in XEmacs
+          - Removed `global-font-lock-mode' dependencies.
+          - Added extra parameter to `regexp-opt' in Mason class.
+        
+	Removed "Disclaimers" comment section; I think we have enough
+	testing that it should work on most systems.
+        
+	Reversed order of Change Log so newer changes come first.
+        
+	Changed the default submode highlight to a more neutral gray.
+        
+	Renamed various "start" and "end" parameters to be more uniform.
+        
+	(mmm-ify-by-region): now checks if the region is in bounds.
+        
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.6c released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el: Added comment about putting autohandlers and
+	dhandlers in html-mode.
+
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.6b released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el: Added comment about `psgml-mode' thanks to Michael
+	Alan Dorman.
+
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.6a released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el: Loaded CL at compile-time to prevent execution of
+	macro arguments.
+
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.6 released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el: Changes for Emacs 19 compatibility.
+	  - Set keyword variables to themselves.
+	  - Added hacks for absence of custom.el and regexp-opt.
+	  - Added user variable to control use of Perl mode vs CPerl mode.
+	Thanks to Eric A. Zarko for suggestions and testing.
+
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.5a released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-ify-by-all): no longer re-fontifies buffers
+	with no submodes.
+
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.5 released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-fontify-region): now locally binds
+	`font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function' to
+	`mmm-beginning-of-syntax' since `font-lock-fontify-block' binds it
+	to nil for some reason.
+
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.4 released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-ify-by-class): now fontifies the buffer
+	afterward, like the other interactive MMM-ification functions.
+	Updated a couple doc-strings and prompts.
+        
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.3 released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-regexp-to-regions, mmm-mason-inline): Changed
+	recursion to iteration, since for long files the recursion runs
+	afoul of `max-lisp-eval-depth'.
+	(mason): Commented on workaround for Mason CPerl mess-ups.
+	Submode overlays now evaporate if they have zero width.
+	(mmm-parse-region): now has a key binding and doesn't refontify
+	the entire buffer.
+	
+1999------  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.2 released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-mode-on, mmm-mode-off): are now interactive.
+	Fixed bug in Mason class: %def, %text, and %doc are now ignored as
+	they should be.
+
+1999-11-21  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.1 released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-ify-by-class) now adds to history rather than
+	`mmm-classes'.
+	Fixed :class keyword so it works correctly.
+	(mmm-add-mode-ext-class): Classes associated with major modes or
+	filenames now do The Right Thing when the major mode is changed.
+	However, `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist' cannot be directly modified.
+	(mmm-mode): Updated documentation to cover 0.3.x changes.
+        
+1999-11-21  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.3.0 released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-ify-by-class): Added interactive prompt.
+	(mmm-version): Function added to display version interactively.
+	Fixed and updated customization definitions.
+	(mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist): added, allowing the automatic
+	association of certain major-modes and/or file extensions with
+	submode classes.
+	Allowed submode lists to contain :class keyword, so one class can
+	invoke another one, if they share submode methods.
+
+1999-11-19  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+	* Version 0.2.2a released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el: Fixed bug.
+
+1999-11-18  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.2.2 released.
+
+	* mmm-mode.el (mmm-mason-inline): Replaces the regexps "<% " and
+	"%>" for HTML::Mason submode class. Inline perl regions don't have
+	to begin with a space, but the regexp "<%" matches "<%perl>" as
+	well, which it shouldn't.
+	Added `save-match-data' calls in all searching functions.
+	Removed unnecessary auxiliary functions.
+
+1999-11-16  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+        
+	* Version 0.2.1 released.
+        
+	* mmm-mode.el: Fixed font-lock absence, with-temp-message absence,
+	mmm-ifying temp buffer.
+
+1999-11-15  Michael Abraham Shulman  <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+	
+	* Version 0.2.0 released to HTML::Mason mailing list.
+
+	* Comment: Although nearly 100% of the code for mmm-mode was
+	written by me, the original inspiration came from mmm.el for
+	XEmacs by Gongquan Chen <chen@posc.org>, so I have continued his
+	version-numbering.
+        
+1999-01-12  Gongquan Chen <chen@posc.org>
+        
+	* Version 0.11 released.
+
+	* mmm.el: Fixed doc-strings and style. Thanks to comments from
+	Jari Aalto <jaalto@tre.tele.nokia.fi>
+
+1999-01-11  Gongquan Chen <chen@posc.org>
+	
+	* Version 0.10 released.
+
+	* mmm.el: Initial release of mmm.el on comp.emacs.xemacs
diff --git a/Checklist b/Checklist
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..449b98b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Checklist
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+-*-text-*-
+                 Checklist for New MMM Mode Releases
+
+0. Test all new code, under all Emacsen if possible.  Check that the
+   package builds and installs.
+
+1. Check everything into Git.
+
+2. Update the NEWS and TODO files and any other commentary files and
+   check them into Git.
+
+3. Update version numbers and dates in `mmm-mode.el', `configure.in',
+   and `mmm-vars.el'. Check them in with comment "Released x.x.x".
+
+4. Make a Git snapshot (`C-x v s') of the MMM Mode directory.  This is
+   the point at which a release becomes official.
+
+5. Run `make dist' and upload the tarball.  Upload to SourceForge.
+
+                             Adding Files
+
+To add a file to the distribution, edit `Makefile.am' and add it to
+lisp_LISP (if an .el file) or EXTRA_DIST (otherwise).  If necessary,
+add autoloads for functions or submode classes to `mmm-auto.el'.
diff --git a/FAQ b/FAQ
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bdd9c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/FAQ
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+-*-outline-*-
+              Frequently Asked Questions about MMM Mode
+              =========================================
+
+* How do I write/capitalize the name of this package/mode?
+
+However you want.  The author says `MMM Mode' (and occasionally `MMM')
+when discussing the entire package, and `mmm-mode' when discussing the
+emacs mode or function.  He does think, however, that `Mmm' looks
+rather ugly, although that is how SourceForge insists on capitalizing
+the name of the mailing list.
+
+
+* How do I get rid of that ugly gray background color?
+
+Put the following line in your Emacs initialization file:
+
+  (setq mmm-submode-decoration-level 0)
+
+You may want to try using MMM Mode for a while with the background
+highlight, however, or merely changing it to a different color.  There
+are two reasons it's there by default:
+
+1. MMM Mode isn't as smart as you might hope it would be about
+   recognizing new submode regions, so the presence or absence of the
+   highlight can let you know at a glance where it thinks they are.
+
+2. Just like the rest of font-lock, it helps you mentally organize the
+   code; you can see at a glance that THIS code is executed as Perl,
+   but THAT code is straight HTML (or whatever).  You can get even
+   more help by setting the above variable to 2, in which case regions
+   will get a background color according to their function.
+
+
+* I typed `<%' (or other delimiter) but I'm still in the wrong mode.
+
+MMM Mode isn't that smart yet.  You have to tell it explicitly to
+reparse (`C-c % C-5' or `C-c % C-b') when you add new submode regions,
+and both delimiters have to be present.  Hopefully a future version
+will be able to automatically recognize new regions an you type them,
+but that version is not yet here.
+
+However, most submode classes provide insertion commands that remove
+the need to type the delimiters as well as the need to reparse the
+block: type `C-c % h' for a list of available insertion commands for
+current submode class(es).
+
+With a recent update, you can set `mmm-parse-when-idle' to t, to allow
+MMM Mode to reparse the buffer when it's modified and Emacs is idle.
+This comes at a certain performance cost.
+
+
+* Why is the first character of the end delimiter in the submode region?
+
+It isn't.  When your cursor looks like it is over that character, it
+is actually *before* that character and therefore inside the submode
+region.  You can check that the offending character does not have the
+background highlight--that is, if you haven't set the decoration level
+to 0.  For example, in the following text (where -!- represents the
+cursor position)
+
+  print <<END_TEXT;
+  here is some text
+  -!-END_TEXT
+
+The 'E' at the beginning of the END_TEXT line is not actually part of
+the submode region.  But with the cursor as indicated (that is, the
+box is blinking over the `E' which follows the actual cursor
+position), Emacs is in text-mode.
+
+
+* Why won't MMM Mode work with `foo-mode'?
+
+Foo-mode probably has extra variables or states that need to be set
+up, that MMM Mode doesn't yet know about.  Often this sort of problem
+can be fixed by adding elements to `mmm-save-local-variables'.  If you
+know some Elisp, you may want to try and track down the problem
+yourself, or you can contact the mailing list and ask for help.
+Either way, please file an issue, so that in the future, folks can
+use MMM Mode and foo-mode together more easily.
+
+
+* I'm getting an emacs error, what did I do wrong?
+
+Most likely nothing.  MMM Mode is still more or less alpha software
+and is quite likely to contain bugs; probably something in your
+configuration has brought a new bug to light.  Please send the text of
+the error, along with a stack backtrace (1) and the relevant portions
+of your emacs initialization file, to either the maintainer or the
+mailing list, and hopefully a fix can be worked out.
+
+Of course, it's also possible that there is an error in your
+configuration.  Double-check the elisp syntax in your init file, or
+inspect the backtrace yourself.  If the error happens while loading
+your init code, try manually evaluating it line by line (`C-x C-e') to
+see where the error occurs.  Folks on the mailing list can also help
+point out errors, but only with your init code and a backtrace.
+
+If you're having a problem with syntax highlighting, debugging is
+complicated by the fact that font-lock swallows errors. To trigger the
+error, evaluate the following in the problem buffer (with `M-:'):
+
+  (font-lock-fontify-region (point-min) (point-max))
+
+(1) To get a stack backtrace of an error, set the emacs variable
+    `debug-on-error' to non-nil (type `M-x toggle-debug-on-error RET' or
+    `M-: (setq debug-on-error t) RET'), then repeat the actions which
+    caused the error. A stack backtrace should pop up which you can
+    select and copy. If the error occurs while loading emacs, invoke
+    emacs with the `--debug-init' (Emacs) or `-debug-init' (XEmacs)
+    switch.
+
+
+* Will MMM Mode work with (Emacs 23 / XEmacs 20 / XEmacs 21 / etc...)?
+
+MMM Mode was designed for FSF Emacs and works best in versions 23 and 24.
+But don't let that stop you from trying it under other variants of
+emacs.  If you encounter problems, feel free to ask the mailing list,
+but success is not guaranteed.
+
+XEmacs 21 has problems with font-lock: for example, often apostrophes in
+a different submode region can cause code to be incorrectly font-locked
+as a string.
+
+Versions of FSF Emacs < 23 and XEmacs < 21 are not supported.
+
+
+* XEmacs says `Symbol's function definition is void: make-indirect-buffer'.
+
+You probably used FSF Emacs to compile MMM as it is the one used by
+default if both are installed.  To explicitly set the emacs to use
+when byte compiling, do the following:
+
+$ cd mmm-mode-x.x.x
+$ make distclean
+$ ./configure --with-xemacs=/path/to/xemacs
+$ make
+$ make install
+
+Running `make distclean' is only necessary if you have already
+compiled MMM Mode for the wrong emacs, but can never hurt.  The exact
+error message this problem produces may change with newer versions of
+MMM Mode; always be sure you have compiled for the correct emacsen.
+
+
+* I want to install the Git version, but there's no `configure' script.
+
+The `configure' script which is included in the official distributions
+is not present in Git, because it is automatically generated by GNU
+Automake/Autoconf from files like `Makefile.am' and `configure.in'.
+To build the Git version the same way as the official distributions,
+you must first run `autogen.sh':
+
+$ cd mmm-mode
+$ ./autogen.sh
+
+and then you can continue as usual:
+
+$ ./configure
+$ make
+$ make install
+
+Note that autogen.sh requires aclocal, automake, and autoconf, which
+may or may not be installed on your system, since they are considered
+developer tools rather than end-user tools.  If you can't or don't
+want to install them, however, you can still use the Git version of
+MMM Mode by manually copying all the `.el' files into a directory in
+your `load-path'.  Optionally, you may also byte-compile them manually
+(this is what `make' normally does).  Byte-compiling gives some speed
+improvement, but if you experience problems, the stack traces are
+sometimes more informative if you are using the source files only.
+
+The Info files `mmm.info-*' are also not included in Git, since they
+are generated from `mmm.texinfo' by the program `makeinfo'.  If you
+want to install the Info documentation from Git, you will have to run
+this manually as well, and copy the resulting info files into the
+appropriate location for your system.
+
+The Git version is, of course, even less guaranteed to be bug-free
+than the official distributions.  But please report any problems you
+have with it, so they can be fixed for the next release.
+
+
+* You haven't answered my question; how can I get more help?
+
+Create an issue at <https://github.com/purcell/mmm-mode/issues>, or
+check out the MMM Mode web site, <http://mmm-mode.sourceforge.net>,
+there is a link to the subscription page for the MMM Mode mailing list.
+
+When asking a question or reporting a problem, be sure to give the
+versions of emacs and MMM Mode you are using, and any other relevant
+information.
diff --git a/INSTALL b/INSTALL
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b42a17a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/INSTALL
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+Basic Installation
+==================
+
+   These are generic installation instructions.
+
+   The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
+various system-dependent variables used during compilation.  It uses
+those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
+It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
+definitions.  Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
+you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file
+`config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up
+reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output
+(useful mainly for debugging `configure').
+
+   If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
+to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
+diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
+be considered for the next release.  If at some point `config.cache'
+contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+
+   The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program
+called `autoconf'.  You only need `configure.in' if you want to change
+it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'.
+
+The simplest way to compile this package is:
+
+  1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
+     `./configure' to configure the package for your system.  If you're
+     using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type
+     `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute
+     `configure' itself.
+
+     Running `configure' takes awhile.  While running, it prints some
+     messages telling which features it is checking for.
+
+  2. Type `make' to compile the package.
+
+  3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
+     the package.
+
+  4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
+     documentation.
+
+  5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
+     source code directory by typing `make clean'.  To also remove the
+     files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
+     a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'.  There is
+     also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
+     for the package's developers.  If you use it, you may have to get
+     all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
+     with the distribution.
+
+Compilers and Options
+=====================
+
+   Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that
+the `configure' script does not know about.  You can give `configure'
+initial values for variables by setting them in the environment.  Using
+a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like
+this:
+     CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure
+
+Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this:
+     env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure
+
+Compiling For Multiple Architectures
+====================================
+
+   You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
+same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
+own directory.  To do this, you must use a version of `make' that
+supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'.  `cd' to the
+directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
+the `configure' script.  `configure' automatically checks for the
+source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'.
+
+   If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH'
+variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time
+in the source code directory.  After you have installed the package for
+one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another
+architecture.
+
+Installation Names
+==================
+
+   By default, `make install' will install the package's files in
+`/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc.  You can specify an
+installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the
+option `--prefix=PATH'.
+
+   You can specify separate installation prefixes for
+architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files.  If you
+give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use
+PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
+Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix.
+
+   In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give
+options like `--bindir=PATH' to specify different values for particular
+kinds of files.  Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories
+you can set and what kinds of files go in them.
+
+   If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
+with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
+option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
+
+Optional Features
+=================
+
+   Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
+`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
+They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
+is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System).  The
+`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
+package recognizes.
+
+   For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
+find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
+you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
+`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
+
+Specifying the System Type
+==========================
+
+   There may be some features `configure' can not figure out
+automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package
+will run on.  Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints
+a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the
+`--host=TYPE' option.  TYPE can either be a short name for the system
+type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields:
+     CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
+
+See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field.  If
+`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
+need to know the host type.
+
+   If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also
+use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will
+produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of
+system on which you are compiling the package.
+
+Sharing Defaults
+================
+
+   If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share,
+you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives
+default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
+`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
+`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists.  Or, you can set the
+`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
+A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
+
+Operation Controls
+==================
+
+   `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it
+operates.
+
+`--cache-file=FILE'
+     Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of
+     `./config.cache'.  Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for
+     debugging `configure'.
+
+`--help'
+     Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit.
+
+`--quiet'
+`--silent'
+`-q'
+     Do not print messages saying which checks are being made.  To
+     suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error
+     messages will still be shown).
+
+`--srcdir=DIR'
+     Look for the package's source code in directory DIR.  Usually
+     `configure' can determine that directory automatically.
+
+`--version'
+     Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
+     script, and exit.
+
+`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.
diff --git a/Makefile.am b/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..942c467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+## Process this file with automake to produce Makefile.in
+
+## The MMM Mode distribution is `flat', so we have no SUBDIRS macro.
+
+lisp_LISP = mmm-compat.el mmm-vars.el mmm-utils.el mmm-auto.el \
+  mmm-region.el mmm-class.el mmm-cmds.el mmm-mode.el \
+  mmm-sample.el mmm-mason.el mmm-univ.el mmm-rpm.el mmm-cweb.el \
+  mmm-noweb.el mmm-myghty.el mmm-erb.el mmm-defaults.el
+
+info_TEXINFOS = mmm.texinfo
+
+# This is a hack IMO.  Automake should recognize lisp files as
+# "sources" and include them in the distribution, but it doesn't.
+EXTRA_DIST = $(lisp_LISP) README.Mason FAQ
+
+# See also `elisp-comp' for another hack.
diff --git a/NEWS b/NEWS
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cc30ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/NEWS
@@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
+MMM Mode NEWS -- history of user-visible changes.  -*-outline-*-
+Copyright (C) 2003, 2004, 2013-2015  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+See the file COPYING for copying conditions.
+
+Please submit bug reports at https://github.com/purcell/mmm-mode/issues
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.7
+Fixes for mmm-indent-line-narrowed.
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.6
+Emacs 25 compatibility fix when cl is not loaded.
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.5
+
+Introduced mode transition hooks, like mmm-x-enter-hook and mmm-y-exit-hook.
+
+New function mmm-indent-line-narrowed, to use as mmm-indent-line-function.
+
+`cl-lib' is a new dependency, replacing `cl'. It comes bundled with
+recent versions of Emacs, and for older ones it can be installed from
+GNU ELPA.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.4
+
+Fixes for indentation, SMIE support, and minor bugs.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.2
+
+Introduced `mmm-after-syntax-propertize-functions'. A primary major
+mode can set it to adjust `syntax-table' text properties in submode
+regions.
+
+New file `mmm-defaults.el'. A user can simply require it and have
+basic setup for ERB, EJS and PHP files (for the last one, `php-mode'
+has to be installed separately).
+
+`mmm-add-classes' is autoloaded.
+
+`mmm-beginning-of-syntax' was removed.
+
+Assorted highlighting and syntax detection improvements.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.1
+
+Some minor documentation updates and bugfixes.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.5.0
+
+** Compatibility with recent Emacsen
+
+Updated to work with Emacs 23 and 24. Removed some compatibility code
+for older versions. Added new local variables used in the latest js-mode
+and cc-engine modes.
+
+** New submode classes
+
+New submode classes for ERB and EJS templates, both in mmm-erb.el. It
+also includes a smart indentation algorithm, supporting them together
+with script and style tag subregions in HTML code.
+
+** Parsing when idle
+
+Setting `mmm-parse-when-idle' will make MMM Mode re-parse modified
+buffers when Emacs is idle. This can lead to visible pauses, though,
+depending on the size of the buffer and the number of subregions.
+
+** Support submode-specific syntax functions
+
+Relevant for Emacs 24: we define a composite syntax-propertize-function
+that delegates syntax recognition to respective submode functions.
+
+For users, this means regular expressions in js-mode and string
+interpolations and percent literals in ruby-mode.
+
+** Indentation
+
+More consistent indentation behavior, the default implementation
+delegates to the submode at the end of the indentation.
+
+The major mode can provide its own implementation by setting
+mmm-indent-line-function, to handle specific mode combinations better.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.8
+
+** Delimiter Regions
+
+The delimiters which mark off submode regions now have their own
+overlays.  They can be highlighted if you so desire using appropriate
+class arguments and/or the variable mmm-delimiter-face.  They are also
+in an appropriate major mode, or non-mode as the case may be.
+
+** Nested Submodes
+
+Nested submodes are now vaguely supported.
+
+** RPM Spec File
+
+An RPM spec file, contributed by <bishop@platypus.bc.ca>, is now
+included for people who wish to build their own SRPM to install from.
+
+** New Submode Classes
+
+Many thanks to Joe Kelsey for writing a very intelligent class for
+editing Noweb files, and to Alan Shutko for one for CWeb files.  We
+also have a mode for SGML DTD definitions from Yann Dirson.
+
+** Numerous bugfixes and small improvements
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.7
+
+** Multiple Decoration Levels
+
+You now have finer control over how colorful your submode regions are,
+via `mmm-submode-decoration-level'.  Level 0 turns coloring off--no
+messing around with faces required.  Level 1 (default) is the same as
+in previous versions.  Level 2 colors regions according to function:
+initialization, cleanup, output, declaration, comment, etc.
+
+** Preferred Major Modes
+
+The variable `mmm-major-mode-preferences' lets you tell MMM what modes
+you prefer for different programming languages and they will be used
+by all submode classes.
+
+** New Submode Classes
+
+New submode classes for JSP and ePerl are included.  A major bug in
+the handling of embedded Java (and other C-type languages) was fixed,
+so the JSP class should work consistently.
+
+
+* MMM Mode 0.4.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change:
+
+** New Submode Class for RPM Spec Files
+
+Contributed by Marcus Harnisch, the `rpm' submode class allows editing
+appropriate parts of RPM spec files in shell-script mode.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.5
+
+** Font-Lock works again in XEmacs
+
+The MMM code to handle font-locking broke in XEmacs several versions
+back due to differences in the font-lock implementation between Emacs
+and XEmacs.  It appears to be working once again.
+
+** Here-Document submode class improved
+
+Here-document names such as <<TEXT_EOF and <<END_PERL_CODE are now
+correctly recognized, and `mmm-here-doc-mode-alist' allows you to
+define your own mappings from here-document names to submodes.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.4
+
+** Tab Completion in `mmm-ify-by-class' (`C-c % C-c')
+
+When interactively specifying a submode class, completion on all
+defined public (not internal/private) submode classes is available.
+
+** Submode classes can now be autoloaded
+
+You don't need (require 'mmm-mason) or (require 'mmm-sample) in your
+.emacs file any more; all the supplied submode classes that are not
+automatically loaded are autoloaded from their files of definition.
+
+** Here-Document submode class can now recognize any submode
+
+As long as the name of the here-document is or begins with the name of
+the appropriate submode, suitably mangled, such as <<HTML or
+<<HTML_MODE or <<HTML_MODE_EOF, it should be correctly recognized.
+
+** New File Variables submode class
+
+Actually, this is an old submode class that now works (better than
+before) with the new post-0.3.8 syntax for class definition.  It is a
+good candidate for membership in `mmm-global-classes' if you use many
+file-local variables, but is not there by default.
+
+** New flags :include-{front,back}
+
+If the keywords INCLUDE-FRONT or INCLUDE-BACK are set to non-nil
+values in a submode class definition, the corresponding delimiter will
+be included inside the submode region.
+
+** New values for :{front,back}-offset
+
+The keywords FRONT-OFFSET and BACK-OFFSET can now be function to call,
+such as `beginning-of-line' or `end-of-line', or lists of values to
+apply in sequence, such as (end-of-line 1).
+
+** Search for next region now starts at end of previous one
+
+...rather than at the end of the previous region's ending delimiter.
+This allows matching regions ended only by the start of the next one.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.3
+
+** Syntax of Universal Class Changed
+
+Instead of %[MODE]% ... %[/MODE]%, the universal class now uses
+{%MODE%} ... {%/MODE%} which isn't quite as ugly and doesn't to my
+knowledge conflict with any other syntax.
+
+** Some Bugs under Emacs 19 and XEmacs Fixed
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.2
+
+** Global Classes and `Universal' Class
+
+The new variable `mmm-global-classes' is the inverse of `mmm-classes'
+in that it contains submode classes which apply to all MMM Mode
+buffers unless turned off manually with file-local variables.  By
+default, it contains the class `universal', which defines the syntax
+%[MODE]% ... %[/MODE]% to specify regions of any mode.  This allows,
+for instance, example code embedded in an email to be both edited by
+the sender and viewed by the receiver in an appropriate mode.
+
+** New Embperl Submode Class
+
+The new supplied submode class `embperl', which can be loaded with
+(require 'mmm-sample), detects the Embperl syntax [+...+] (and so on)
+for embedded Perl code.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.1
+
+** Font Lock Parsing Speed Improved
+
+Extra regions were being parsed due to an error in finding the right
+regions, slowing down the parsing considerably.  This has been fixed.
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.4.0
+
+** Improved Local Variable Saving
+
+Local variables can now be saved for only some major modes, as well as
+both globally, per-buffer, or per-submode region.  This facility is
+now used to save the font-lock cache state, possible improving the
+font-lock support.  See the docs for `mmm-save-local-variables'.
+
+** Get and Set Class Parameters
+
+The functions `mmm-[get,set]-class-parameters' do just that.  The
+latter modifies the definition of a submode class, affecting all
+subsequent applications of that class.
+
+** New Implementation for MMM Global Mode
+
+The implementation of MMM Global Mode has been changed from the
+"stack-walk" method to the "post-command-hook" method used by
+global-font-lock-mode.  This is arguably cleaner, but more
+importantly, waits until after all local variables and text are loaded
+before trying to enabling MMM Mode.
+
+
+* MMM Mode 0.3.10 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes
+
+
+* MMM Mode 0.3.9 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes
+
+
+* Changes in MMM Mode 0.3.8
+
+** IMPORTANT: Default key bindings have changed.
+
+The MMM Mode commands, including interactive MMM-ification and
+re-parsing buffer regions, are now bound by default to key sequences
+of the form `C-c % C-<letter>', rather than `C-c % <letter>' as
+in previous versions.  Key sequences of the form `C-c % <letter>' are
+now reserved for submode region insertion.  The old behavior can be
+restored by setting the variable `mmm-use-old-command-keys' to a
+non-nil value before MMM Mode is loaded--then insertion commands are
+bound to `C-c % C-<letter>' sequences.
+
+** New Global Mode added
+
+MMM Global Mode can now turn MMM Mode on automatically in all buffers,
+or only in buffers that have associated submode classes.  It replaces
+the previous function `mmm-add-find-file-hook', which still works for
+now.  A side effect of this change is that it is no longer necessary
+to use `mmm-add-mode-ext-class': `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist' can be
+modified directly.
+
+The hack used by MMM Global Mode to insinuate itself into all buffers
+is different from, but vaguely similar to, the one used by FSF Emacs'
+Global Font Lock Mode.  In order that future writers of global modes
+don't have to reinvent the wheel, MMM Global Mode provides the hook
+`mmm-major-mode-hook' which is run (in theory) whenever a major mode
+starts up.  Perhaps in future this will be provided in a separate
+package.
+
+** Automatic submode region insertion commands
+
+Submode classes can now define skeletons for automatic insertion of
+submode regions with delimiters.  For example, when using the Mason
+class, the key sequence `C-c % %' will (by default) insert the text
+`<% -!- %>' with point where indicated and submode region already
+present.  These commands also wrap around words as described in the
+documentation of `skeleton-insert'.
+
+** Info Documentation File
+
+MMM Mode now has an (admittedly incomplete) manual in Texinfo format.
+It can be found in the files `mmm.info' or `mmm.texinfo' in the
+distribution.
+
+** Automatic Installation
+
+MMM Mode now uses GNU automake/autoconf for ease of installation.  See
+the files README and INSTALL for more information.
+
+** Changed submode class specification format
+
+This change affects only people who define their own submode classes.
+The format for defining submode classes has changed; it now uses
+keyword arguments for clarity and has a few more possible arguments,
+including skeletons for submode region insertion.
diff --git a/README b/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68a973e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+
+                          MMM Mode for Emacs
+                          ==================
+
+OVERVIEW
+
+  MMM Mode is a minor mode for Emacs that allows Multiple Major Modes
+  to coexist in one buffer.  It is well-suited to editing:
+
+  * Preprocessed code, such as server-side Ruby, Perl or PHP embedded in HTML
+  * Code generating code, such as HTML output by CGI scripts
+  * Embedded code, such as Javascript in HTML
+  * Literate programming: code interspersed with documentation, e.g. Noweb
+
+INSTALLATION
+
+  Use any of the following options:
+
+  1. Users of package.el (a.k.a. ELPA) can easily install MMM Mode from
+  the ELPA package repository at https://elpa.gnu.org/ -- this is the
+  preferred and best-supported installation mechanism.
+
+  2. Since currently MMM Mode is written in pure Emacs Lisp, you could just
+  copy all the *.el files in the distribution to a directory in your
+  `load-path', and optionally byte-compile them manually (see the Emacs
+  Manual). The configure installation also installs the MMM Mode info manual
+  in your site info directory, so if you're installing manually, you might
+  want to do that too.
+
+  3. MMM Mode has a standard GNU configure-driven installation.
+  (See the file INSTALL for generic instructions, most of which don't apply.)
+  To install in the standard locations, unpack the archive, `cd' to
+  the mmm-mode-X.X.X directory created, and run these commands:
+
+    make maintainer-clean # optional step
+    ./autogen.sh
+    ./configure
+    make
+    make install
+
+  If you have more than one version of emacs installed and want to
+  use MMM in a version other than /usr/bin/emacs, you must set the
+  environment variable EMACS before running `configure', e.g.
+
+    EMACS=/usr/bin/xemacs ./configure
+    make
+    make install
+
+  If you want to use MMM in more than one version of emacs, you must
+  either have separate site-lisp directories (such as Debian does), or
+  load it from source every time; byte-compiled files are not portable
+  between emacsen.
+
+CONFIGURATION
+
+  Once MMM Mode is installed, it has to be configured correctly.  This
+  can be done in a site-start file or in user's initialization files;
+  usually the latter is preferable, except possibly for autoloads.
+  First the package needs to be loaded, with either
+
+    (require 'mmm-mode)
+
+  or instead, to save time during emacs startup,
+
+    (require 'mmm-auto)
+
+  Then you will probably want to set something like this:
+
+    (setq mmm-global-mode 'maybe)
+    (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-mode "\\.php\\'" 'html-php)
+
+  The first line tells MMM Mode to load itself whenever you open an
+  appropriate file, and the second is an example which says to notice
+  PHP regions in html-mode files having a `.php' extension.  Both
+  lines are necessary.
+
+  You will, of course, want to change and duplicate the second line
+  according to your needs. either of the first two parameters can be
+  `nil', meaning not to consider that criterion.  For example, if all
+  your html files, regardless of extension, are Mason components, you
+  will want something like:
+
+    (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-mode nil 'mason)
+
+  whereas if all your files with a `.nw' extension, regardless of
+  primary mode (some may be LaTeX, others HTML, say) are Noweb, you
+  will prefer
+
+    (mmm-add-mode-ext-class nil "\\.nw\\'" 'noweb)
+
+  See the info file for more extensive documentation, and for other
+  configuration options.
+
+DOCUMENTATION
+
+  For further information, see (in order) the accompanying info file,
+  the documentation strings of functions and variables, the comments
+  in the source code, and the source code itself.
+
+UPDATES
+
+  The latest version of MMM Mode should always be available from
+  https://github.com/purcell/mmm-mode
+
+FEEDBACK
+
+  Bug reports, suggestions and questions can be submitted at
+  https://github.com/purcell/mmm-mode/issues.
+
+  Thanks for using MMM Mode!
diff --git a/README.Mason b/README.Mason
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..062435c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.Mason
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+-*-text-*-
+                Using MMM Mode for Mason: An Overview
+                =====================================
+
+  Since many users of MMM Mode use it for Mason <www.masonhq.com>, and
+  since the Mason submode class is the most complex one supplied, a
+  few comments regarding its usage are in order.  Even if you don't
+  use Mason, this file may be of interest to you as an example of MMM
+  usage and possible problems.
+
+INSTALLATION AND LOADING
+
+  For general installation and information, see the README file and
+  the texinfo documentation.  The submode class for Mason components
+  is called `mason' and is automatically loaded from `mmm-mason.el'
+  the first time it is used.
+
+MODES AND EXTENSIONS
+
+  If you want to have mason submodes automatically in all Mason files,
+  you can use `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist'; the details depend on what
+  you call your Mason components and what major mode you use.  Some
+  example elements of `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist' follow, with
+  comments on the corresponding naming scheme.
+
+  (html-mode "\\.html\\'" mason)         ;; Any .html file in html-mode
+  (hm--html-mode nil mason)              ;; Any buffer in hm--html-mode
+  (sgml-mode nil mason)                  ;; Any buffer in sgml-mode
+  (nil "\\.\\(mason\\|html\\)\\'" mason) ;; All .mason and .html files
+  (nil "\\.m[dc]\\'" mason)              ;; All .md and .mc files
+  (nil "\\`/var/www/mason/" mason)       ;; Any file in the directory
+  (nil nil mason)                        ;; All buffers.
+
+  In order for any of these to work, you must set `mmm-global-mode' to
+  a non-nil value, such as `t' or `maybe' (the two of which mean
+  different things; see the documentation).  This can be done with a
+  line in .emacs such as the following:
+
+  (setq mmm-global-mode 'maybe)
+
+  If you use an extension for your Mason files that emacs does not
+  automatically place in your preferred HTML Mode (be it html-mode,
+  sgml-html-mode, hm--html-mode, or whatever), you will probably want
+  to associate that extension with your HTML Mode (this is a feature
+  of emacs, not MMM Mode).  An example is shown below.
+
+  (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.mason\\'" . html-mode))
+
+  This also goes for "special" Mason files such as autohandlers and
+  dhandlers.  The code below tells emacs to use html-mode for files
+  named `autohandler' and `dhandler'.
+
+  (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\(auto\\|d\\)handler\\'" . html-mode))
+
+  An alternate solution is to change the names of your autohandlers
+  and dhandlers so that emacs recognizes them as HTML automatically.
+  Similar code can be used to recognize all files in a given directory
+  as HTML and/or Mason.
+
+CPERL PROBLEMS
+
+  There are certain problems with CPerl mode in submode regions.  (Not
+  to say that the original perl-mode would do any better--it hasn't
+  been much tried.)  First of all, the first line of a Perl section
+  is usually indented as if it were a continuation line.  A fix for
+  this is to start with a semicolon on the first line.  The insertion
+  key commands do this whenever the Mason syntax allows it.
+
+  <%perl>;
+  print $var;
+  </%perl>
+
+  In addition, some users have reported that the CPerl indentation
+  sometimes does not work.  This problem has not yet been tracked
+  down, however, and more data about when it happens would be helpful.
+
+PSGML PROBLEMS
+
+  Some people have reported problems using PSGML with Mason.  Adding
+  the following line to a .emacs file should suffice to turn PSGML off
+  and cause emacs to use a simpler HTML mode:
+
+  (autoload 'html-mode "sgml-mode" "HTML Mode" t)
+
+  Earlier versions of PSGML may require instead the following fix:
+
+  (delete '("\\.html$" . sgml-html-mode) auto-mode-alist)
+  (delete '("\\.shtml$" . sgml-html-mode) auto-mode-alist)
+
+  Other users report using PSGML with Mason and MMM Mode without
+  difficulty.  If you don't have problems and want to use PSGML, you
+  may need to replace `html-mode' in the suggested code with
+  `sgml-html-mode'.  (Depending on your version of PSGML, this may not
+  be necessary.)  Similarly, if you are using XEmacs and want to use
+  the alternate HTML mode `hm--html-mode', replace `html-mode' with
+  that symbol.
+
+  One problem that crops up when using PSGML with Mason is that even
+  ignoring the special tags and Perl code (which, as I've said,
+  haven't caused me any problems), Mason components often are not a
+  complete SGML document.  For instance, my autohandlers often say
+
+  <body>
+    <% $m->call_next %>
+  </body>
+
+  in which case the actual components contain no doctype declaration,
+  <html>, <head>, or <body>, confusing PSGML.  One solution I've found
+  is to use the variable `sgml-parent-document' in such incomplete
+  components; try, for example, these lines at the end of a component.
+
+  %# Local Variables:
+  %# sgml-parent-document: ("autohandler" "body" nil ("body"))
+  %# sgml-doctype: "/top/level/autohandler"
+  %# End:
+
+  This tells PSGML that the current file is a sub-document of the file
+  `autohandler' and is included inside a <body> tag, thus alleviating
+  its confusion, and also instructs it where to find the doctype
+  declaration (assuming your top-level autohandler has one).  This
+  alleviates most problems for me.  I admit to not understanding PSGML
+  internals very well, so YMMV.
diff --git a/TODO b/TODO
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df052b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/TODO
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+Hey Emacs, this is a -*-text-*- file!
+
+                       To Do List for MMM Mode
+                       =======================
+
+Custom mode functions like `mason-mode'.
+
+Make Mason work a little better with PSGML.  The fix I've found works,
+but it would be nifty if MMM could do it automatically.  Maybe the
+custom-mode thing could set the variables, or a hook somewhere.
+
+Apostrophes mess up Perl parsing in XEmacs but not Emacs.  I thought
+it was because XEmacs sets `font-lock-beginning-of-syntax-function'
+after MMM does, but changing that that didn't fix it.
+
+Support for: ASP
+
+DEB and/or RPM packages would be nice.
+
+The local-variables improvements can probably be used to set minor
+modes locally to submode regions.  This could replace tmmofl,
+especially if we search for regions other than by regexps, say by
+syntax properties.
+
+Trap paragraph motion commands to stop at submode boundaries?
+
+It would be nice if C-j ended a Mason one-liner and began a new one on
+the next line.  This is a rather Mason-specific thing, but other
+classes might have similar single-line regions.  Add a new submode
+class argument, such as KEYMAP, or even ONE-LINE?
+
+Allow a submode class to specify its allowable "parent" submode
+classes.  This could also be used to implement htp.p, by first
+scanning for the function calls as a major-mode submode region, then
+requiring that parent type for the HTML mode class.  Nested submodes
+alternate highlight colors, say with `mmm-secondary-submode-face'.
+
+Ought %text in Mason to be a non-submode, since any Mason tags inside
+it will probably be /edited/ as Perl (being, say, code examples)?
+Only problem is it might confuse the programmer into thinking that
+code will get executed. Maybe use a different face.  Could do that
+with another grouping class, say uneval-mason, that overrides the
+faces of mason and has :parent mason-text, and allow a mode to specify
+what about it changes depending on its parent, or a parent to specify
+changes to its children, or a group to specify changes to its members.
+
+Port or generalize the relevant bits from ERB indentation code to similar
+packages for other languages.
+
+Make re-parsing the buffer into regions incremental: take the position
+of the most early change, see the submodes nesting there, and resume
+parsing with that data. Shouldn't be too hard, conceptually. Maybe
+even ignore the nesting, backtrack to a position where there are no
+overlays, and re-parse from there (see mmm-parse-apply as a starting
+point). Remember to handle delimiter inclusion and offsets as best
+possible.
+
+Thus, make re-parsing automatic (from syntax-propertize-function,
+probably), making manual control unnecessary.
+
+Remove XEmacs stuff?
diff --git a/acinclude.m4 b/acinclude.m4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e02262f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/acinclude.m4
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+dnl
+dnl Execute arbitrary emacs lisp
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AC_EMACS_LISP, [
+elisp="$2"
+if test -z "$3"; then
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING(for $1)
+fi
+AC_CACHE_VAL(EMACS_cv_SYS_$1,[
+	OUTPUT=./conftest-$$
+	echo ${EMACS} -batch -eval "(let ((x ${elisp})) (write-region (if (stringp x) (princ x) (prin1-to-string x)) nil \"${OUTPUT}\"))" >& AC_FD_CC 2>&1  
+	${EMACS} -batch -eval "(let ((x ${elisp})) (write-region (if (stringp x) (princ x 'ignore) (prin1-to-string x)) nil \"${OUTPUT}\"nil 5))" >& AC_FD_CC 2>&1
+	retval=`cat ${OUTPUT}`
+	echo "=> ${retval}" >& AC_FD_CC 2>&1
+	rm -f ${OUTPUT}
+	EMACS_cv_SYS_$1=$retval
+])
+$1=${EMACS_cv_SYS_$1}
+if test -z "$3"; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT($$1)
+fi
+])
+
+AC_DEFUN(AC_XEMACS_P, [
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING([if $EMACS is really XEmacs])
+  AC_EMACS_LISP(xemacsp,(if (string-match \"XEmacs\" emacs-version) \"yes\" \"no\") ,"noecho")
+  XEMACS=${EMACS_cv_SYS_xemacsp}
+  EMACS_FLAVOR=emacs
+  if test "$XEMACS" = "yes"; then
+     EMACS_FLAVOR=xemacs
+  fi
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($XEMACS)
+  AC_SUBST(XEMACS)
+  AC_SUBST(EMACS_FLAVOR)
+])
+
+AC_DEFUN(AC_PATH_LISPDIR, [
+  AC_XEMACS_P
+  if test "$prefix" = "NONE"; then
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([prefix for your Emacs])
+	AC_EMACS_LISP(prefix,(expand-file-name \"..\" invocation-directory),"noecho")
+	prefix=${EMACS_cv_SYS_prefix}
+	AC_MSG_RESULT($prefix)
+  fi
+  AC_ARG_WITH(lispdir,          --with-lispdir            Where to install lisp files, lispdir=${withval})
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING([where .elc files should go])
+  if test -z "$lispdir"; then
+    dnl Set default value
+    theprefix=$prefix
+    if test "x$theprefix" = "xNONE"; then
+	theprefix=$ac_default_prefix
+    fi
+    lispdir="\$(datadir)/${EMACS_FLAVOR}/site-lisp"
+    for thedir in share lib; do
+	potential=
+	if test -d ${theprefix}/${thedir}/${EMACS_FLAVOR}/site-lisp; then
+	   lispdir="\$(prefix)/${thedir}/${EMACS_FLAVOR}/site-lisp"
+	   break
+	fi
+    done
+  fi
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($lispdir)
+  AC_SUBST(lispdir)
+])
+
+dnl
+dnl Determine the emacs version we are running.
+dnl Automatically substitutes @EMACS_VERSION@ with this number.
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AC_EMACS_VERSION, [
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for emacs version)
+AC_EMACS_LISP(version,(and (boundp 'emacs-major-version) (format \"%d.%d\" emacs-major-version emacs-minor-version)),"noecho")
+
+EMACS_VERSION=${EMACS_cv_SYS_version}
+AC_SUBST(EMACS_VERSION)
+AC_MSG_RESULT(${EMACS_VERSION})
+])
+
+dnl
+dnl Determine whether the specified version of Emacs supports packages
+dnl or not.  Currently, only XEmacs 20.3 does, but this is a general
+dnl check.
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AC_EMACS_PACKAGES, [
+AC_ARG_WITH(package-dir,      --with-package-dir        Configure as a XEmacs package in directory, [ EMACS_PACKAGE_DIR="${withval}"])
+if test -n "$EMACS_PACKAGE_DIR"; then
+  if test "$prefix" != "NONE"; then
+	AC_MSG_ERROR([--with-package-dir and --prefix are mutually exclusive])
+  fi
+  dnl Massage everything to use $(prefix) correctly.
+  prefix=$EMACS_PACKAGE_DIR
+  datadir='$(prefix)/etc/w3'
+  infodir='$(prefix)/info'
+  lispdir='$(prefix)/lisp/w3'
+fi
+AC_SUBST(EMACS_PACKAGE_DIR)
+])
+
+dnl
+dnl Check whether a function exists in a library
+dnl All '_' characters in the first argument are converted to '-'
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AC_EMACS_CHECK_LIB, [
+if test -z "$3"; then
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING(for $2 in $1)
+fi
+library=`echo $1 | tr _ -`
+AC_EMACS_LISP($1,(progn (fmakunbound '$2) (condition-case nil (progn (require '$library) (fboundp '$2)) (error (prog1 nil (message \"$library not found\"))))),"noecho")
+if test "${EMACS_cv_SYS_$1}" = "nil"; then
+	EMACS_cv_SYS_$1=no
+fi
+if test "${EMACS_cv_SYS_$1}" = "t"; then
+	EMACS_cv_SYS_$1=yes
+fi
+HAVE_$1=${EMACS_cv_SYS_$1}
+AC_SUBST(HAVE_$1)
+if test -z "$3"; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT($HAVE_$1)
+fi
+])
+
+dnl
+dnl Check whether a variable exists in a library
+dnl All '_' characters in the first argument are converted to '-'
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AC_EMACS_CHECK_VAR, [
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for $2 in $1)
+library=`echo $1 | tr _ -`
+AC_EMACS_LISP($1,(progn (makunbound '$2) (condition-case nil (progn (require '$library) (boundp '$2)) (error nil))),"noecho")
+if test "${EMACS_cv_SYS_$1}" = "nil"; then
+	EMACS_cv_SYS_$1=no
+fi
+HAVE_$1=${EMACS_cv_SYS_$1}
+AC_SUBST(HAVE_$1)
+AC_MSG_RESULT($HAVE_$1)
+])
+
+dnl
+dnl Perform sanity checking and try to locate the custom and widget packages
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AC_CHECK_CUSTOM, [
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for acceptable custom library)
+AC_CACHE_VAL(EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM,[
+AC_EMACS_CHECK_LIB(widget,widget-convert-text,"noecho")
+AC_EMACS_CHECK_LIB(wid_edit,widget-convert-text,"noecho")
+if test "${HAVE_widget}" = "yes"; then
+	EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM=yes
+else
+	if test "${HAVE_wid_edit}" != "no"; then
+		EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM=yes
+	else
+		EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM=no
+	fi
+fi
+if test "${EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM}" = "yes"; then
+	AC_EMACS_LISP(widget_dir,(file-name-directory (locate-library \"widget\")),"noecho")
+	EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM=$EMACS_cv_SYS_widget_dir
+fi
+])
+   AC_ARG_WITH(custom,           --with-custom             Specify where to find the custom package, [ EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM=`( cd $withval && pwd || echo "$withval" ) 2> /dev/null` ])
+   CUSTOM=${EMACS_cv_ACCEPTABLE_CUSTOM}
+   AC_SUBST(CUSTOM)
+   AC_MSG_RESULT("${CUSTOM}")
+])
+
diff --git a/autogen.sh b/autogen.sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..4258e25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/autogen.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+notfound=
+if ! type aclocal >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+    notfound=aclocal
+elif ! type automake >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+    notfound=automake
+elif ! type autoconf >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+    notfound=autoconf
+fi
+if test -n "$notfound"; then
+    echo OOPS: I can\'t find $notfound in your path!
+    echo You need aclocal, automake, and autoconf to generate configure.
+    echo Otherwise, you can install manually, see the README file.
+    exit;
+fi
+
+echo -n Running aclocal to generate aclocal.m4...
+aclocal
+echo done.
+
+echo -n Running automake to generate Makefile.in...
+automake
+echo done.
+
+echo -n Running autoconf to generate configure...
+autoconf
+echo done
diff --git a/configure.in b/configure.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c30f8f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/configure.in
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.
+AC_INIT()
+
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(mmm-mode, 0.5.7)
+
+dnl
+dnl Apparently, if you run a shell window in Emacs, it sets the EMACS
+dnl environment variable to 't'.  Lets undo the damage.
+dnl
+if test "${EMACS}" = "t"; then
+   EMACS=""
+fi
+
+AC_ARG_WITH(xemacs,           --with-xemacs             Use XEmacs to build, [ if test "${withval}" = "yes"; then EMACS=xemacs; else EMACS=${withval}; fi ])
+AC_ARG_WITH(emacs,            --with-emacs              Use Emacs to build, [ if test "${withval}" = "yes"; then EMACS=emacs; else EMACS=${withval}; fi ])
+
+AC_CHECK_PROG(EMACS, xemacs, xemacs, emacs)
+
+AM_PATH_LISPDIR
+
+AC_EMACS_VERSION
+
+
+dnl Checks for programs.
+
+dnl Checks for libraries.
+
+dnl Checks for header files.
+
+dnl Checks for typedefs, structures, and compiler characteristics.
+
+dnl Checks for library functions.
+
+AC_SUBST(EMACS)
+
+AC_OUTPUT(Makefile)
diff --git a/elisp-comp b/elisp-comp
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..76f5d60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/elisp-comp
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# François Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1995.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# This script byte-compiles all `.el' files which are part of its
+# arguments, using GNU Emacs, and put the resulting `.elc' files into
+# the current directory, so disregarding the original directories used
+# in `.el' arguments.
+#
+# This script manages in such a way that all Emacs LISP files to
+# be compiled are made visible between themselves, in the event
+# they require or load-library one another.
+
+# This script was modified by Michael Abraham Shulman
+# <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net> not to create a temporary directory, so
+# that elisp files not given on the command line at the same time,
+# the way Automake *actually* uses this script, can load each other.
+
+if test $# = 0; then
+   echo 1>&2 "No files given to $0"
+   exit 1
+else
+   if test -z "$EMACS" || test "$EMACS" = "t"; then
+      # Value of "t" means we are running in a shell under Emacs.
+      # Just assume Emacs is called "emacs".
+      EMACS=emacs
+   fi
+
+#   tempdir=elc.$$
+#   mkdir $tempdir
+#   cp $* $tempdir
+#   cd $tempdir
+
+#   echo "elisp-comp called on $*"
+   echo "(setq load-path (cons nil load-path))" > script
+   $EMACS -q -batch -l script -f batch-byte-compile $*
+#   mv *.elc ..
+
+#   cd ..
+#   rm -fr $tempdir
+fi
diff --git a/install-sh b/install-sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..e9de238
--- /dev/null
+++ b/install-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+# This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh).
+#
+# Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
+#
+# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
+# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
+# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+# documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or
+# publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
+# written prior permission.  M.I.T. makes no representations about the
+# suitability of this software for any purpose.  It is provided "as is"
+# without express or implied warranty.
+#
+# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
+# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
+# when there is no Makefile.
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch.  It can only install one file at a time, a restriction
+# shared with many OS's install programs.
+
+
+# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
+
+# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
+doit="${DOITPROG-}"
+
+
+# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
+
+mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
+cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
+chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
+chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
+chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
+stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
+rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
+mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
+
+transformbasename=""
+transform_arg=""
+instcmd="$mvprog"
+chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755"
+chowncmd=""
+chgrpcmd=""
+stripcmd=""
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+mvcmd="$mvprog"
+src=""
+dst=""
+dir_arg=""
+
+while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
+    case $1 in
+	-c) instcmd="$cpprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-d) dir_arg=true
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'`
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'`
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	*)  if [ x"$src" = x ]
+	    then
+		src=$1
+	    else
+		# this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug
+		:
+		dst=$1
+	    fi
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+    esac
+done
+
+if [ x"$src" = x ]
+then
+	echo "install:	no input file specified"
+	exit 1
+else
+	true
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then
+	dst=$src
+	src=""
+	
+	if [ -d $dst ]; then
+		instcmd=:
+		chmodcmd=""
+	else
+		instcmd=mkdir
+	fi
+else
+
+# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command
+# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad 
+# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
+
+	if [ -f $src -o -d $src ]
+	then
+		true
+	else
+		echo "install:  $src does not exist"
+		exit 1
+	fi
+	
+	if [ x"$dst" = x ]
+	then
+		echo "install:	no destination specified"
+		exit 1
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
+# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
+
+	if [ -d $dst ]
+	then
+		dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+fi
+
+## this sed command emulates the dirname command
+dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'`
+
+# Make sure that the destination directory exists.
+#  this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script
+
+# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
+if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then
+defaultIFS='	
+'
+IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}"
+
+oIFS="${IFS}"
+# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
+IFS='%'
+set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'`
+IFS="${oIFS}"
+
+pathcomp=''
+
+while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do
+	pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}"
+	shift
+
+	if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ;
+        then
+		$mkdirprog "${pathcomp}"
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+	pathcomp="${pathcomp}/"
+done
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]
+then
+	$doit $instcmd $dst &&
+
+	if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi
+else
+
+# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now.
+
+	if [ x"$transformarg" = x ] 
+	then
+		dstfile=`basename $dst`
+	else
+		dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename | 
+			sed $transformarg`$transformbasename
+	fi
+
+# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename
+
+	if [ x"$dstfile" = x ] 
+	then
+		dstfile=`basename $dst`
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
+
+	dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
+
+# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
+
+	$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp &&
+
+	trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 &&
+
+# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
+
+# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing.  If we want to
+# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
+# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command.
+
+	if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+
+# Now rename the file to the real destination.
+
+	$doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile &&
+	$doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile 
+
+fi &&
+
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/mdate-sh b/mdate-sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..37171f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mdate-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it.
+# Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, June 1995
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# Prevent date giving response in another language.
+LANG=C
+export LANG
+LC_ALL=C
+export LC_ALL
+LC_TIME=C
+export LC_TIME
+
+# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory.
+# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below.
+if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  set - x`ls -L -l -d $1`
+else
+  set - x`ls -l -d $1`
+fi
+# The month is at least the fourth argument
+# (3 shifts here, the next inside the loop).
+shift
+shift
+shift
+
+# Find the month.  Next argument is day, followed by the year or time.
+month=
+until test $month
+do
+  shift
+  case $1 in
+    Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
+    Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
+    Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
+    Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
+    May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
+    Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
+    Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
+    Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
+    Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
+    Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
+    Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
+    Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
+  esac
+done
+
+day=$2
+
+# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either
+# the time of day or the year.
+case $3 in
+  *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$#
+       case $2 in
+	 Jan) nummonthtod=1;;
+	 Feb) nummonthtod=2;;
+	 Mar) nummonthtod=3;;
+	 Apr) nummonthtod=4;;
+	 May) nummonthtod=5;;
+	 Jun) nummonthtod=6;;
+	 Jul) nummonthtod=7;;
+	 Aug) nummonthtod=8;;
+	 Sep) nummonthtod=9;;
+	 Oct) nummonthtod=10;;
+	 Nov) nummonthtod=11;;
+	 Dec) nummonthtod=12;;
+       esac
+       # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also
+       # be used for files modified in the last year.
+       if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null;
+       then
+	 year=`expr $year - 1`
+       fi;;
+  *) year=$3;;
+esac
+
+# The result.
+echo $day $month $year
diff --git a/missing b/missing
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..fc54c64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/missing
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing.
+# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Originally by Fran,cois Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1996.
+
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
+# 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+  echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+run=:
+
+# In the cases where this matters, `missing' is being run in the
+# srcdir already.
+if test -f configure.ac; then
+  configure_ac=configure.ac
+else
+  configure_ac=configure.in
+fi
+
+case "$1" in
+--run)
+  # Try to run requested program, and just exit if it succeeds.
+  run=
+  shift
+  "$@" && exit 0
+  ;;
+esac
+
+# If it does not exist, or fails to run (possibly an outdated version),
+# try to emulate it.
+case "$1" in
+
+  -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help)
+    echo "\
+$0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...
+
+Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an
+error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM.
+
+Options:
+  -h, --help      display this help and exit
+  -v, --version   output version information and exit
+  --run           try to run the given command, and emulate it if it fails
+
+Supported PROGRAM values:
+  aclocal      touch file \`aclocal.m4'
+  autoconf     touch file \`configure'
+  autoheader   touch file \`config.h.in'
+  automake     touch all \`Makefile.in' files
+  bison        create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch]
+  flex         create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c
+  help2man     touch the output file
+  lex          create \`lex.yy.c', if possible, from existing .c
+  makeinfo     touch the output file
+  tar          try tar, gnutar, gtar, then tar without non-portable flags
+  yacc         create \`y.tab.[ch]', if possible, from existing .[ch]"
+    ;;
+
+  -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version)
+    echo "missing 0.4 - GNU automake"
+    ;;
+
+  -*)
+    echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option"
+    echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+    exit 1
+    ;;
+
+  aclocal*)
+    if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have it, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`${configure_ac}'.  You might want
+         to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages.  Grab them from
+         any GNU archive site."
+    touch aclocal.m4
+    ;;
+
+  autoconf)
+    if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have it, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`${configure_ac}'.  You might want to install the
+         \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages.  Grab them from any GNU
+         archive site."
+    touch configure
+    ;;
+
+  autoheader)
+    if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have it, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`${configure_ac}'.  You might want
+         to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages.  Grab them
+         from any GNU archive site."
+    files=`sed -n 's/^[ ]*A[CM]_CONFIG_HEADER(\([^)]*\)).*/\1/p' ${configure_ac}`
+    test -z "$files" && files="config.h"
+    touch_files=
+    for f in $files; do
+      case "$f" in
+      *:*) touch_files="$touch_files "`echo "$f" |
+				       sed -e 's/^[^:]*://' -e 's/:.*//'`;;
+      *) touch_files="$touch_files $f.in";;
+      esac
+    done
+    touch $touch_files
+    ;;
+
+  automake*)
+    if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have it, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`${configure_ac}'.
+         You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages.
+         Grab them from any GNU archive site."
+    find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print |
+	   sed 's/\.am$/.in/' |
+	   while read f; do touch "$f"; done
+    ;;
+
+  autom4te)
+    if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have it, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and you do not seem to have it handy on your
+         system.  You might have modified some files without having the
+         proper tools for further handling them.
+         You can get \`$1' as part of \`Autoconf' from any GNU
+         archive site."
+
+    file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*--output[ =]*\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+    test -z "$file" && file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o[ ]*\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+    if test -f "$file"; then
+	touch $file
+    else
+	test -z "$file" || exec >$file
+	echo "#! /bin/sh"
+	echo "# Created by GNU Automake missing as a replacement of"
+	echo "#  $ $@"
+	echo "exit 0"
+	chmod +x $file
+	exit 1
+    fi
+    ;;
+
+  bison|yacc)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified a \`.y' file.  You may need the \`Bison' package
+         in order for those modifications to take effect.  You can get
+         \`Bison' from any GNU archive site."
+    rm -f y.tab.c y.tab.h
+    if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then
+        eval LASTARG="\${$#}"
+	case "$LASTARG" in
+	*.y)
+	    SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/c/'`
+	    if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then
+	         cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.c
+	    fi
+	    SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/y$/h/'`
+	    if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then
+	         cp "$SRCFILE" y.tab.h
+	    fi
+	  ;;
+	esac
+    fi
+    if [ ! -f y.tab.h ]; then
+	echo >y.tab.h
+    fi
+    if [ ! -f y.tab.c ]; then
+	echo 'main() { return 0; }' >y.tab.c
+    fi
+    ;;
+
+  lex|flex)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified a \`.l' file.  You may need the \`Flex' package
+         in order for those modifications to take effect.  You can get
+         \`Flex' from any GNU archive site."
+    rm -f lex.yy.c
+    if [ $# -ne 1 ]; then
+        eval LASTARG="\${$#}"
+	case "$LASTARG" in
+	*.l)
+	    SRCFILE=`echo "$LASTARG" | sed 's/l$/c/'`
+	    if [ -f "$SRCFILE" ]; then
+	         cp "$SRCFILE" lex.yy.c
+	    fi
+	  ;;
+	esac
+    fi
+    if [ ! -f lex.yy.c ]; then
+	echo 'main() { return 0; }' >lex.yy.c
+    fi
+    ;;
+
+  help2man)
+    if test -z "$run" && ($1 --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have it, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+	 you modified a dependency of a manual page.  You may need the
+	 \`Help2man' package in order for those modifications to take
+	 effect.  You can get \`Help2man' from any GNU archive site."
+
+    file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+    if test -z "$file"; then
+	file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*--output=\([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+    fi
+    if [ -f "$file" ]; then
+	touch $file
+    else
+	test -z "$file" || exec >$file
+	echo ".ab help2man is required to generate this page"
+	exit 1
+    fi
+    ;;
+
+  makeinfo)
+    if test -z "$run" && (makeinfo --version) > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+       # We have makeinfo, but it failed.
+       exit 1
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file
+         indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual.  The spurious
+         call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX,
+         DU, IRIX).  You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or
+         the \`GNU make' package.  Grab either from any GNU archive site."
+    file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+    if test -z "$file"; then
+      file=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'`
+      file=`sed -n '/^@setfilename/ { s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/; p; q; }' $file`
+    fi
+    touch $file
+    ;;
+
+  tar)
+    shift
+    if test -n "$run"; then
+      echo 1>&2 "ERROR: \`tar' requires --run"
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+    # We have already tried tar in the generic part.
+    # Look for gnutar/gtar before invocation to avoid ugly error
+    # messages.
+    if (gnutar --version > /dev/null 2>&1); then
+       gnutar "$@" && exit 0
+    fi
+    if (gtar --version > /dev/null 2>&1); then
+       gtar "$@" && exit 0
+    fi
+    firstarg="$1"
+    if shift; then
+	case "$firstarg" in
+	*o*)
+	    firstarg=`echo "$firstarg" | sed s/o//`
+	    tar "$firstarg" "$@" && exit 0
+	    ;;
+	esac
+	case "$firstarg" in
+	*h*)
+	    firstarg=`echo "$firstarg" | sed s/h//`
+	    tar "$firstarg" "$@" && exit 0
+	    ;;
+	esac
+    fi
+
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: I can't seem to be able to run \`tar' with the given arguments.
+         You may want to install GNU tar or Free paxutils, or check the
+         command line arguments."
+    exit 1
+    ;;
+
+  *)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and you do not seem to have it handy on your
+         system.  You might have modified some files without having the
+         proper tools for further handling them.  Check the \`README' file,
+         it often tells you about the needed prerequisites for installing
+         this package.  You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case
+         some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program."
+    exit 1
+    ;;
+esac
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/mkinstalldirs b/mkinstalldirs
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5e17cd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mkinstalldirs
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy
+# Author: Noah Friedman <friedman@prep.ai.mit.edu>
+# Created: 1993-05-16
+# Public domain
+
+errstatus=0
+
+for file
+do
+   set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'`
+   shift
+
+   pathcomp=
+   for d
+   do
+     pathcomp="$pathcomp$d"
+     case "$pathcomp" in
+       -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;;
+     esac
+
+     if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+        echo "mkdir $pathcomp"
+
+        mkdir "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$?
+
+        if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+  	  errstatus=$lasterr
+        fi
+     fi
+
+     pathcomp="$pathcomp/"
+   done
+done
+
+exit $errstatus
+
+# mkinstalldirs ends here
diff --git a/mmm-auto.el b/mmm-auto.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30d46b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-auto.el
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+;;; mmm-auto.el --- loading and enabling MMM Mode automatically
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2004,  2012, 2013, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains functions and hooks to load and enable MMM Mode
+;; automatically. It sets up autoloads for the main MMM Mode functions
+;; and interactive commands, and also sets up MMM Global Mode.
+
+;;{{{ Comments on MMM Global Mode
+
+;; This is a kludge borrowed from `global-font-lock-mode'.  The idea
+;; is the same: we have a function (here `mmm-mode-on-maybe') that we
+;; want to be run whenever a major mode starts.  Unfortunately, there
+;; is no hook (like, say `major-mode-hook') that all major modes run
+;; when they are finished.  `post-command-hook', however, is run after
+;; *every* command, so we do our work in there.  (Actually, using
+;; `post-command-hook' is even better than being run by major mode
+;; functions, since it is run after all local variables and text are
+;; loaded, which may not be true in certain cases for the other.)
+
+;; FIXME: There's now after-change-major-mode-hook which should DTRT.
+
+;; In order to do this magic, we rely on the fact that there *is* a
+;; hook that all major modes run when *beginning* their work. They
+;; call `kill-all-local-variables' (unless they are broken), which in
+;; turn runs `change-major-mode-hook'.  So we add a function to *that*
+;; hook which saves the current buffer and temporarily adds a function
+;; to `post-command-hook' which processes that buffer.
+
+;; Actually, in the interests of generality, what that function does
+;; is run the hook `mmm-major-mode-hook'. Our desired function
+;; `mmm-mode-on-maybe' is then added to that hook. This way, if the
+;; user wants to run something else on every major mode, they can just
+;; add it to `mmm-major-mode-hook' and take advantage of this hack.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+
+;;{{{ Autoload Submode Classes
+
+(defvar mmm-autoloaded-classes
+  '((mason "mmm-mason" nil)
+    (myghty "mmm-myghty" nil)
+    (html-css "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (html-js "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (here-doc "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (embperl "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (eperl "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (jsp "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (file-variables "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (rpm-sh "mmm-rpm" t)
+    (rpm "mmm-rpm" nil)
+    (cweb "mmm-cweb" nil)
+    (sgml-dtd "mmm-sample" nil)
+    (noweb "mmm-noweb" nil)
+    (html-php "mmm-sample" nil)
+    )
+  "Alist of submode classes autoloaded from files.
+Elements look like \(CLASS FILE PRIVATE) where CLASS is a submode
+class symbol, FILE is a string suitable for passing to `load', and
+PRIVATE is non-nil if the class is invisible to the user.  Classes can
+be added to this list with `mmm-autoload-class'.")
+
+(defun mmm-autoload-class (class file &optional private)
+  "Autoload submode class CLASS from file FILE.
+PRIVATE, if non-nil, means the class is user-invisible.  In general,
+private classes need not be autoloaded, since they will usually be
+invoked by a public class in the same file."
+  ;; Don't autoload already defined classes
+  (unless (assq class mmm-classes-alist)
+    (add-to-list 'mmm-autoloaded-classes
+                 (list class file private))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Autoload Functions
+
+;; To shut up the byte compiler.
+(eval-and-compile
+  (autoload 'mmm-mode-on "mmm-mode" "Turn on MMM Mode. See `mmm-mode'.")
+  (autoload 'mmm-mode-off "mmm-mode" "Turn off MMM Mode. See `mmm-mode'.")
+  (autoload 'mmm-update-font-lock-buffer "mmm-region")
+  (autoload 'mmm-ensure-fboundp "mmm-utils")
+  (autoload 'mmm-mode "mmm-mode"
+    "Minor mode to allow multiple major modes in one buffer.
+Without ARG, toggle MMM Mode. With ARG, turn MMM Mode on iff ARG is
+positive and off otherwise." t))
+
+;; These may actually be used.
+(autoload 'mmm-ify-by-class "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-ify-by-regexp "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-ify-region "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-parse-buffer "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-parse-region "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-parse-block "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-clear-current-region "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-reparse-current-region "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-end-current-region "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-insertion-help "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+(autoload 'mmm-insert-region "mmm-cmds" "" t)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ MMM Global Mode
+
+(defvar mmm-changed-buffers-list ()
+  "Buffers that need to be checked for running the major mode hook.")
+
+(defun mmm-major-mode-change ()
+  "Add this buffer to `mmm-changed-buffers-list' for checking.
+When the current command is over, MMM Mode will be turned on in this
+buffer depending on the value of `mmm-global-mode'.  Actually,
+everything in `mmm-major-mode-hook' will be run."
+  (and (boundp 'mmm-mode)
+       mmm-mode
+       (mmm-mode-off))
+  (add-to-list 'mmm-changed-buffers-list (current-buffer))
+  (add-hook 'post-command-hook #'mmm-check-changed-buffers))
+
+(add-hook 'change-major-mode-hook #'mmm-major-mode-change)
+
+(defun mmm-check-changed-buffers ()
+  "Run major mode hook for the buffers in `mmm-changed-buffers-list'."
+  (remove-hook 'post-command-hook #'mmm-check-changed-buffers)
+  (dolist (buffer mmm-changed-buffers-list)
+    (when (buffer-live-p buffer)
+      (with-current-buffer buffer
+        (mmm-run-major-mode-hook))))
+  (setq mmm-changed-buffers-list '()))
+
+(defun mmm-mode-on-maybe ()
+  "Conditionally turn on MMM Mode.
+Turn on MMM Mode if `mmm-global-mode' is non-nil and there are classes
+to apply, or always if `mmm-global-mode' is t."
+  (cond ((eq mmm-global-mode t) (mmm-mode-on))
+        ((not mmm-global-mode))
+        ((mmm-get-all-classes nil) (mmm-mode-on)))
+  (when mmm-mode
+    (mmm-update-font-lock-buffer)))
+
+(add-hook 'mmm-major-mode-hook #'mmm-mode-on-maybe)
+
+(defalias 'mmm-add-find-file-hooks #'mmm-add-find-file-hook)
+(defun mmm-add-find-file-hook ()
+  "Equivalent to (setq mmm-global-mode 'maybe).
+This function is deprecated and may be removed in future."
+  (message "Warning: `mmm-add-find-file-hook' is deprecated.")
+  (setq mmm-global-mode 'maybe))
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-auto)
+
+;;; mmm-auto.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-class.el b/mmm-class.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d745519
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-class.el
@@ -0,0 +1,335 @@
+;;; mmm-class.el --- MMM submode class variables and functions
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2004, 2011-2015, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains variable and function definitions for
+;; manipulating and applying MMM submode classes. See `mmm-vars.el'
+;; for variables that list classes.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'cl-lib)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-region)
+
+;;; CLASS SPECIFICATIONS
+;;{{{ Get Class Specifications
+
+(defun mmm-get-class-spec (class)
+  "Get the class specification for CLASS.
+CLASS can be either a symbol to look up in `mmm-classes-alist' or a
+class specifier itself."
+  (cond ((symbolp class)        ; A symbol must be looked up
+         (or (cdr (assq class mmm-classes-alist))
+             (and (cadr (assq class mmm-autoloaded-classes))
+                  (load (cadr (assq class mmm-autoloaded-classes)))
+                  (cdr (assq class mmm-classes-alist)))
+             (signal 'mmm-invalid-submode-class (list class))))
+        ((listp class)          ; A list must be a class spec
+         class)
+        (t (signal 'mmm-invalid-submode-class (list class)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Get and Set Class Parameters
+
+(defun mmm-get-class-parameter (class param)
+  "Get the value of the parameter PARAM for CLASS, or nil if none."
+  (cadr (member param (mmm-get-class-spec class))))
+
+(defun mmm-set-class-parameter (class param value)
+  "Set the value of the parameter PARAM for CLASS to VALUE.
+Creates a new parameter if one is not present."
+  (let* ((spec (mmm-get-class-spec class))
+         (current (member param spec)))
+    (if current
+        (setcar (cdr current) value)
+      (nconc spec (list param value)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Apply Classes
+
+(cl-defun mmm-apply-class
+    (class &optional (start (point-min)) (stop (point-max)) face)
+  "Apply the submode class CLASS from START to STOP in FACE.
+If FACE is nil, the face for CLASS is used, or the default face if
+none is specified by CLASS."
+  ;; The "special" class t means do nothing. It is used to turn on
+  ;; MMM Mode without applying any classes.
+  (unless (eq class t)
+    (apply #'mmm-ify :start start :stop stop
+           (append (mmm-get-class-spec class)
+                  (list :face face)))
+    (mmm-run-class-hook class)
+    ;; Hack in case class hook sets mmm-buffer-mode-display-name etc.
+    (mmm-set-mode-line)))
+
+(cl-defun mmm-apply-classes
+    (classes &key (start (point-min)) (stop (point-max)) face)
+  "Apply all submode classes in CLASSES, in order.
+All classes are applied regardless of any errors that may occur in
+other classes. If any errors occur, `mmm-apply-classes' exits with an
+error once all classes have been applied."
+  (let (invalid-classes)
+    (dolist (class classes)
+      (condition-case err
+          (mmm-apply-class class start stop face)
+        (mmm-invalid-submode-class
+         ;; Save the name of the invalid class, so we can report them
+         ;; all together at the end.
+         (cl-pushnew (cl-second err) invalid-classes :test #'equal))))
+    (when invalid-classes
+      (signal 'mmm-invalid-submode-class invalid-classes))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Apply All Classes
+
+;; FIXME: This should be called by syntax-propertize-function,
+;; not vice versa.
+(cl-defun mmm-apply-all (&key (start (point-min)) (stop (point-max)))
+  "MMM-ify from START to STOP by all submode classes.
+The classes come from mode/ext, `mmm-classes', `mmm-global-classes',
+and interactive history."
+  (mmm-clear-overlays start stop 'strict)
+  (mmm-apply-classes (mmm-get-all-classes t) :start start :stop stop)
+  (mmm-update-submode-region)
+  ;; Try to continue supporting XEmacs for a while.
+  (when (fboundp 'syntax-propertize)
+    (syntax-ppss-flush-cache start)
+    (syntax-propertize stop))
+  (mmm-refontify-maybe start stop))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; BUFFER SCANNING
+;;{{{ Scan for Regions
+
+(cl-defun mmm-ify
+    (&rest all &key classes handler
+           ;; Many args are marked as "unused" below, but that's only
+           ;; because they're used via `all'.
+	   submode _match-submode
+           (start (point-min)) (stop (point-max))
+           front back _save-matches (case-fold-search t)
+           (beg-sticky (not (number-or-marker-p front)))
+           (end-sticky (not (number-or-marker-p back)))
+           _include-front _include-back
+           (front-offset 0) (back-offset 0)
+	   (front-delim nil) (back-delim nil)
+	   (delimiter-mode mmm-delimiter-mode)
+	   front-face back-face
+           _front-verify _back-verify
+           _front-form _back-form
+	   creation-hook
+           face _match-face
+	   _save-name _match-name
+           ;; FIXME: Since those args's arent' used directly (only passed down
+           ;; via `all'), these default values aren't obeyed!
+	   (_front-match 0) (_back-match 0)
+	   _end-not-begin
+           ;insert private
+           &allow-other-keys
+           )
+  "Create submode regions from START to STOP according to arguments.
+If CLASSES is supplied, it must be a list of valid CLASSes. Otherwise,
+the rest of the arguments are for an actual class being applied. See
+`mmm-classes-alist' for information on what they all mean."
+  ;; Make sure we get the default values in the `all' list.
+  (setq all (append
+             all
+             (list :start start :stop stop
+		   :beg-sticky beg-sticky :end-sticky end-sticky
+		   :front-offset front-offset :back-offset back-offset
+		   :front-delim front-delim :back-delim back-delim
+		   :front-match 0 :back-match 0
+		   )))
+  (cond
+   ;; If we have a class list, apply them all.
+   (classes
+    (mmm-apply-classes classes :start start :stop stop :face face))
+   ;; Otherwise, apply this class.
+   ;; If we have a handler, call it.
+   (handler
+    (apply handler all))
+   ;; Otherwise, we search from START to STOP for submode regions,
+   ;; continuining over errors, until we don't find any more. If FRONT
+   ;; and BACK are number-or-markers, this should only execute once.
+   (t
+    (mmm-save-all
+     (goto-char start)
+     (cl-loop for (beg end front-pos back-pos matched-front matched-back
+                    matched-submode matched-face matched-name
+                    invalid-resume ok-resume) =
+                    (apply #'mmm-match-region :start (point) all)
+           while beg
+           if end	       ; match-submode, if present, succeeded.
+           do
+           (condition-case nil
+               (progn
+                 (mmm-make-region
+		  (or matched-submode submode) beg end
+		  :face (or matched-face face)
+		  :front front-pos :back back-pos
+		  :evaporation 'front
+		  :match-front matched-front :match-back matched-back
+		  :beg-sticky beg-sticky :end-sticky end-sticky
+		  :name matched-name
+		  :delimiter-mode delimiter-mode
+		  :front-face front-face :back-face back-face
+		  :creation-hook creation-hook
+		  )
+		 (goto-char ok-resume))
+             ;; If our region is invalid, go back to the end of the
+             ;; front match and continue on.
+             (mmm-error (goto-char invalid-resume)))
+           ;; If match-submode was unable to find a match, go back to
+           ;; the end of the front match and continue on.
+           else do (goto-char invalid-resume)
+           )))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Match Regions
+
+(cl-defun mmm-match-region
+    (&key start stop front back front-verify back-verify
+          front-delim back-delim
+          include-front include-back front-offset back-offset
+          front-form back-form save-matches match-submode match-face
+	  front-match back-match end-not-begin
+	  save-name match-name
+          &allow-other-keys)
+  "Find the first valid region between point and STOP.
+Return \(BEG END FRONT-POS BACK-POS FRONT-FORM BACK-FORM SUBMODE FACE
+NAME INVALID-RESUME OK-RESUME) specifying the region.  See
+`mmm-match-and-verify' for the valid values of FRONT and BACK
+\(markers, regexps, or functions).  A nil value for END means that
+MATCH-SUBMODE failed to find a valid submode.  INVALID-RESUME is the
+point at which the search should continue if the region is invalid,
+and OK-RESUME if the region is valid."
+  (when (mmm-match-and-verify front start stop front-verify)
+    (let ((beg (mmm-match->point include-front front-offset front-match))
+	  (front-pos (if front-delim
+			 (mmm-match->point t front-delim front-match)
+		       nil))
+          (invalid-resume (match-end front-match))
+          (front-form (mmm-get-form front-form)))
+      (let ((submode (if match-submode
+                         (condition-case nil
+                             (mmm-save-all
+                              (funcall match-submode front-form))
+                           (mmm-no-matching-submode
+                            (cl-return-from
+                                mmm-match-region
+                              (cl-values beg nil nil nil nil nil nil nil nil
+                                      invalid-resume nil))))
+                       nil))
+	    (name (cond ((functionp match-name)
+			 (mmm-save-all (funcall match-name front-form)))
+			((stringp match-name)
+			 (if save-name
+			     (mmm-format-matches match-name)
+			   match-name))))
+            (face (cond ((functionp match-face)
+                         (mmm-save-all
+                          (funcall match-face front-form)))
+                        (match-face
+                         (cdr (assoc front-form match-face))))))
+        (when (mmm-match-and-verify
+               (if save-matches
+                   (mmm-format-matches back)
+                 back)
+               beg stop back-verify)
+          (let* ((end (mmm-match->point (not include-back)
+					back-offset back-match))
+		 (back-pos (if back-delim
+			       (mmm-match->point nil back-delim back-match)
+			     nil))
+		 (back-form (mmm-get-form back-form))
+		 (ok-resume (if end-not-begin 
+				(match-end back-match)
+			      end)))
+            (cl-values beg end front-pos back-pos front-form back-form
+		    submode face name
+                    invalid-resume ok-resume)))))))
+
+(defun mmm-match->point (beginp offset match)
+  "Find a point of starting or stopping from the match data.  If
+BEGINP, start at \(match-beginning MATCH), else \(match-end MATCH),
+and move OFFSET.  Handles all values of OFFSET--see `mmm-classes-alist'."
+  (save-excursion
+    (goto-char (if beginp
+		   (match-beginning match)
+		 (match-end match)))
+    (dolist (spec (if (listp offset) offset (list offset)))
+      (if (numberp spec)
+          (forward-char (or spec 0))
+        (funcall spec)))
+    (point)))
+
+(defun mmm-match-and-verify (pos start stop &optional verify)
+  "Find first match for POS between point and STOP satisfying VERIFY.
+Return non-nil if a match was found, and set match data. POS can be a
+number-or-marker, a regexp, or a function.
+
+If POS is a number-or-marker, it is used as-is. If it is a string, it
+is searched for as a regexp until VERIFY returns non-nil. If it is a
+function, it is called with argument STOP and must return non-nil iff
+a match is found, and set the match data. Note that VERIFY is ignored
+unless POS is a regexp."
+  (cond
+   ;; A marker can be used as-is, but only if it's in bounds.
+   ((and (number-or-marker-p pos) (>= pos start) (<= pos stop))
+    (goto-char pos)
+    (looking-at ""))            ; Set the match data
+   ;; Strings are searched for as regexps.
+   ((stringp pos)
+    (cl-loop always (re-search-forward pos stop 'limit)
+             until (or (not verify) (mmm-save-all (funcall verify)))))
+   ;; Otherwise it must be a function.
+   ((functionp pos)
+    (funcall pos stop))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Get Delimiter Forms
+
+(defun mmm-get-form (form)
+  "Return the delimiter form specified by FORM.
+If FORM is nil, call `mmm-default-get-form'. If FORM is a string,
+return it. If FORM is a function, call it. If FORM is a list, return
+its `car' \(usually in this case, FORM is a one-element list
+containing a function to be used as the delimiter form."
+  (cond ((stringp form) form)
+        ((not form) (mmm-default-get-form))
+        ((functionp form) (mmm-save-all (funcall form)))
+        ((listp form) (car form))))
+
+(defun mmm-default-get-form ()
+  (regexp-quote (match-string 0)))
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-class)
+
+;;; mmm-class.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-cmds.el b/mmm-cmds.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3de5166
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-cmds.el
@@ -0,0 +1,443 @@
+;;; mmm-cmds.el --- MMM Mode interactive commands and keymap
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2003, 2011-2013, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains the interactive commands for MMM Mode.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'cl-lib)
+(require 'font-lock)
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-class)
+
+;; APPLYING CLASSES
+;;{{{ Applying Predefined Classes
+
+(defun mmm-ify-by-class (class)
+  "Add submode regions according to an existing submode class."
+  (interactive
+   (list (intern
+          (completing-read
+           "Submode Class: "
+           (cl-remove-duplicates
+            (mapcar (lambda (spec) (list (symbol-name (car spec))))
+                    (append
+                     (cl-remove-if (lambda (spec) (plist-get (cdr spec) :private))
+                                mmm-classes-alist)
+                     (cl-remove-if #'caddr mmm-autoloaded-classes)))
+            :test #'equal)
+           nil t))))
+  (unless (eq class (intern ""))
+    (mmm-apply-class class)
+    (mmm-add-to-history class)
+    (mmm-update-font-lock-buffer)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Applying by the Region
+
+(defun mmm-ify-region (submode front back)
+  "Add a submode region for SUBMODE coinciding with current region."
+  (interactive "aSubmode: \nr")
+  (mmm-ify :submode submode :front front :back back)
+  (setq front (mmm-make-marker front t nil)
+        back (mmm-make-marker back nil nil))
+  (mmm-add-to-history `(:submode ,submode :front ,front :back ,back))
+  (mmm-enable-font-lock submode))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Applying Simple Regexps
+
+(defun mmm-ify-by-regexp
+  (submode front front-offset back back-offset save-matches)
+  "Add SUBMODE regions to the buffer delimited by FRONT and BACK.
+With prefix argument, prompts for all additional keywords arguments.
+See `mmm-classes-alist'."
+  (interactive "aSubmode: 
+sFront Regexp: 
+nOffset from Front Regexp: 
+sBack Regexp: 
+nOffset from Back Regexp: 
+nNumber of matched substrings to save: ")
+  (let ((args (mmm-save-keywords submode front back front-offset
+                                 back-offset save-matches)))
+    (apply #'mmm-ify args)
+    (mmm-add-to-history args))
+  (mmm-enable-font-lock submode))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; EDITING WITH REGIONS
+;;{{{ Re-parsing Areas
+
+(defun mmm-parse-buffer ()
+  "Re-apply all applicable submode classes to current buffer.
+Clears all current submode regions, reapplies all past interactive
+mmm-ification, and applies `mmm-classes' and mode-extension classes."
+  (interactive)
+  (message "MMM-ifying buffer...")
+  (mmm-apply-all)
+  (message "MMM-ifying buffer...done"))
+
+(defun mmm-parse-region (start stop)
+  "Re-apply all applicable submode classes between START and STOP.
+Clears all current submode regions, reapplies all past interactive
+mmm-ification, and applies `mmm-classes' and mode-extension classes."
+  (interactive "r")
+  (message "MMM-ifying region...")
+  (mmm-apply-all :start start :stop stop)
+  (message "MMM-ifying region...done"))
+
+(defun mmm-parse-block (&optional lines)
+  "Re-parse LINES lines before and after point \(default 1).
+Clears all current submode regions, reapplies all past interactive
+mmm-ification, and applies `mmm-classes' and mode-extension classes.
+
+This command is intended for use when you have just typed what should
+be the delimiters of a submode region and you want to create the
+region. However, you may want to look into the various types of
+delimiter auto-insertion that MMM Mode provides. See, for example,
+`mmm-insert-region'."
+  (interactive "p")
+  (message "MMM-ifying block...")
+  (cl-destructuring-bind (start stop) (mmm-get-block lines)
+    (when (< start stop)
+      (mmm-apply-all :start start :stop stop)))
+  (message "MMM-ifying block...done"))
+
+(defun mmm-get-block (lines)
+  (let ((inhibit-point-motion-hooks t))
+    (list (save-excursion
+            (forward-line (- lines))
+            (beginning-of-line)
+            (point))
+          (save-excursion
+            (forward-line lines)
+            (end-of-line)
+            (point)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Reparse Current Region
+
+(defun mmm-reparse-current-region ()
+  "Clear and reparse the area of the current submode region.
+Use this command if a submode region's boundaries have become wrong."
+  (interactive)
+  (let ((ovl (mmm-overlay-at (point) 'all)))
+    (when ovl
+      (let ((beg (save-excursion
+                   (goto-char (mmm-front-start ovl))
+                   (forward-line -1)
+                   (point)))
+            (end (save-excursion
+                   (goto-char (mmm-back-end ovl))
+                   (forward-line 1)
+                   (point))))
+        (mmm-parse-region beg end)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Clear Submode Regions
+
+;; See also `mmm-clear-history' which is interactive.
+
+(defun mmm-clear-current-region ()
+  "Deletes the submode region point is currently in, if any."
+  (interactive)
+  (delete-overlay (mmm-overlay-at (point) 'all)))
+
+(defun mmm-clear-regions (start stop)
+  "Deletes all submode regions from START to STOP."
+  (interactive "r")
+  (mmm-clear-overlays start stop))
+
+(defun mmm-clear-all-regions ()
+  "Deletes all submode regions in the current buffer."
+  (interactive)
+  (mmm-clear-overlays))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ End Current Region
+
+(cl-defun mmm-end-current-region (&optional arg)
+  "End current submode region.
+If ARG is nil, end it at the most appropriate place, usually its
+current back boundary. If ARG is non-nil, end it at point. If the
+current region is correctly bounded, the first does nothing, but the
+second deletes that delimiter as well.
+
+If the region's BACK property is a string, it is inserted as above and
+the overlay moved if necessary. If it is a function, it is called with
+two arguments--the overlay, and \(if ARG 'middle t)--and must do the
+entire job of this function."
+  (interactive "P")
+  (let ((ovl (mmm-overlay-at)))
+    (when ovl
+      (combine-after-change-calls
+        (save-match-data
+          (save-excursion
+            (when (mmm-match-back ovl)
+              (if arg
+                  (replace-match "")
+                (cl-return-from mmm-end-current-region)))))
+        (let ((back (overlay-get ovl 'back)))
+          (cond ((stringp back)
+                 (save-excursion
+                   (unless arg (goto-char (overlay-end ovl)))
+                   (save-excursion (insert back))
+                   (move-overlay ovl (overlay-start ovl) (point))))
+                ((functionp back)
+                 (funcall back ovl (if arg 'middle t))))))
+      (mmm-refontify-maybe (save-excursion (forward-line -1) (point))
+                           (save-excursion (forward-line 1) (point))))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Narrow to Region
+
+(defun mmm-narrow-to-submode-region (&optional pos)
+  "Narrow to the submode region at point."
+  (interactive)
+  ;; Probably don't use mmm-current-overlay here, because this is
+  ;; sometimes called from inside messy functions.
+  (let ((ovl (mmm-overlay-at pos)))
+    (when ovl
+      (narrow-to-region (overlay-start ovl) (overlay-end ovl)))))
+
+;; The inverse command is `widen', usually on `C-x n w'
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; INSERTING REGIONS
+;;{{{ Insert regions by keystroke
+
+;; This is the "default" binding in the MMM Mode keymap. Keys defined
+;; by classes should be control keys, to avoid conflicts with MMM
+;; commands.
+(defun mmm-insert-region (arg)
+  "Insert a submode region based on last character in invoking keys.
+Keystrokes after `mmm-mode-prefix-key' which are not bound to an MMM
+Mode command \(see `mmm-command-modifiers') are passed on to this
+function. If they have the modifiers `mmm-insert-modifiers', then they
+are looked up, sans those modifiers, in all current submode classes to
+find an insert skeleton. For example, in Mason, `p' \(with appropriate
+prefix and modifiers) will insert a <%perl>...</%perl> region."
+  (interactive "P")
+  (let* ((seq (this-command-keys))
+         (event (aref seq (1- (length seq))))
+         (mods (event-modifiers event))
+         (key (mmm-event-key event)))
+    (if (cl-subsetp mmm-insert-modifiers mods)
+        (mmm-insert-by-key
+         (append (cl-set-difference mods mmm-insert-modifiers)
+                 key)
+         arg))))
+
+(defun mmm-insert-by-key (key &optional arg)
+  "Insert a submode region based on event KEY.
+Inspects all the classes of the current buffer to find a matching
+:insert key sequence. See `mmm-classes-alist'. ARG, if present, is
+passed on to `skeleton-proxy-new' to control wrapping.
+
+KEY must be a list \(MODIFIERS... . BASIC-KEY) where MODIFIERS are
+symbols such as shift, control, etc. and BASIC-KEY is a character code
+or a symbol such as tab, return, etc. Note that if there are no
+MODIFIERS, the dotted list becomes simply BASIC-KEY."
+  (cl-multiple-value-bind (class skel str) (mmm-get-insertion-spec key)
+    (when skel
+      (let ((after-change-functions nil)
+            (old-undo buffer-undo-list) undo)
+        ;; XEmacs' skeleton doesn't manage positions by itself, so we
+        ;; have to do it.
+        (if mmm-xemacs (setq skeleton-positions nil))
+        (skeleton-proxy-new skel str arg)
+        (cl-destructuring-bind (back end beg front) skeleton-positions
+          ;; TODO: Find a way to trap invalid-parent signals from
+          ;; make-region and undo the skeleton insertion.
+          (let ((match-submode (plist-get class :match-submode))
+		(match-face (plist-get class :match-face))
+		(match-name (plist-get class :match-name))
+		(front-form (regexp-quote (buffer-substring front beg)))
+		(back-form (regexp-quote (buffer-substring end back)))
+		submode face name)
+	    (setq submode
+		  (mmm-modename->function
+		   (if match-submode
+		       (mmm-save-all (funcall match-submode front-form))
+		     (plist-get class :submode))))
+	    (setq face
+                  (cond ((functionp match-face)
+                         (mmm-save-all
+                          (funcall match-face front-form)))
+                        (match-face
+                         (cdr (assoc front-form match-face)))
+                        (t
+                         (plist-get class :face))))
+	    (setq name
+		  (cond ((plist-get class :skel-name)
+			 ;; Optimize the name to the user-supplied str
+			 ;; if we are so instructed.
+			 str)
+			;; Call it if it is a function
+			((functionp match-name)
+			 (mmm-save-all (funcall match-name front-form)))
+			;; Now we know it's a string, does it need to
+			;; be formatted?
+			((plist-get class :save-name)
+			 ;; Yes.  Haven't done a match before, so
+			 ;; match the front regexp against the given
+			 ;; form to format the string
+			 (string-match (plist-get class :front)
+				       front-form)
+			 (mmm-format-matches match-name front-form))
+			(t
+			 ;; No, just use it as-is
+			 match-name)))
+            (mmm-make-region
+             submode beg end 
+	     :face face
+	     :name name
+	     :front front :back back
+	     :match-front front-form :match-back back-form
+	     :evaporation 'front
+;;;             :beg-sticky (plist-get class :beg-sticky)
+;;;             :end-sticky (plist-get class :end-sticky)
+             :beg-sticky t :end-sticky t
+             :creation-hook (plist-get class :creation-hook))
+            (mmm-enable-font-lock submode)))
+        ;; Now get rid of intermediate undo boundaries, so that the entire
+        ;; insertion can be undone as one action.  This should really be
+        ;; skeleton's job, but it doesn't do it.
+        (setq undo buffer-undo-list)
+        (while (not (eq (cdr undo) old-undo))
+          (when (eq (cadr undo) nil)
+            (setcdr undo (cddr undo)))
+          (setq undo (cdr undo)))))))
+
+(defun mmm-get-insertion-spec (key &optional classlist)
+  "Get the insertion info for KEY from all classes in CLASSLIST.
+Return \(CLASS SKEL STR) where CLASS is the class spec a match was
+found in, SKEL is the skeleton to insert, and STR is the argument.
+CLASSLIST defaults to the return value of `mmm-get-all-classes',
+including global classes."
+  (cl-loop for classname in (or classlist (mmm-get-all-classes t))
+        for class = (mmm-get-class-spec classname)
+        for inserts = (plist-get class :insert)
+        for skel = (cddr (assoc key inserts))
+        with str
+        ;; If SKEL is a dotted pair, it means call another key's
+        ;; insertion spec with an argument.
+        unless (consp (cdr skel))
+        do (setq str (cdr skel)
+                 skel (cddr (assoc (car skel) inserts)))
+        if skel return (list class skel str)
+        ;; If we have a group class, recurse.
+        if (plist-get class :classes)
+           if (mmm-get-insertion-spec key it)
+              return it))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Help on Insertion
+
+(defun mmm-insertion-help ()
+  "Display help on currently available MMM insertion commands."
+  (interactive)
+  (with-output-to-temp-buffer "*Help*"
+    (princ "Available MMM Mode Insertion Commands:\n")
+    (princ "Key             Inserts\n")
+    (princ "---             -------\n\n")
+    (mapcar #'mmm-display-insertion-key
+            (mmm-get-all-insertion-keys))))
+
+(defun mmm-display-insertion-key (spec)
+  "Print an insertion binding to standard output.
+SPEC should be \(KEY NAME ...) where KEY is an insertion key and NAME
+is a symbol naming the insertion."
+  (let* ((str (make-string 16 ?\ ))
+         ;; This gets us a dotted list, because of the way insertion
+         ;; keys are specified.
+         (key (append mmm-insert-modifiers (car spec)))
+         (lastkey (nthcdr (max (1- (safe-length key)) 0) key)))
+    ;; Now we make it a true list
+    (if (consp key)
+        (setcdr lastkey (list (cdr lastkey)))
+      (setq key (list key)))
+    ;; Get the spacing right
+    (store-substring str 0
+      (key-description
+       (apply #'vector (append mmm-mode-prefix-key (list key)))))
+    (princ str)
+    ;; Now print the binding symbol
+    (princ (cadr spec))
+    (princ "\n")))
+
+(defun mmm-get-all-insertion-keys (&optional classlist)
+  "Return an alist of all currently available insertion keys.
+Elements look like \(KEY NAME ...) where KEY is an insertion key and
+NAME is a symbol naming the insertion."
+  (cl-remove-duplicates
+   (cl-loop for classname in (or classlist (mmm-get-all-classes t))
+         for class = (mmm-get-class-spec classname)
+         append (plist-get class :insert) into keys
+         ;; If we have a group class, recurse.
+         if (plist-get class :classes)
+         do (setq keys (append keys (mmm-get-all-insertion-keys it)))
+         finally return keys)
+   :test #'equal
+   :key (lambda (x) (cons (car x) (cadr x)))
+   :from-end t))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;{{{ Auto Insertion (copied from interactive session);-COM-
+;-COM-
+;-COM-;; Don't use `mmm-ify-region' of course. And rather than having
+;-COM-;; classes define their own functions, we should have them pass a
+;-COM-;; skeleton as an attribute. Then our insert function can turn off
+;-COM-;; after-change hooks and add the submode region afterward.
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(define-skeleton mmm-see-inline
+;-COM-  "" nil
+;-COM-  -1 @ " " _ " " @ "%>"
+;-COM-  '(apply #'mmm-ify-region 'cperl-mode (reverse skeleton-positions)))
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(define-skeleton mmm-see-other
+;-COM-  "" nil
+;-COM-  @ ";\n" _ "\n" @ "<%/" str ">"
+;-COM-  '(apply #'mmm-ify-region 'cperl-mode (reverse skeleton-positions)))
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(add-hook 'after-change-functions 'mmm-detect t)
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(defun mmm-detect (beg end length)
+;-COM-  (when (mmm-looking-back-at "<% ")
+;-COM-    (mmm-see-inline))
+;-COM-  (when (mmm-looking-back-at "<%\\(\\w+\\)>")
+;-COM-    (mmm-see-other (match-string 1))))
+;-COM-
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-cmds)
+
+;;; mmm-cmds.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-compat.el b/mmm-compat.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c594575
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-compat.el
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+;;; mmm-compat.el --- MMM Hacks for compatibility with other Emacsen
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000, 2003, 2011, 2013  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file provides a number of hacks that are necessary for MMM
+;; Mode to function in different Emacsen.  MMM Mode is designed for
+;; FSF Emacs, but these hacks usually enable it to work
+;; almost perfectly in XEmacs 21.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+;;{{{ Emacsen Detection
+
+(defvar mmm-xemacs (featurep 'xemacs)
+  "Whether we are running XEmacs.")
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Regexp-Opt (XEmacs)
+
+;; As of XEmacs' xemacs-base package version 1.82,
+;; the regexp-opt API is compatible with GNU Emacs.
+(defalias 'mmm-regexp-opt 'regexp-opt)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Overlays (XEmacs)
+
+;; The main thing we use from FSF Emacs that XEmacs doesn't support
+;; are overlays. XEmacs uses extents instead, but comes with a package
+;; to emulate overlays.
+(when mmm-xemacs
+  ;; This does almost everything we need.
+  (require 'overlay))
+
+;; We also use a couple "special" overlay properties which have
+;; different names for XEmacs extents.
+(defvar mmm-evaporate-property
+  (if (featurep 'xemacs) 'detachable 'evaporate)
+  "The name of the overlay property controlling evaporation.")
+
+;; We don't use this any more, since its behavior is different in FSF
+;; and XEmacs: in the one it replaces the buffer's local map, but in
+;; the other it gets stacked on top of it. Instead we just set the
+;; buffer's local map temporarily.
+;;;(defvar mmm-keymap-property
+;;;  (if (featurep 'xemacs) 'keymap 'local-map)
+;;;  "The name of the overlay property controlling keymaps.")
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Keymaps and Events (XEmacs)
+
+;; In XEmacs, keymaps are a primitive type, while in FSF Emacs, they
+;; are a list whose car is the symbol `keymap'. Among other things,
+;; this means that they handle default bindings differently.
+(defmacro mmm-set-keymap-default (keymap binding)
+  (if (featurep 'xemacs)
+      `(set-keymap-default-binding ,keymap ,binding)
+    `(define-key ,keymap [t] ,binding)))
+
+;; In XEmacs, events are a primitive type, while in FSF Emacs, they
+;; are represented by characters or vectors. We treat them as vectors.
+;; We can use `event-modifiers' in both Emacsen to extract the
+;; modifiers, but the function to extract the basic key is different.
+(defmacro mmm-event-key (event)
+  (if (featurep 'xemacs)
+      `(event-key ,event)
+    `(event-basic-type ,event)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Skeleton (XEmacs)
+
+;; XEmacs' `skeleton' package doesn't provide `@' to record positions.
+(defvar skeleton-positions ())
+(defun mmm-fixup-skeleton ()
+  "Add `@' to `skeleton-further-elements' if XEmacs and not there.
+This makes `@' in skeletons act approximately like it does in FSF."
+  (and (featurep 'xemacs)
+       (defvar skeleton-further-elements ())
+       (not (assoc '@ skeleton-further-elements))
+       (add-to-list 'skeleton-further-elements
+                    '(@ ''(push (point) skeleton-positions)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Make Temp Buffers (XEmacs)
+
+(defmacro mmm-make-temp-buffer (buffer name)
+  "Return a buffer with name based on NAME including the text of BUFFER.
+This text should not be modified."
+  (if (fboundp 'make-indirect-buffer)
+      `(make-indirect-buffer ,buffer (generate-new-buffer-name ,name))
+    `(save-excursion
+       (set-buffer (generate-new-buffer ,name))
+       (insert-buffer ,buffer)
+       (current-buffer))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Emacs < 26 requires namespaced CL functions
+
+(if (>= emacs-major-version 26)
+    (defalias 'mmm-mapcan 'mapcan)
+  (require 'cl-lib)
+  (defalias 'mmm-mapcan 'cl-mapcan))
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-compat)
+
+;;; mmm-compat.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-cweb.el b/mmm-cweb.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef399db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-cweb.el
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+;;; mmm-cweb.el --- MMM submode class for CWeb programs
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2013  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Alan Shutko <ats@acm.org>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains the definition of an MMM Mode submode class for
+;; editing CWeb programs.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+
+(defvar mmm-cweb-section-tags
+  '("@ " "@*"))
+
+(defvar mmm-cweb-section-regexp
+  (concat "^" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-cweb-section-tags t)))
+
+(defvar mmm-cweb-c-part-tags
+  '("@c" "@>=" "@>+=" "@p"))
+
+(defvar mmm-cweb-c-part-regexp
+  (concat (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-cweb-c-part-tags t)))
+
+(defun mmm-cweb-in-limbo (pos)
+  "Check to see if POS is in limbo, ie before any cweb sections."
+  (save-match-data
+    (save-excursion
+      (goto-char pos)
+      (not (re-search-backward mmm-cweb-section-regexp nil t)))))
+
+(defun mmm-cweb-verify-brief-c ()
+  "Verify function for cweb-brief-c class.
+Checks whether the match is in limbo."
+  (not (mmm-cweb-in-limbo (match-beginning 0))))
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'cweb
+ `(
+   (cweb-c-part
+    :submode c-mode
+    :front ,mmm-cweb-c-part-regexp
+    :back ,mmm-cweb-section-regexp)
+   (cweb-label
+    :submode tex-mode
+    :front "@<"
+    :back "@>"
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :insert ((?l cweb-label nil @ "@<" @ "@>")))
+   (cweb-brief-c
+    :submode c-mode
+    :front "[^\\|]\\(|\\)[^|]"
+    :front-match 1
+    :front-verify mmm-cweb-verify-brief-c
+;    :front-offset -1
+    :back "[^\\|]\\(|\\)"
+    :back-match 1
+;    :back-offset 1
+    :end-not-begin t
+    :insert ((?| cweb-c-in-tex nil "|" @ "|")))
+    (cweb-comment
+     :submode tex-mode
+     :front "/[*]"
+     :back "[*]/"
+     :face mmm-comment-submode-face)
+))
+
+;; (add-to-list 'mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+;;                   '(plain-tex-mode "\\.w\\'" cweb))
+;; (add-to-list 'mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+;;                   '(latex-mode "\\.w\\'" cweb))
+;; (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.w\\'" . tex-mode))
+
+(provide 'mmm-cweb)
+
+;;; mmm-cweb.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-defaults.el b/mmm-defaults.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4f3eec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-defaults.el
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+;;; mmm-defaults.el --- Friendly defaults for MMM Mode
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2013  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Dmitry Gutov <dgutov@yandex.ru>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; To enable multiple mode support in ERB, EJS and PHP files, just add the
+;; following line to your init file:
+;;
+;; (require 'mmm-defaults)
+;;
+;; Note that for PHP you still need to have php-mode (installed separately).
+;;
+;; TODO: Add more file types and classes here. Mention this file in README.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+
+(setq mmm-global-mode 'auto)
+
+;;; ERB and EJS
+
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode "\\.erb\\'" 'erb)
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode "\\.ejs\\'" 'ejs)
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode nil 'html-js)
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode nil 'html-css)
+
+(add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.html\\.erb\\'" . html-erb-mode))
+(add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("/[^.]+\\.erb\\'"  . html-erb-mode))
+(add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.jst\\.ejs\\'"  . html-erb-mode))
+
+;;; PHP
+
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-mode nil 'html-js)
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-mode nil 'html-css)
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-mode "\\.php\\'" 'html-php)
+(add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.html\\.php\\'" . html-mode))
+(add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("/[^.]+\\.php\\'"  . html-mode))
+
+(provide 'mmm-defaults)
+
+;;; mmm-defaults.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-erb.el b/mmm-erb.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3a5e04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-erb.el
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
+;;; mmm-erb.el --- ERB templates editing support
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2012, 2013, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Dmitry Gutov <dgutov@yandex.ru>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains definitions of ERB and EJS submode classes, and well as
+;; support functions for proper indentation.
+
+;; Usage:
+
+;; (require 'mmm-auto)
+
+;; (setq mmm-global-mode 'auto)
+
+;; (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode "\\.html\\.erb\\'" 'erb)
+;; (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode "\\.jst\\.ejs\\'" 'ejs)
+;; (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode nil 'html-js)
+;; (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode nil 'html-css)
+
+;; (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.html\\.erb\\'" . html-erb-mode))
+;; (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.jst\\.ejs\\'"  . html-erb-mode))
+
+;; Optional settings:
+
+;; (setq mmm-submode-decoration-level 2
+;;       mmm-parse-when-idle t)
+
+;; nXML as primary mode (supports only JS and CSS subregions):
+
+;; (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'nxml-web-mode nil 'html-js)
+;; (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'nxml-web-mode nil 'html-css)
+
+;; (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.xhtml\\'" . nxml-web-mode))
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'sgml-mode)
+(require 'cl-lib)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-region)
+
+(mmm-add-classes
+ '((erb :submode ruby-mode :front "<%[#=]?" :back "-?%>"
+        :match-face (("<%#" . mmm-comment-submode-face)
+                     ("<%=" . mmm-output-submode-face)
+                     ("<%" . mmm-code-submode-face))
+        :insert ((?% erb-code nil @ "<%" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+                 (?# erb-comment nil @ "<%#" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+                 (?= erb-expression nil @ "<%=" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @))
+        :creation-hook mmm-erb-mark-as-special)
+   (ejs :submode js-mode :front "<%[#=]?" :back "-?%>"
+        :match-face (("<%#" . mmm-comment-submode-face)
+                     ("<%=" . mmm-output-submode-face)
+                     ("<%" . mmm-code-submode-face))
+        :insert ((?% ejs-code nil @ "<%" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+                 (?# ejs-comment nil @ "<%#" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+                 (?= ejs-expression nil @ "<%=" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @))
+        :creation-hook mmm-erb-mark-as-special)))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-mark-as-special ()
+  "Hook function to run in ERB and EJS tag regions."
+  (overlay-put mmm-current-overlay 'mmm-special-tag t))
+
+;;;###autoload
+(define-derived-mode html-erb-mode html-mode "ERB-HTML"
+  (setq sgml-unclosed-tags nil) ; Simplifies indentation logic.
+  (set (make-local-variable 'mmm-indent-line-function) #'mmm-erb-indent-line)
+  (add-hook 'mmm-after-syntax-propertize-functions
+            #'html-erb-after-syntax-propertize nil t))
+
+(defun html-erb-after-syntax-propertize (overlay _mode beg end)
+  (when overlay
+    (with-silent-modifications
+      (funcall
+       (syntax-propertize-rules ("<\\|>" (0 ".")))
+       beg end))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-indent-line ()
+  "Indent the current line intelligently."
+  (interactive)
+  (let ((offset (- (current-column) (current-indentation))))
+    (back-to-indentation)
+    (mmm-update-submode-region)
+    (if (and mmm-current-overlay mmm-current-submode
+             (< (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay) (point-at-bol)))
+        ;; Region starts before the current line (and contains indentation).
+        ;; If it starts on the current line, then either first part of the line
+        ;; is in primary mode, or we're on the first line of a script or style
+        ;; tag contents. In the latter case, better to also indent it according
+        ;; to the primary mode (as text): `js-indent-line' ignores narrowing,
+        ;; gets confused by the angle bracket on the previous line and thus
+        ;; breaks our "top level" heuristic.
+        (mmm-erb-indent-line-submode)
+      (mmm-erb-indent-line-primary))
+    (when (> offset 0) (forward-char offset))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-indent-line-submode ()
+  "Indent line within a submode."
+  (let (added-whitespace)
+    (if (<= (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay)
+            (save-excursion (back-to-indentation) (point)))
+        ;; We're at a closing tag.
+        (mmm-erb-indent-to-region-start)
+      (save-restriction
+        (save-excursion
+          (goto-char (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay))
+          (when (not (looking-at "^\\|\\s-*$"))
+            ;; Submode region has text on the same line as the opening tag,
+            ;; pad it with whitespace to make the following lines line up.
+            (setq added-whitespace (current-column))
+            (insert-char ?\s added-whitespace)))
+        (narrow-to-region (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay)
+                          (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay))
+        (funcall (mmm-erb-orig-indent-function mmm-current-submode))
+        (when added-whitespace
+          ;; Remove the padding.
+          (save-excursion
+            (goto-char (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay))
+            (delete-char added-whitespace))))
+      ;; If submode indent function moved us to bol,
+      ;; we're on the top level, indent according to the primary mode.
+      (when (zerop (current-indentation))
+        (mmm-erb-indent-to-region-start
+         (mmm-erb-indent-offset mmm-primary-mode))))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-indent-to-region-start (&optional additional-offset)
+  "Indent line to match start of region, possibly adding ADDITIONAL-OFFSET."
+  (indent-line-to
+   (save-excursion
+     (goto-char (1- (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay)))
+     (+ (current-indentation)
+        (or additional-offset 0)))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-indent-line-primary ()
+  "Indent line in primary mode."
+  (let* ((here (point))
+         ;; Go before previous line's tag.
+         (start (progn (forward-line -1)
+                       (back-to-indentation)
+                       (let ((lcon (sgml-lexical-context)))
+                         (when (eq (car lcon) 'tag)
+                           ;; Tag spreads several lines.
+                           (goto-char (cdr lcon))
+                           (back-to-indentation)))
+                       (point)))
+         (regions (mmm-regions-in start here))
+         (n 0))
+    ;; Collect indent modifier depending on type of tags.
+    (cl-loop for region in regions
+          for type = (mmm-erb-scan-region region)
+          when type do
+          (if (eq type 'close)
+              (when (cl-plusp n) (cl-decf n))
+            (cl-incf n (if (eq type 'close) 0 1))))
+    (let ((eol (progn (goto-char here) (end-of-line 1) (point))))
+      ;; Look for "else" and "end" instructions to adjust modifier.
+      ;; If a block start instruction comes first, abort.
+      (cl-loop for region in (mmm-regions-in here eol)
+            for type = (mmm-erb-scan-region region)
+            until (eq type 'open)
+            when (memq type '(middle close)) do (cl-decf n)))
+    (goto-char here)
+    (funcall (mmm-erb-orig-indent-function mmm-primary-mode))
+    (let* ((indent (current-indentation))
+           (indent-step (mmm-erb-indent-offset mmm-primary-mode)))
+      (indent-line-to (+ indent (if n (* indent-step n) 0))))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-scan-region (region)
+  (when region ; Can be nil if a line is empty, for example.
+    (cl-destructuring-bind (submode beg end ovl) region
+      (let ((scan-fn (plist-get '(ruby-mode mmm-erb-scan-erb
+                                  js-mode   mmm-erb-scan-ejs)
+                                submode)))
+        (and scan-fn
+             (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-special-tag)
+             (save-excursion
+               (goto-char beg)
+               (skip-syntax-forward "-")
+               (funcall scan-fn end)))))))
+
+(defconst mmm-erb-ruby-close-re "\\<end\\>\\|}"
+  "Regexp to match the end of a Ruby block.")
+
+(defun mmm-erb-scan-erb (limit)
+  (cond ((looking-at "\\(?:if\\|unless\\|for\\|while\\)\\b") 'open)
+        ((looking-at "\\(?:else\\|elsif\\)\\b") 'middle)
+        ((looking-at mmm-erb-ruby-close-re) 'close)
+        ((and (re-search-forward (concat "\\(?: +do +\\| *{ *\\)"
+                                         "\\(?:|[A-Za-z0-9_, ]*|\\)? *")
+                                 limit t)
+              (let ((pt (point)))
+                (not (when (< pt limit)
+                       (goto-char limit)
+                       (skip-syntax-backward "-")
+                       (looking-back mmm-erb-ruby-close-re pt)))))
+         'open)))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-scan-ejs (limit)
+  (cond ((looking-at "\\(?:if\\|for\\|while\\)\\b") 'open)
+        ((looking-at "} *else\\b") 'middle)
+        ((looking-at "}") 'close)
+        ((re-search-forward " *{ *" limit t) 'open)))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-orig-indent-function (mode)
+  (get mode 'mmm-indent-line-function))
+
+(defvar mmm-erb-offset-var-alist
+  '((html-erb-mode . sgml-basic-offset)
+    (nxml-web-mode . nxml-child-indent)))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-indent-offset (mode)
+  (let ((name (cdr (assoc mode mmm-erb-offset-var-alist))))
+    (when name (symbol-value name))))
+
+;;;###autoload
+(define-derived-mode nxml-web-mode nxml-mode "nXML-Web"
+  (set (make-local-variable 'mmm-indent-line-function) #'mmm-erb-indent-line))
+
+(provide 'mmm-erb)
+
+;;; mmm-erb.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-mason.el b/mmm-mason.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..240ddfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-mason.el
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+;;; mmm-mason.el --- MMM submode class for Mason components
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2003, 2013, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains the definition of an MMM Mode submode class for
+;; editing Mason components.  See the file README.Mason for more
+;; details.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+
+;;{{{ Perl Tags
+
+(defvar mmm-mason-perl-tags
+  '("perl" "init" "cleanup" "once" "filter" "shared"
+    "perl_init" "perl_cleanup" "perl_once" "perl_filter"))
+
+(defvar mmm-mason-pseudo-perl-tags
+  '("args" "perl_args" "attr" "flags"))
+
+(defvar mmm-mason-non-perl-tags
+  '("doc" "perl_doc" "text" "perl_text" "def" "perl_def" "method"))
+
+(defvar mmm-mason-perl-tags-regexp
+  (concat "<%" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-mason-perl-tags t) ">")
+  "Matches tags beginning Mason sections containing Perl code.
+Saves the name of the tag matched.")
+
+(defvar mmm-mason-pseudo-perl-tags-regexp
+  (concat "<%" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-mason-pseudo-perl-tags t) ">")
+  "Match tags beginning Mason sections that look like Perl but aren't.
+Saves the name of the tag matched.")
+
+(defvar mmm-mason-tag-names-regexp
+  (regexp-opt (append mmm-mason-perl-tags mmm-mason-non-perl-tags) t)
+  "Matches any Mason tag name after the \"<%\". Used to verify that a
+\"<%\" sequence starts an inline section.")
+
+(defun mmm-mason-verify-inline ()
+  (not (looking-at mmm-mason-tag-names-regexp)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Add Classes
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'mason
+ `((mason-text
+    :submode nil
+    :front "<%text>"
+    :back "</%text>"
+    :insert ((?t mason-<%text> nil @ "<%text>" @ "\n"
+                 _ "\n" @ "</%text>" @)))
+   (mason-doc
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front "<%doc>"
+    :back "</%doc>"
+    :face nil
+    :insert ((?d mason-<%doc> nil @ "<%doc>" @ "\n"
+                 _ "\n" @ "</%doc>" @)))
+   (mason-perl
+    :submode perl
+    :match-face (("<%perl>" . mmm-code-submode-face)
+                 ("<%init>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%cleanup>" . mmm-cleanup-submode-face)
+                 ("<%once>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%filter>" . mmm-special-submode-face)
+                 ("<%shared>" . mmm-init-submode-face))
+    :front ,mmm-mason-perl-tags-regexp
+    :back "</%~1>"
+    :save-matches 1
+    :match-name "~1"
+    :save-name 1
+    :insert ((?, mason-<%TAG> "Perl section: " @ "<%" str ">" @
+                 ";\n" _ "\n" @ "</%" str ">" @)
+             (?< mason-<%TAG> ?, . nil)
+             (?p mason-<%perl> ?, . "perl")
+             (?i mason-<%init> ?, . "init")
+             (?c mason-<%cleanup> ?, . "cleanup")
+             (?o mason-<%once> ?, . "once")
+             (?l mason-<%filter> ?, . "filter")
+             (?s mason-<%shared> ?, . "shared")))
+   (mason-pseudo-perl
+    :submode perl
+    :face mmm-declaration-submode-face
+    :front ,mmm-mason-pseudo-perl-tags-regexp
+    :back "</%~1>"
+    :save-matches 1
+    :insert ((?. mason-pseudo-<%TAG> "Pseudo-perl section: " @ "<%" str ">" @
+                 "\n" _ "\n" @ "</%" str ">" @)
+             (?> mason-pseudo-<%TAG> ?, . nil)
+             (?a mason-<%args> ?. . "args")
+             (?f mason-<%flags> ?. . "flags")
+             (?r mason-<%attr> ?. . "attr")))
+   (mason-inline
+    :submode perl
+    :face mmm-output-submode-face
+    :front "<%"
+    :front-verify mmm-mason-verify-inline
+    :back "%>"
+    :insert ((?% mason-<%-%> nil @ "<%" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+             (?5 mason-<%-%> ?% . nil)))
+   (mason-call
+    :submode perl
+    :face mmm-special-submode-face
+    :front "<&"
+    :back "&>"
+    :insert ((?& mason-<&-&> nil @ "<&" @ " " _ " " @ "&>" @)
+             (?7 mason-<&-&> ?% . nil)))
+   (mason-one-line-comment
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front "^%#"
+    :back "\n"
+    :insert ((?# mason-%-comment nil (mmm-mason-start-line)
+                @ "%" @ "# " _ @ '(mmm-mason-end-line) "\n" @)
+             (?3 mason-%-comment ?# . nil)))
+   (mason-one-line
+    :submode perl
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "^%"
+    :back "\n"
+    :insert ((return mason-%-line nil (mmm-mason-start-line)
+                     @ "%" @ " " _ @ '(mmm-mason-end-line) "\n" @)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ One-line Sections
+
+(defun mmm-mason-start-line ()
+  (if (bolp)
+      ""
+    "\n"))
+
+(defun mmm-mason-end-line ()
+  (if (eolp)
+      (delete-char 1)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Set Mode Line
+
+(defun mmm-mason-set-mode-line ()
+  (setq mmm-buffer-mode-display-name "Mason"))
+(add-hook 'mmm-mason-class-hook #'mmm-mason-set-mode-line)
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-mason)
+
+;;; mmm-mason.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-mode.el b/mmm-mode.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cca89b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-mode.el
@@ -0,0 +1,309 @@
+;;; mmm-mode.el --- Allow Multiple Major Modes in a buffer
+
+;; Copyright (C) 1999-2004, 2012-2015, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Emacs Lisp Archive Entry
+;; Package: mmm-mode
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+;; Maintainer: Dmitry Gutov <dgutov@yandex.ru>
+;; URL: https://github.com/purcell/mmm-mode
+;; Keywords: convenience, faces, languages, tools
+;; Version: 0.5.7
+;; Package-Requires: ((cl-lib "0.2"))
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
+;; by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
+;; option) any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+;; WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+;; General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
+;; Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; MMM Mode is a minor mode that allows multiple major modes to
+;; coexist in a single buffer. Refer to the documentation of the
+;; function `mmm-mode' for more detailed information. This file
+;; contains mode on/off functions and the mode keymap, but mostly
+;; just loads all the subsidiary files.
+
+;{{{ Parameter Naming
+
+;; Since version 0.3.7, I've tried to use a uniform scheme for naming
+;; parameters. Here's a brief summary.
+
+;; BEG and END refer to the beginning and end of a region.
+;; FRONT and BACK refer to the respective delimiters of a region.
+;; FRONT- and BACK-OFFSET are the offsets from delimiter matches.
+;; FRONT-BEG through BACK-END are the endings of the delimiters.
+;; START and STOP bound actions, like searching, fontification, etc.
+
+;}}}
+;{{{ CL and Parameters
+
+;; Keyword parameters can be nice because it makes it easier to see
+;; what's getting passed as what. But I try not to use them in user
+;; functions, because CL doesn't make good documentation strings.
+;; Similarly, any hook or callback function can't take keywords,
+;; since Emacs as a whole doesn't use them. And for small parameter
+;; lists, they are overkill. So I use them only for a large number of
+;; optional parameters, such as `mmm-make-region'.
+
+;; An exception is the various submode class application functions,
+;; which all take all their arguments as keywords, for consistency
+;; and so the classes alist looks nice.
+
+;; When using keyword arguments, defaults should *always* be supplied
+;; in all arglists. (This pertains mostly to :start and :stop
+;; arguments, usually defaulting to (point-min) and (point-max)
+;; respectively.) `mmm-save-keywords' should only be used for lists
+;; with more than four arguments, such as in `mmm-ify-by-regexp'.
+
+;; In general, while I have no qualms about using things from CL like
+;; `cl-mapl', `cl-loop' and `cl-destructuring-bind', I try not to use `cl-defun'
+;; more than I have to. For one, it sometimes makes bad documentation
+;; strings. Furthermore, to a `defun'ned function, a nil argument is
+;; the same as no argument, so it will use its (manual) default, but
+;; to a `cl-defun'ned function, a nil argument *is* the argument, so
+;; any default specified in the arglist will be ignored. Confusion of
+;; this type should be avoided when at all possible.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'cl-lib)
+;; If we don't load font-lock now, but it is loaded later, the
+;; necessary mmm-font-lock-* properties may not be there.
+(require 'font-lock)
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-utils)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+(require 'mmm-region)
+(require 'mmm-class)
+;; This file is set up to autoload by `mmm-auto.el'.
+;; (require 'mmm-cmds)
+(require 'mmm-univ)
+
+;;{{{ Toggle Function
+
+(defun mmm-mode (&optional arg)
+  "Minor mode to allow multiple major modes in one buffer.
+Without ARG, toggle MMM Mode. With ARG, turn MMM Mode on iff ARG is
+positive and off otherwise.
+
+Commands Available:
+\\<mmm-mode-map>
+\\{mmm-mode-map}
+
+BASIC CONCEPTS
+
+The idea of MMM Mode is to allow multiple major modes to coexist in
+the same buffer.  There is one \"primary\" major mode that controls
+most of the buffer, and a number of \"submodes\" that each hold sway
+over certain regions.  The submode regions are usually highlighted by
+a background color for ease of recognition.  While the point is in a
+submode region, the following changes \(are supposed to) occur:
+
+1. The local keymap and the syntax table are that of the submode.
+2. The mode line changes to show what submode region is active.
+3. The major mode menu and mouse popup menu are that of the submode.
+4. Some local variables of the submode shadow the default mode's.
+5. Font-lock fontifies correctly for the submode.
+6. Indentation function dispatches to the appropriate submode.
+7. User-specified hooks run when the point enters or exits a submode.
+
+The user may specify a number of hooks which may run when the point
+transitions between submodes, or between the primary mode and a
+submode. When a major mode is entered, the hook mmm-x-enter-hook is
+run, where x is the name of the major mode. When a major mode is
+left, the hook mmm-y-exit-hook is run, where y is the name of the
+major mode. Users may also specify hooks with names of the form
+mmm-x-y-hook which are run when the point leaves a mode named x,
+and enters a mode named y.
+
+For further information, including installation and configuration
+instructions, see the Info file mmm.info which is included with the
+distribution of MMM Mode.  Many of MMM's configuration variables are
+available through M-x customize-group RET mmm."
+  (interactive "P")
+  (if (if arg (> (prefix-numeric-value arg) 0) (not mmm-mode))
+      (mmm-mode-on)
+    (mmm-mode-off)))
+
+(add-to-list 'minor-mode-alist (list 'mmm-mode mmm-mode-string))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Mode On
+
+(defun mmm-mode-on ()
+  "Turn on MMM Mode. See `mmm-mode'."
+  (interactive)
+  ;; This function is called from mode hooks, so we need to make sure
+  ;; we're not in a temporary buffer.  We don't need to worry about
+  ;; recursively ending up in ourself, however, since by that time the
+  ;; variable `mmm-mode' will already be set.
+  (mmm-valid-buffer
+   (unless mmm-mode
+     (setq mmm-primary-mode major-mode)
+     (when (fboundp 'c-make-styles-buffer-local)
+       (c-make-styles-buffer-local t))
+     (mmm-update-mode-info major-mode)
+     (setq mmm-region-saved-locals-for-dominant
+           ;; FIXME: Neither is defined in recent Emacs.
+           (cl-list* (list 'font-lock-cache-state nil)
+                  (list 'font-lock-cache-position (make-marker))
+                  (copy-tree (cdr (assq major-mode mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults)))))
+     ;; Without the next line, the (make-marker) above gets replaced
+     ;; with the starting value of nil, and all comes to naught.
+     (mmm-set-local-variables major-mode nil)
+     (mmm-add-hooks)
+     (mmm-fixup-skeleton)
+     (set (make-local-variable 'font-lock-fontify-region-function)
+          #'mmm-fontify-region)
+     (when (boundp 'syntax-begin-function)
+       (set (make-local-variable 'syntax-begin-function) nil))
+     (set (make-local-variable 'syntax-propertize-function)
+          #'mmm-syntax-propertize-function)
+     (set (make-local-variable 'indent-line-function) mmm-indent-line-function)
+     (setq mmm-mode t)
+     (condition-case err
+         (mmm-apply-all)
+       (mmm-error
+        ;; Complain, but don't die, since we want files to go ahead
+        ;; and be opened anyway, and the mode to go ahead and be
+        ;; turned on. Should we delete all previously made submode
+        ;; regions when we find an invalid one?
+        (message "%s" (error-message-string err))))
+     (run-hooks 'mmm-mode-hook)
+     (mmm-run-major-hook))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Mode Off
+
+(defun mmm-mode-off ()
+  "Turn off MMM Mode. See `mmm-mode'."
+  (interactive)
+  (when mmm-mode
+    (mmm-remove-hooks)
+    (mmm-clear-overlays)
+    (mmm-clear-history)
+    (mmm-clear-mode-ext-classes)
+    (mmm-clear-local-variables)
+    (mmm-update-submode-region)
+    (setq font-lock-fontify-region-function
+          (get mmm-primary-mode 'mmm-fontify-region-function))
+    (mmm-update-font-lock-buffer)
+    (mmm-refontify-maybe)
+    (setq mmm-mode nil)
+    ;; Restore the mode line
+    (setq mmm-primary-mode-display-name nil
+	  mmm-buffer-mode-display-name nil)
+    (mmm-set-mode-line)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Mode Keymap
+
+(defvar mmm-mode-map (make-sparse-keymap)
+  "Keymap for MMM Minor Mode.")
+
+(defvar mmm-mode-prefix-map (make-sparse-keymap)
+  "Keymap for MMM Minor Mode after `mmm-mode-prefix-key'.")
+
+(defvar mmm-mode-menu-map (make-sparse-keymap "MMM")
+  "Keymap for MMM Minor Mode menu.")
+
+(defun mmm-define-key (key binding &optional keymap)
+  (define-key (or keymap mmm-mode-prefix-map)
+    (vector (append mmm-command-modifiers (list key)))
+    binding))
+
+(when mmm-use-old-command-keys
+  (mmm-use-old-command-keys))
+
+(mmm-define-key ?c 'mmm-ify-by-class)
+(mmm-define-key ?x 'mmm-ify-by-regexp)
+(mmm-define-key ?r 'mmm-ify-region)
+
+(mmm-define-key ?b 'mmm-parse-buffer)
+(mmm-define-key ?g 'mmm-parse-region)
+(mmm-define-key ?% 'mmm-parse-block)
+(mmm-define-key ?5 'mmm-parse-block)
+
+(mmm-define-key ?k 'mmm-clear-current-region)
+(mmm-define-key ?\  'mmm-reparse-current-region)
+(mmm-define-key ?e 'mmm-end-current-region)
+
+(mmm-define-key ?z 'mmm-narrow-to-submode-region)
+
+;; This one is exact, since C-h is (usually) already used for help.
+(define-key mmm-mode-prefix-map [?h] 'mmm-insertion-help)
+
+;; Default bindings to do insertion (dynamic)
+(mmm-set-keymap-default mmm-mode-prefix-map 'mmm-insert-region)
+
+;; Set up the prefix help command, since otherwise the default binding
+;; overrides it.
+(define-key mmm-mode-prefix-map (vector help-char) prefix-help-command)
+
+;; And put it all onto the prefix key
+(define-key mmm-mode-map mmm-mode-prefix-key mmm-mode-prefix-map)
+
+;; Order matters for the menu bar.
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [off]
+  '("MMM Mode Off" . mmm-mode-off))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [sep0] '(menu-item "----"))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [clhist]
+  '("Clear History" . mmm-clear-history))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [end]
+  '("End Current" . mmm-end-current-region))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [clear]
+  '("Clear Current" . mmm-clear-current-region))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [reparse]
+  '("Reparse Current" . mmm-reparse-current-region))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [sep10] '(menu-item "----"))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [ins-help]
+  '("List Insertion Keys" . mmm-insertion-help))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [sep20] '(menu-item "----"))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [region]
+  '(menu-item "MMM-ify Region" mmm-ify-region :enable mark-active))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [regexp]
+  '("MMM-ify by Regexp" . mmm-ify-by-regexp))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [class]
+  '("Apply Submode Class" . mmm-ify-by-class))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [sep30] '(menu-item "----"))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [parse-region]
+  '(menu-item "Parse Region" mmm-parse-region :enable mark-active))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [parse-buffer]
+  '("Parse Buffer" . mmm-parse-buffer))
+(define-key mmm-mode-menu-map [parse-block]
+  '("Parse Block" . mmm-parse-block))
+
+(define-key mmm-mode-map [menu-bar mmm] (cons "MMM" mmm-mode-menu-map))
+
+(add-to-list 'minor-mode-map-alist (cons 'mmm-mode mmm-mode-map))
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-mode)
+
+;;; mmm-mode.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-mode.spec b/mmm-mode.spec
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..15005fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-mode.spec
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+Summary: Emacs - Edit different parts of a file in different major modes
+Name: mmm-mode
+Version: 0.4.7
+Release: 1
+URL: http://unc.dl.sourceforge.net/sourceforge/mmm-mode
+Source0: ${URL}/%{name}-%{version}.tar.gz
+License: GPL; Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+Group: Applications/Editors
+BuildRoot: %{_tmppath}/%{name}-%(id -u -n)
+BuildArch: noarch
+Requires: emacs
+
+%description
+MMM Mode is an add-on package for emacs that enables the user to edit
+different parts of a file in different major modes. It is well suited
+for editing embedded code and code-generating code.
+
+%prep
+%setup -q
+%configure
+
+%build
+%__make
+
+%install
+rm -rf $RPM_BUILD_ROOT
+%makeinstall
+
+%clean
+rm -rf $RPM_BUILD_ROOT
+
+%files
+%defattr(-,root,root)
+%doc AUTHORS ChangeLog FAQ INSTALL NEWS README README.Mason TODO 
+%{_infodir}/mmm.info*
+%{_datadir}/emacs/site-lisp/*.el*
+
+%changelog
+* Sat Mar 22 2003  <bishop@flotsam.platypus.bc.ca>
+- Initial build.
diff --git a/mmm-myghty.el b/mmm-myghty.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d893a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-myghty.el
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+;;; mmm-myghty.el --- MMM submode class for Myghty components
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000, 2004, 2013, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Ben Bangert
+;; Original Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@users.sourceforge.net>
+
+;; Based on mmm-mason.el, trivial changes by Ben Bangert
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; I went to the hard (sarcasm) effort of applying two global
+;; search/replaces, and adding a few keywords for additional
+;; blocks that Myghty introduced. Many thanks to Michael for writing
+;; the mmm-mason without which I would never have found the time
+;; to patch up for Myghty.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+
+;;{{{ Python Tags
+
+(defvar mmm-myghty-python-tags
+  '("python" "init" "cleanup" "once" "filter" "shared" "global"
+    "threadlocal" "requestlocal"
+    "python_init" "python_cleanup" "python_once" "python_filter"))
+
+(defvar mmm-myghty-pseudo-python-tags
+  '("args" "python_args" "attr" "flags"))
+
+(defvar mmm-myghty-non-python-tags
+  '("doc" "python_doc" "text" "python_text" "def" "python_def" "method"))
+
+(defvar mmm-myghty-python-tags-regexp
+  (concat "<%" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-myghty-python-tags t) ">")
+  "Matches tags beginning Myghty sections containing Python code.
+Saves the name of the tag matched.")
+
+(defvar mmm-myghty-pseudo-python-tags-regexp
+  (concat "<%" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-myghty-pseudo-python-tags t) ">")
+  "Match tags beginning Myghty sections that look like Python but aren't.
+Saves the name of the tag matched.")
+
+(defvar mmm-myghty-tag-names-regexp
+  (regexp-opt (append mmm-myghty-python-tags mmm-myghty-non-python-tags) t)
+  "Matches any Myghty tag name after the \"<%\". Used to verify that a
+\"<%\" sequence starts an inline section.")
+
+(defun mmm-myghty-verify-inline ()
+  (not (looking-at mmm-myghty-tag-names-regexp)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Add Classes
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'myghty
+ `((myghty-text
+    :submode nil
+    :front "<%text>"
+    :back "</%text>"
+    :insert ((?t myghty-<%text> nil @ "<%text>" @ "\n"
+                 _ "\n" @ "</%text>" @)))
+   (myghty-doc
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front "<%doc>"
+    :back "</%doc>"
+    :face nil
+    :insert ((?d myghty-<%doc> nil @ "<%doc>" @ "\n"
+                 _ "\n" @ "</%doc>" @)))
+   (myghty-python
+    :submode python
+    :match-face (("<%python>" . mmm-code-submode-face)
+                 ("<%init>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%cleanup>" . mmm-cleanup-submode-face)
+                 ("<%once>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%global>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%filter>" . mmm-special-submode-face)
+                 ("<%shared>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%threadlocal>" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("<%requestlocal>" . mmm-init-submode-face))
+    :front ,mmm-myghty-python-tags-regexp
+    :back "</%~1>"
+    :save-matches 1
+    :match-name "~1"
+    :save-name 1
+    :insert ((?, myghty-<%TAG> "Python section: " @ "<%" str ">" @
+                 ";\n" _ "\n" @ "</%" str ">" @)
+             (?< myghty-<%TAG> ?, . nil)
+             (?p myghty-<%python> ?, . "python")
+             (?i myghty-<%init> ?, . "init")
+             (?c myghty-<%cleanup> ?, . "cleanup")
+             (?o myghty-<%once> ?, . "once")
+             (?g myghty-<%global> ?, . "global")
+             (?t myghty-<%threadlocal> ?, . "threadlocal")
+             (?e myghty-<%requestlocal> ?, . "requestlocal")
+             (?l myghty-<%filter> ?, . "filter")
+             (?s myghty-<%shared> ?, . "shared")))
+   (myghty-pseudo-python
+    :submode python
+    :face mmm-declaration-submode-face
+    :front ,mmm-myghty-pseudo-python-tags-regexp
+    :back "</%~1>"
+    :save-matches 1
+    :insert ((?. myghty-pseudo-<%TAG> "Pseudo-python section: " @ "<%" str ">" @
+                 "\n" _ "\n" @ "</%" str ">" @)
+             (?> myghty-pseudo-<%TAG> ?, . nil)
+             (?a myghty-<%args> ?. . "args")
+             (?f myghty-<%flags> ?. . "flags")
+             (?r myghty-<%attr> ?. . "attr")))
+   (myghty-inline
+    :submode python
+    :face mmm-output-submode-face
+    :front "<%"
+    :front-verify mmm-myghty-verify-inline
+    :back "%>"
+    :insert ((?% myghty-<%-%> nil @ "<%" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+             (?5 myghty-<%-%> ?% . nil)))
+   (myghty-call
+    :submode python
+    :face mmm-special-submode-face
+    :front "<&"
+    :back "&>"
+    :insert ((?& myghty-<&-&> nil @ "<&" @ " " _ " " @ "&>" @)
+             (?7 myghty-<&-&> ?% . nil)))
+   (myghty-one-line-comment
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front "^%#"
+    :back "\n"
+    :insert ((?# myghty-%-comment nil (mmm-myghty-start-line)
+                @ "%" @ "# " _ @ '(mmm-myghty-end-line) "\n" @)
+             (?3 myghty-%-comment ?# . nil)))
+   (myghty-one-line
+    :submode python
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "^%"
+    :back "\n"
+    :insert ((return myghty-%-line nil (mmm-myghty-start-line)
+                     @ "%" @ " " _ @ '(mmm-myghty-end-line) "\n" @)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ One-line Sections
+
+(defun mmm-myghty-start-line ()
+  (if (bolp)
+      ""
+    "\n"))
+
+(defun mmm-myghty-end-line ()
+  (if (eolp)
+      (delete-char 1)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Set Mode Line
+
+(defun mmm-myghty-set-mode-line ()
+  (setq mmm-buffer-mode-display-name "Myghty"))
+(add-hook 'mmm-myghty-class-hook #'mmm-myghty-set-mode-line)
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-myghty)
+
+;;; mmm-myghty.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-noweb.el b/mmm-noweb.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..feea5fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-noweb.el
@@ -0,0 +1,421 @@
+;;; mmm-noweb.el --- MMM submode class for Noweb programs
+;;
+;; Copyright 2003, 2004  Joe Kelsey <joe@zircon.seattle.wa.us>
+;; Copyright 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+;;
+;; The filling, completion and chunk motion commands either taken
+;; directly from or inspired by code in:
+;; noweb-mode.el - edit noweb files with GNU Emacs
+;; Copyright 1995 by Thorsten.Ohl @ Physik.TH-Darmstadt.de
+;;     with a little help from Norman Ramsey <norman@bellcore.com>
+;;
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains the definition of an MMM Mode submode class for
+;; editing Noweb programs.
+;;
+;; FIXME: The more advanced features don't work: `mmm-name-at' and
+;; `mmm-syntax-region' are undefined. Need to dig around in the bug reports
+;; and/or discussions, wherever the code using them was submitted.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'cl-lib)
+(require 'mmm-region)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+(require 'mmm-mode)
+
+;;{{{ Variables
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-code-mode 'fundamental-mode
+  "*Major mode for editing code chunks.
+This is set to FUNDAMENTAL-MODE by default, but you might want to change
+this in the Local Variables section of your file to something more
+appropriate, like C-MODE, FORTRAN-MODE, or even INDENTED-TEXT-MODE."
+  ;; FIXME: Any of CC Mode modes aren't really appropriate:
+  ;; https://github.com/purcell/mmm-mode/issues/57
+  )
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-quote-mode nil
+  "*Major mode for quoted code chunks within documentation chunks.
+If nil, defaults to `mmm-noweb-code-mode', which see.")
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-quote-string "quote"
+  "*String used to form quoted code submode region names.
+See `mmm-noweb-quote'.")
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-quote-number 0
+  "*Starting value appended to `mmm-noweb-quote-string'.
+See `mmm-noweb-quote'.")
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-narrowing nil
+  "*Narrow the region to the current pair of chunks.")
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Support for mmm submode stuff
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-chunk (_form)
+  "Return the noweb code mode chosen by the user.
+If the next 100 characters of the buffer contain a string of the form
+\"-*- MODE -*-\", then return MODE as the chosen mode, otherwise
+return the value of `mmm-noweb-code-mode'."
+  ;; Look for -*- mode -*- in the first two lines.
+  ;; 120 chars = 40 chars for #! + 80 chars for following line...
+  (if (re-search-forward "-\\*-\\s +\\(\\S-+\\)\\s +-\\*-" (+ (point) 120) t)
+      (let* ((string (match-string-no-properties 1))
+	     (modestr (intern (if (string-match "mode\\'" string)
+				  string
+				(concat string "-mode")))))
+	(or (mmm-ensure-modename modestr)
+	    mmm-noweb-code-mode))
+    mmm-noweb-code-mode))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-quote (_form)
+  "Create a unique name for a quoted code region within a documentation chunk."
+  (or mmm-noweb-quote-mode
+      mmm-noweb-code-mode))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-quote-name (_form)
+  "Create a unique name for a quoted code region within a documentation chunk."
+  (setq mmm-noweb-quote-number (1+ mmm-noweb-quote-number))
+  (concat mmm-noweb-quote-string "-"
+	  (number-to-string mmm-noweb-quote-number)))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-chunk-name (form)
+  "Get the chunk name from FRONT-FORM."
+  (string-match "<<\\(.*\\)>>=" form)
+  (match-string-no-properties 1 form))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ mmm noweb submode group
+
+;; We assume that the global document mode is latex or whatever, the
+;; user wants.  This class controls the code chunk submodes.  We use
+;; match-submode to either return the value in mmm-noweb-code-mode or to
+;; look at the first line of the chunk for a submode setting.  We reset
+;; case-fold-search because chunk names are case sensitive.  The front
+;; string identifies the chunk name between the <<>>.  Since this is
+;; done, name-match can use the same functions as save-matches for back.
+;; Our insert skeleton places a new code chunk and the skel-name lets us
+;; optimize the skelton naming to use the inserted string.
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'noweb
+ '((noweb-chunk
+    :match-submode mmm-noweb-chunk
+    :case-fold-search nil
+    :front "^<<\\(.*\\)>>="
+    :match-name "~1"
+    :save-name 1
+    :front-offset (end-of-line 1)
+    :back "^@\\( \\|$\\|\\( %def .*$\\)\\)"
+    :insert ((?c noweb-code "Code Chunk Name: "
+		"\n" @ "<<" str ">>=" @ "\n" _ "\n" @ "@ " @ "\n"))
+    :skel-name t
+    )
+   (noweb-quote
+    :match-submode mmm-noweb-quote
+    :face mmm-special-submode-face
+    :front "\\[\\["
+;    :name-match mmm-noweb-quote-name
+    :back "\\]\\]"
+    :insert ((?q noweb-quote nil @ "[[" @ _ @ "]]" @))
+    )
+   ))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Noweb regions
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-regions (start stop regexp)
+  "Return a liat of regions of the form (NAME BEG END) that exclude
+names which match REGEXP."
+  (let* ((remove-next nil)
+	 (regions
+	  (cl-maplist (lambda (pos-list)
+		       (if (cdr pos-list)
+			   (if remove-next
+			       (setq remove-next nil)
+			     (let ((name (or (mmm-name-at (car pos-list) 'beg)
+					     (symbol-name mmm-primary-mode))))
+			       (if (and regexp (string-match regexp name) )
+				   (progn
+				     (setq remove-next t)
+				     nil)
+				 (list name
+				       (car pos-list) (cadr pos-list)))))))
+		   (mmm-submode-changes-in start stop))))
+    ;; The above loop leaves lots of nils in the list...
+    ;; Removing them saves us from having to do the (last x 2)
+    ;; trick that mmm-regions-in does.
+    (setq regions (delq nil regions))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Filling, etc
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-narrow-to-doc-chunk ()
+  "Narrow to the current doc chunk.
+The current chunk includes all quoted code chunks (i.e., \[\[...\]\]).
+This function is only valid when called with point in a doc chunk or
+quoted code chunk."
+  (interactive)
+  (let ((name (mmm-name-at (point))))
+    (if (or (null name) (string-match "^quote" name))
+	(let ((prev (cond
+		     ((= (point) (point-min)) (point))
+		     (t (cadar (last (mmm-noweb-regions (point-min) (point)
+							"^quote"))))))
+	      (next (cond
+		     ((= (point) (point-max)) (point))
+		     (t (save-excursion
+			  (goto-char (cadr
+				      (cadr (mmm-noweb-regions (point)
+							       (point-max)
+							       "^quote"))))
+			  (forward-line -1)
+			  (point))))))
+	  (narrow-to-region prev next)))))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-fill-chunk (&optional justify)
+  "Fill the current chunk according to mode.
+Run `fill-region' on documentation chunks and `indent-region' on code
+chunks."
+  (interactive "P")
+  (save-restriction
+    (let ((name (mmm-name-at (point))))
+      (if (and name (not (string-match "^quote" name)))
+	  (if (or indent-region-function indent-line-function)
+	      (progn
+		(mmm-space-other-regions)
+		(indent-region (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay)
+			       (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay) nil))
+	    (error "No indentation functions defined in %s!" major-mode))
+	(progn
+	  (mmm-word-other-regions)
+	  (fill-paragraph justify)))
+      (mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions))))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-fill-paragraph-chunk (&optional justify)
+  "Fill a paragraph in the current chunk."
+  (interactive "P")
+  (save-restriction
+    (let ((name (mmm-name-at (point))))
+      (if (and name (not (string-match "^quote" name)))
+	  (progn
+	    (mmm-space-other-regions)
+	    (fill-paragraph justify))
+	(progn
+	  (mmm-word-other-regions)
+	  (fill-paragraph justify)))
+      (mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions))))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-fill-named-chunk (&optional _justify)
+  "Fill the region containing the named chunk."
+  (interactive "P")
+  (save-restriction
+    (let* ((name (or (mmm-name-at) (symbol-name mmm-primary-mode)))
+	   (list (cdr (assoc name (mmm-names-alist (point-min) (point-max))))))
+      (if (or (string= name (symbol-name mmm-primary-mode))
+	      (string-match "^quote" name))
+	  (progn
+	    (mmm-word-other-regions)
+	    (do-auto-fill))
+	(progn
+	  (mmm-space-other-regions)
+	  (indent-region (caar list) (cadar (last list)) nil)))
+      (mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions))))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-auto-fill-doc-chunk ()
+  "Replacement for `do-auto-fill'."
+  (save-restriction
+    (mmm-noweb-narrow-to-doc-chunk)
+    (mmm-word-other-regions)
+    (do-auto-fill)
+    (mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions)))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-auto-fill-doc-mode ()
+  "Install the improved auto fill function, iff necessary."
+  (if auto-fill-function
+      ;; FIXME: Use add-function?
+      (setq auto-fill-function #'mmm-noweb-auto-fill-doc-chunk)))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-auto-fill-code-mode ()
+  "Install the default auto fill function, iff necessary."
+  (if auto-fill-function
+      ;; FIXME: Use remove-function?
+      (setq auto-fill-function #'do-auto-fill)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Functions on named chunks
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-complete-chunk ()
+  "Try to complete the chunk name."
+  (interactive)
+  (let ((end (point))
+	(beg (save-excursion
+	       (if (re-search-backward "<<"
+				       (save-excursion
+					 (beginning-of-line)
+					 (point))
+				       t)
+		   (match-end 0)
+		 nil))))
+	(if beg
+	    (let* ((pattern (buffer-substring beg end))
+		   (alist (mmm-names-alist (point-min) (point-max)))
+		   (completion (try-completion pattern alist)))
+	      (cond ((eq completion t))
+		    ((null completion)
+		     (message "Can't find completion for \"%s\"" pattern)
+		     (ding))
+		    ((not (string= pattern completion))
+		     (delete-region beg end)
+		     (insert completion)
+		     (if (not (looking-at ">>"))
+			 (insert ">>")))
+		    (t
+		     (message "Making completion list...")
+		     (with-output-to-temp-buffer "*Completions*"
+		       (display-completion-list
+			(all-completions pattern alist)))
+		     (message "Making completion list...%s" "done"))))
+	  (message "Not at chunk name..."))))
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-chunk-history nil
+  "History for `mmm-noweb-goto-chunk'.")
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-goto-chunk ()
+  "Goto the named chunk."
+  (interactive)
+  (widen)
+  (let* ((completion-ignore-case t)
+	 (alist (mmm-names-alist (point-min) (point-max)))
+	 (chunk (completing-read
+		 "Chunk: " alist nil t
+		 (mmm-name-at (point))
+		 mmm-noweb-chunk-history)))
+    (goto-char (caadr (assoc chunk alist)))))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-goto-next (&optional cnt)
+  "Goto the continuation of the current chunk."
+  (interactive "p")
+  (widen)
+  (let ((name (mmm-name-at (point))))
+    (if name
+	(let ((list (cdr (assoc name (mmm-names-alist
+				      (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay)
+				      (point-max))))))
+	  (if list
+	      (goto-char (caar (nthcdr (1- cnt) list))))))))
+
+(defun mmm-noweb-goto-previous (&optional cnt)
+  "Goto the continuation of the current chunk."
+  (interactive "p")
+  (widen)
+  (let ((name (mmm-name-at (point))))
+    (if name
+	(let ((list (reverse
+		     (cdr (assoc name
+				 (mmm-names-alist (point-min)
+						  (overlay-start
+						   mmm-current-overlay)))))))
+	  (if list
+	      (goto-char (cadar (nthcdr cnt list))))))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Key mappings
+
+(defvar mmm-noweb-map (make-sparse-keymap))
+(defvar mmm-noweb-prefix-map (make-sparse-keymap))
+(define-key mmm-noweb-map mmm-mode-prefix-key mmm-noweb-prefix-map)
+
+(mmm-define-key ?d 'mmm-noweb-narrow-to-doc-chunk mmm-noweb-prefix-map)
+(mmm-define-key ?n 'mmm-noweb-goto-next mmm-noweb-prefix-map)
+(mmm-define-key ?p 'mmm-noweb-goto-previous mmm-noweb-prefix-map)
+(mmm-define-key ?q 'mmm-noweb-fill-chunk mmm-noweb-prefix-map)
+;; Cannot use C-g as goto command, so use C-s.
+(mmm-define-key ?s 'mmm-noweb-goto-chunk mmm-noweb-prefix-map)
+
+(define-key mmm-noweb-prefix-map "\t" 'mmm-noweb-complete-chunk)
+
+;; Don't want to add to either the mmm mode map (used in other mmm
+;; buffers) or the local map (used in other major mode buffers), so we
+;; make a full-buffer spanning overlay and add the map there.
+(defun mmm-noweb-bind-keys ()
+  (save-restriction
+    (widen)
+    (let ((ovl (make-overlay (point-min) (point-max) nil nil t)))
+      ;; 'keymap', not 'local-map'
+      (overlay-put ovl 'keymap mmm-noweb-map))))
+
+(add-hook 'mmm-noweb-class-hook #'mmm-noweb-bind-keys)
+
+;; TODO: make this overlay go away if mmm is turned off
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; These functions below living here temporarily until a real place is
+;; found.
+
+(defun mmm-syntax-region-list (syntax regions)
+  "Apply SYNTAX to a list of REGIONS of the form (BEG END).
+If SYNTAX is not nil, set the syntax-table property of each region.
+If SYNTAX is nil, remove the region syntax-table property.
+See `mmm-syntax-region'."
+  (mapcar (lambda (reg)
+	      (mmm-syntax-region (car reg) (cadr reg) syntax))
+	  regions))
+
+(defun mmm-syntax-other-regions (syntax &optional name)
+  "Apply SYNTAX cell to other regions.
+Regions are separated by name, using either `mmm-name-at' or the
+optional NAME to determine the current region name."
+  (if (null name)
+      (setq name (or (mmm-name-at)
+		     (symbol-name mmm-primary-mode))))
+  (mapcar (lambda (reg)
+	      (if (not (string= (car reg) name))
+		  (mmm-syntax-region-list syntax (cdr reg))))
+	  (mmm-names-alist (point-min) (point-max))))
+
+(defun mmm-word-other-regions ()
+  "Give all other regions word syntax."
+  (interactive)
+  (mmm-syntax-other-regions '(2 . 0))
+  (setq parse-sexp-lookup-properties t))
+
+(defun mmm-space-other-regions ()
+  "Give all other regions space syntax."
+  (interactive)
+  (mmm-syntax-other-regions '(0 . 0))
+  (setq parse-sexp-lookup-properties t))
+
+(defun mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions ()
+  "Remove syntax-table property from other regions."
+  (interactive)
+  (mmm-syntax-other-regions nil)
+  (setq parse-sexp-lookup-properties nil))
+
+
+(provide 'mmm-noweb)
+
+;;; mmm-noweb.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-region.el b/mmm-region.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5eab4b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-region.el
@@ -0,0 +1,923 @@
+;;; mmm-region.el --- Manipulating and behavior of MMM submode regions
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2003, 2010-2015, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file provides the functions and variables to create, delete,
+;; and inspect submode regions, as well as functions that make them
+;; behave like the submode with respect to syntax tables, local maps,
+;; font lock, etc.
+
+;; See mmm-class.el for functions which scan the buffer and decide
+;; where to create regions.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'cl-lib)
+(require 'font-lock)
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-utils)
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+
+;; INSPECTION
+;;{{{ Current Overlays
+
+;; Emacs counts an overlay starting at POS as "at" POS, but not an
+;; overlay ending at POS. XEmacs is more sensible and uses beg- and
+;; end-stickiness to determine whether an endpoint is within an
+;; extent. Here we want to act like XEmacs does.
+
+(defsubst mmm-overlay-at (&optional pos type)
+  "Return the highest-priority MMM Mode overlay at POS.
+See `mmm-included-p' for the values of TYPE."
+  (car (mmm-overlays-at pos type)))
+
+(defun mmm-overlays-at (&optional pos type)
+  "Return a list of the MMM overlays at POS, in decreasing priority.
+See `mmm-included-p' for the values of TYPE."
+  (or pos (setq pos (point)))
+  (mmm-sort-overlays
+   (cl-remove-if-not
+    (lambda (ovl)
+	(and (overlay-get ovl 'mmm)
+	     (mmm-included-p ovl pos type)))
+    ;; XEmacs complains about positions outside the buffer
+    (overlays-in (max (1- pos) (point-min))
+		 (min (1+ pos) (point-max))))))
+
+(defun mmm-included-p (ovl pos &optional type)
+  "Return true if the overlay OVL contains POS.
+
+If OVL strictly contains POS, always return true.  If OVL starts or
+ends at POS, return true or false based on the value of TYPE, which
+should be one of nil, `beg', `end', `none', or `all'.
+* If TYPE is nil, return true for an overlay starting at POS only if
+  it is beg-sticky, and for one ending at POS only if it is end-sticky.
+* If TYPE is `beg', return true for any overlay starting at POS but
+  false for any ending at POS.
+* If TYPE is `end', return true for any overlay ending at POS but
+  false for any starting at POS.
+* If TYPE is `all', return true for any overlay starting or ending at POS.
+* If TYPE is `none' (or any other value), return false for any
+  overlay starting or ending at POS."
+  (let ((beg (overlay-start ovl))
+	(end (overlay-end ovl)))
+    (cond ((and (= beg pos) (= end pos))
+	   ;; Do the Right Thing for zero-width overlays
+	   (cl-case type
+	     ((nil) (and (overlay-get ovl 'beg-sticky)
+			 (overlay-get ovl 'end-sticky)))
+	     ((none) nil)
+	     (t t)))
+	  ((= beg pos)
+	   (cl-case type
+	     ((nil) (overlay-get ovl 'beg-sticky))
+	     ((beg all) t)
+	     (t nil)))
+	  ((= end pos)
+	   (cl-case type
+	     ((nil) (overlay-get ovl 'end-sticky))
+	     ((end all) t)
+	     (t nil)))
+	  ((and (> end pos) (< beg pos))
+	   t))))
+
+;; `mmm-overlays-in' has been retired as altogether too confusing a
+;; name, when what is really meant is one of the following three:
+
+(defun mmm-overlays-containing (start stop)
+  "Return all MMM overlays containing the region START to STOP.
+The overlays are returned in order of decreasing priority.  No
+attention is paid to stickiness."
+  (mmm-sort-overlays
+   (cl-remove-if-not
+    (lambda (ovl)
+	(and (overlay-get ovl 'mmm)
+	     (<= (overlay-start ovl) start)
+	     (>= (overlay-end ovl) stop)))
+    (overlays-in (max start (point-min))
+		 (min stop (point-max))))))
+
+(defun mmm-overlays-contained-in (start stop)
+  "Return all MMM overlays entirely contained in START to STOP.
+The overlays are returned in order of decreasing priority.  No
+attention is paid to stickiness."
+  (mmm-sort-overlays
+   (cl-remove-if-not
+    (lambda (ovl)
+	(and (overlay-get ovl 'mmm)
+	     (>= (overlay-start ovl) start)
+	     (<= (overlay-end ovl) stop)))
+    (overlays-in (max start (point-min))
+		 (min stop (point-max))))))
+
+(defun mmm-overlays-overlapping (start stop)
+  "Return all MMM overlays overlapping the region START to STOP.
+The overlays are returned in order of decreasing priority.  No
+attention is paid to stickiness."
+  (mmm-sort-overlays
+   (cl-remove-if-not
+    (lambda (ovl)
+	(overlay-get ovl 'mmm))
+    (overlays-in (max start (point-min))
+		 (min stop (point-max))))))
+
+(defun mmm-sort-overlays (overlays)
+  "Sort OVERLAYS in order of decreasing priority."
+  (sort (cl-copy-list overlays)
+        (lambda (x y) (> (or (overlay-get x 'priority) 0)
+                           (or (overlay-get y 'priority) 0)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Current Submode
+
+(defvar mmm-current-overlay nil
+  "What submode region overlay we think we are currently in.
+May be out of date; call `mmm-update-current-submode' to correct it.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-current-overlay)
+
+(defvar mmm-previous-overlay nil
+  "What submode region overlay we were in just before this one.
+Set by `mmm-update-current-submode'.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-previous-overlay)
+
+(defvar mmm-current-submode nil
+  "What submode we think we are currently in.
+May be out of date; call `mmm-update-current-submode' to correct it.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-current-submode)
+
+(defvar mmm-previous-submode nil
+  "What submode we were in just before this one.
+Set by `mmm-update-current-submode'.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-previous-submode)
+
+(defun mmm-update-current-submode (&optional pos)
+  "Update current and previous position variables to POS, or point.
+Return non-nil if the current region changed.
+
+Also deletes overlays that ought to evaporate because their delimiters
+have disappeared."
+  (mapc #'delete-overlay
+	(cl-remove-if (lambda (ovl)
+		       (or (not (eq (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-evap) 'front))
+			   (overlay-buffer (overlay-get ovl 'front))))
+		   (mmm-overlays-at pos)))
+  (let ((ovl (mmm-overlay-at pos)))
+    (if (eq ovl mmm-current-overlay)
+        nil
+      (mmm-set-current-pair (if ovl (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-mode)) ovl)
+      t)))
+
+(defun mmm-set-current-pair (mode ovl)
+  "Set the current submode to MODE, the current overlay to OVL
+and update the saved previous values."
+  (setq mmm-previous-overlay mmm-current-overlay
+        mmm-previous-submode mmm-current-submode)
+  (setq mmm-current-submode mode
+        mmm-current-overlay ovl))
+
+(defun mmm-submode-at (&optional pos type)
+  "Return the submode at POS \(or point), or NIL if none.
+See `mmm-included-p' for values of TYPE."
+  (let ((ovl (mmm-overlay-at pos type)))
+    (if ovl (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-mode))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Delimiter Matching and Boundaries
+
+(defun mmm-match-front (ovl)
+  "Return non-nil if the front delimiter of OVL matches as it should.
+Sets the match data to the front delimiter, if it is a regexp.
+Otherwise, calls it as a function with point at the beginning of the
+front delimiter overlay \(i.e. where the front delimiter ought to
+start) and one argument being the region overlay. The function should
+return non-nil if the front delimiter matches correctly, and set the
+match data appropriately."
+  (let* ((front-ovl (overlay-get ovl 'front))
+	 (front (if front-ovl (overlay-get front-ovl 'match))))
+    (when front
+      (save-excursion
+	(goto-char (overlay-start front-ovl))
+	(if (stringp front)
+	    ;; It's a regexp
+	    (looking-at front)
+	  ;; It's a function
+	  (funcall front ovl))))))
+
+(defun mmm-match-back (ovl)
+  "Return non-nil if the back delimiter of OVL matches as it should.
+Sets the match data to the back delimiter, if it is a regexp.
+Otherwise, calls it as a function with point at the beginning of the
+back delimiter overlay \(i.e. where the back delimiter ought to start)
+and one argument being the region overlay. The function should return
+non-nil if the back delimiter matches correctly, and set the match
+data appropriately."
+  (let* ((back-ovl (overlay-get ovl 'back))
+	 (back (if back-ovl (overlay-get back-ovl 'match))))
+    (when back
+      (save-excursion
+	(goto-char (overlay-start back-ovl))
+	(if (stringp back)
+	    ;; It's a regexp
+	    (looking-at back)
+	  ;; It's a function
+	  (funcall back ovl))))))
+
+(defun mmm-front-start (ovl)
+  "Return the position at which the front delimiter of OVL starts."
+  (let ((front (overlay-get ovl 'front)))
+    ;; Overlays which have evaporated become "overlays in no buffer"
+    (if (and front (overlay-buffer front))
+	(overlay-start front)
+      (overlay-start ovl))))
+
+(defun mmm-back-end (ovl)
+  "Return the position at which the back delimiter of OVL ends."
+  (let ((back (overlay-get ovl 'back)))
+    ;; Overlays which have evaporated become "overlays in no buffer"
+    (if (and back (overlay-buffer back))
+	(overlay-end back)
+      (overlay-end ovl))))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; CREATION & DELETION
+;;{{{ Make Submode Regions
+
+(defun mmm-valid-submode-region (submode beg end)
+  "Check if the region between BEG and END is valid for SUBMODE.
+This region must be entirely contained within zero or more existing
+submode regions, none of which start or end inside it, and it must be
+a valid child of the highest-priority of those regions, if any.
+Signals errors, returns `t' if no error."
+  ;; First check if the placement is valid.  Every existing region
+  ;; that overlaps this one must contain it in its entirety.
+  (let ((violators (cl-set-difference
+		    (mmm-overlays-overlapping beg end)
+		    (mmm-overlays-containing beg end))))
+    (if violators
+	(signal 'mmm-subregion-invalid-placement
+		violators)))
+  ;; Now check if it is inside a valid parent
+  (let ((parent-mode (mmm-submode-at beg 'beg)))
+    (and parent-mode
+	 ;; TODO: Actually check parents here.  For present purposes,
+	 ;; we just make sure we aren't putting a submode inside one
+	 ;; of the same type.  Actually, what we should really be
+	 ;; doing is checking classes/names of regions, not just the
+	 ;; submodes.
+	 (eq submode parent-mode)
+	 (signal 'mmm-subregion-invalid-parent
+		 (list parent-mode))))
+  t)
+
+(cl-defun mmm-make-region
+    (submode beg end &key face
+	     front back (evaporation 'front)
+	     delimiter-mode front-face back-face
+	     display-name
+	     (match-front "") (match-back "")
+             (beg-sticky t) (end-sticky t)
+	     name creation-hook
+             )
+  "Make a submode region from BEG to END of SUBMODE.
+
+BEG and END are buffer positions or markers with BEG <= END \(although
+see EVAPORATION below).  SUBMODE is a major mode function or a valid
+argument to `mmm-modename->function'.  FACE is a valid display face.
+
+FRONT and BACK specify the positions of the front and back delimiters
+for this region, if any.  If FRONT is a buffer position or marker, the
+front delimiter runs from it to BEG.  FRONT can also be a two-element
+list \(FRONT-BEG FRONT-END) specifying the exact position of the front
+delimiter.  One must have FRONT-BEG < FRONT-END <= BEG.
+
+Similarly, BACK may be a buffer position or marker, in which case the
+back delimiter runs from END to BACK.  BACK can also be a two-element
+list \(BACK-BEG BACK-END) specifying the exact position, in which case
+we must have END <= BACK-BEG < BACK-END.
+
+EVAPORATION specifies under what conditions this submode region should
+disappear.
+* If `nil', the region never disappears.  This can cause serious
+  problems when using cut-and-paste and is not recommended.
+* If the value is t, the region disappears whenever it has zero
+  length.  This is recommended for manually created regions used for
+  temporary editing convenience.
+* If the value is `front', the region will disappear whenever the text
+  in its front delimiter disappears, that is, whenever the overlay
+  which marks its front delimiter has zero width.
+The default value is `front'.  However, if the parameter FRONT is nil,
+then this makes no sense, so the default becomes `t'.  Note that if
+EVAPORATION is `t', then an error is signalled if BEG = END.
+
+MATCH-FRONT \(resp. MATCH-BACK) is a regexp or function to match the
+correct delimiters, see `mmm-match-front' \(resp. `mmm-match-back').
+It is ignored if FRONT \(resp. BACK) is nil.  At present these are not
+used much.
+
+DELIMITER-MODE specifies the major mode to use for delimiter regions.
+A `nil' value means they remain in the primary mode.
+
+FACE, FRONT-FACE, and BACK-FACE, are faces to use for the region, the
+front delimiter, and the back delimiter, respectively, under high
+decoration \(see `mmm-submode-decoration-level').
+
+BEG-STICKY and END-STICKY determine whether the front and back of the
+region, respectively, are sticky with respect to new insertion.  The
+default is yes.
+
+NAME is a string giving the \"name\" of this submode region.  Submode
+regions with the same name are considered part of the same code
+fragment and formatted accordingly.
+
+DISPLAY-NAME is a string to display in the mode line when point is in
+this submode region.  If nil or not given, the name associated with
+SUBMODE is used.  In delimiter regions, \"--\" is shown.
+
+CREATION-HOOK should be a function to run after the region is created,
+with point at the start of the new region."
+  ;; Check placement of region and delimiters
+  (unless (if (eq evaporation t)
+              (< beg end)
+            (<= beg end))
+    (signal 'mmm-subregion-invalid-placement (list beg end)))
+  (when front
+    (unless (listp front)
+      (setq front (list front beg)))
+    (unless (and (< (car front) (cadr front))
+		 (<= (cadr front) beg))
+      (signal 'mmm-subregion-invalid-placement front)))
+  (when back
+    (unless (listp back)
+      (setq back (list end back)))
+    (unless (and (< (car back) (cadr back))
+		 (<= end (car back)))
+      (signal 'mmm-subregion-invalid-placement back)))
+  (setq submode (mmm-modename->function submode))
+  ;; Check embedding in existing regions
+  (mmm-valid-submode-region submode beg end)
+  (mmm-mode-on)
+  (when submode
+    (mmm-update-mode-info submode))
+  (and (not front) (eq evaporation 'front) (setq evaporation t))
+  (let ((region-ovl
+	 (mmm-make-overlay submode beg end name face beg-sticky end-sticky
+			   (or (eq evaporation t) nil) display-name)))
+    ;; Save evaporation type for checking later
+    (overlay-put region-ovl 'mmm-evap evaporation)
+    ;; Calculate priority to supersede anything already there.
+    ;; XXX: Actually, don't, in order not to hide the region highlighting.
+    ;; Let's try omitting the priorities and see if any problems crop up.
+    ;; (overlay-put region-ovl 'priority (length (mmm-overlays-at beg)))
+    ;; Make overlays for the delimiters, with appropriate pointers.
+    (when front
+      (let ((front-ovl
+	     (mmm-make-overlay delimiter-mode (car front) (cadr front)
+			       nil front-face nil nil t "--" t)))
+	(overlay-put region-ovl 'front front-ovl)
+	(overlay-put front-ovl 'region region-ovl)
+	(overlay-put front-ovl 'match match-front)))
+    (when back
+      (let ((back-ovl
+	     (mmm-make-overlay delimiter-mode (car back) (cadr back)
+			       nil back-face nil nil t "--" t)))
+	(overlay-put region-ovl 'back back-ovl)
+	(overlay-put back-ovl 'region region-ovl)
+	(overlay-put back-ovl 'match match-back)))
+    ;; Update everything and run all the hooks
+    (mmm-save-all
+     ;; Can be nil when a zero-width region is immediately evaporated
+     (when (overlay-start region-ovl)
+       (goto-char (overlay-start region-ovl)))
+     (mmm-set-current-pair submode region-ovl)
+     (mmm-set-local-variables submode region-ovl)
+     (mmm-run-submode-hook submode)
+     (when creation-hook
+       (funcall creation-hook)))
+    (mmm-update-submode-region)
+    region-ovl))
+
+(defun mmm-make-overlay (submode beg end name face beg-sticky end-sticky evap
+				 &optional display-name delim)
+  "Internal function to make submode overlays.
+Does not handle delimiters.  Use `mmm-make-region'."
+  (let ((ovl (make-overlay beg end nil (not beg-sticky) end-sticky)))
+    (mapc
+     (lambda (pair) (overlay-put ovl (car pair) (cadr pair)))
+     `((mmm t)				; Mark all submode overlays
+       (mmm-mode ,submode)
+       ,@(if delim '((delim t)) nil)
+       (mmm-local-variables
+	;; Have to be careful to make new list structure here
+	,(cl-list* (list 'font-lock-cache-state nil)
+		(list 'font-lock-cache-position (make-marker))
+		(copy-tree
+		 (cdr (assq submode mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults)))))
+       (name ,name)
+       (display-name ,display-name)
+       ;; Need to save these, because there's no way of accessing an
+       ;; overlay's official "front-advance" parameter once it's created.
+       (beg-sticky ,beg-sticky)
+       (end-sticky ,end-sticky)
+       ;; These have special meaning to Emacs
+       (,mmm-evaporate-property ,evap)
+       (face ,(mmm-get-face face submode delim))
+       ))
+    ovl))
+
+(defun mmm-get-face (face submode &optional delim)
+  (cond ((= mmm-submode-decoration-level 0) nil)
+	((and (= mmm-submode-decoration-level 2) face) face)
+	(delim 'mmm-delimiter-face)
+	(submode 'mmm-default-submode-face)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Clear Overlays
+
+;; See also `mmm-clear-current-region'.
+
+(defun mmm-clear-overlays (&optional start stop strict)
+  "Clears all MMM overlays overlapping START and STOP.
+If STRICT, only clear those entirely included in that region."
+  (mapc #'delete-overlay
+        (if strict
+            (mmm-overlays-contained-in (or start (point-min))
+                                       (or stop (point-max)))
+          (mmm-overlays-overlapping (or start (point-min))
+                                    (or stop (point-max)))))
+  (mmm-update-submode-region))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; BASIC UPDATING
+;;{{{ Submode Info
+
+(defun mmm-update-mode-info (mode &optional force)
+  "Save the global-saved and buffer-saved variables for MODE.
+Global saving is done on properties of the symbol MODE and buffer
+saving in `mmm-buffer-saved-locals'.  This function must be called for
+both the dominant mode and all submodes, in each file.  Region-saved
+variables are initialized from `mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults',
+which is set here as well.  See `mmm-save-local-variables'.  If FORCE
+is non-nil, don't quit if the info is already there."
+  (let ((buffer-entry (assq mode mmm-buffer-saved-locals))
+        (region-entry (assq mode mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults))
+        global-vars buffer-vars region-vars
+        ;; http://debbugs.gnu.org/13836
+        buffer-file-truename)
+    (unless (and (not force)
+                 (get mode 'mmm-local-variables)
+                 buffer-entry
+                 region-entry)
+      (let ((temp-buffer (mmm-make-temp-buffer (current-buffer)
+                                               mmm-temp-buffer-name))
+            (filename (buffer-file-name))
+            (mmm-in-temp-buffer t)
+            ;; Don't try to use jit-lock, it's automatically disabled
+            ;; starting with 24.4 anyway.
+            font-lock-support-mode)
+        (unwind-protect
+            (with-current-buffer temp-buffer
+              ;; Handle stupid modes that need the file name set.
+              (when (memq mode mmm-set-file-name-for-modes)
+                (setq buffer-file-name filename))
+              (funcall mode)
+              (when (featurep 'font-lock)
+                (put mode 'mmm-font-lock-mode font-lock-mode)
+                ;; These can't be in the local variables list, because we
+                ;; replace their actual values, but we want to use their
+                ;; original values elsewhere.
+                (put mode 'mmm-fontify-region-function
+                     font-lock-fontify-region-function)
+                (put mode 'mmm-syntax-propertize-function
+                     (and (boundp 'syntax-propertize-function)
+                          syntax-propertize-function))
+                (put mode 'mmm-indent-line-function indent-line-function))
+              ;; Get variables
+              (setq global-vars (mmm-get-locals 'global)
+                    buffer-vars (mmm-get-locals 'buffer)
+                    region-vars (mmm-get-locals 'region))
+              (put mode 'mmm-mode-name mode-name))
+          (kill-buffer temp-buffer)))
+      (put mode 'mmm-local-variables global-vars)
+      (if buffer-entry
+          (setcdr buffer-entry buffer-vars)
+        (push (cons mode buffer-vars) mmm-buffer-saved-locals))
+      (if region-entry
+          (setcdr region-entry region-vars)
+        (push (cons mode region-vars)
+              mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Updating Hooks
+
+(defun mmm-update-submode-region ()
+  "Update all MMM properties correctly for the current position.
+This function and those it calls do the actual work of setting the
+different keymaps, syntax tables, local variables, etc. for submodes."
+  (when (mmm-update-current-submode)
+    (mmm-save-changed-local-variables mmm-previous-submode
+                                      mmm-previous-overlay)
+    (let ((new-mode (or mmm-current-submode mmm-primary-mode))
+          (old-mode (or mmm-previous-submode mmm-primary-mode)))
+      (mmm-run-constructed-hook old-mode new-mode)
+      (mmm-run-constructed-hook old-mode "exit")
+      (mmm-run-constructed-hook new-mode "enter")
+      (mmm-update-mode-info new-mode)
+      (mmm-set-local-variables new-mode mmm-current-overlay)
+      (mmm-enable-font-lock new-mode))
+    (mmm-set-mode-line)
+    (dolist (func (if mmm-current-overlay
+		      (overlay-get mmm-current-overlay 'entry-hook)
+		    mmm-primary-mode-entry-hook))
+      (ignore-errors (funcall func)))))
+
+(defun mmm-add-hooks ()
+  (if (featurep 'xemacs)
+      (make-local-hook 'post-command-hook))
+  (add-hook 'post-command-hook #'mmm-update-submode-region nil t)
+  (when mmm-parse-when-idle
+    (add-hook 'pre-command-hook #'mmm-mode-reset-timer nil t)
+    (add-hook 'after-change-functions #'mmm-mode-edit nil t)))
+
+(defun mmm-remove-hooks ()
+  (remove-hook 'post-command-hook #'mmm-update-submode-region t)
+  (remove-hook 'pre-command-hook #'mmm-mode-reset-timer t)
+  (remove-hook 'after-change-functions #'mmm-mode-edit t))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Local Variables
+
+(defun mmm-get-local-variables-list (type mode)
+  "Filter `mmm-save-local-variables' to match TYPE and MODE.
+Return a list \(VAR ...).  In some cases, VAR will be a cons cell
+\(GETTER . SETTER) -- see `mmm-save-local-variables'."
+  (mmm-mapcan (lambda (element)
+              (and (if (and (consp element)
+                            (cdr element)
+                            (cadr element))
+                       (eq (cadr element) type)
+                     (eq type 'global))
+                   (if (and (consp element)
+                            (cddr element)
+                            (not (eq (nth 2 element) t)))
+                       (if (functionp (nth 2 element))
+                           (funcall (nth 2 element))
+                         (member mode (nth 2 element)))
+                     t)
+                   (list (if (consp element) (car element) element))))
+          mmm-save-local-variables))
+
+(defun mmm-get-locals (type)
+  "Get the local variables and values for TYPE from this buffer.
+Return \((VAR VALUE) ...).  In some cases, VAR will be of the form
+\(GETTER . SETTER) -- see `mmm-save-local-variables'."
+  (mmm-mapcan (lambda (var)
+              (if (consp var)
+                  `((,var ,(funcall (car var))))
+                (and (boundp var)
+                     ;; This seems logical, but screws things up.
+                     ;;(local-variable-p var)
+                     `((,var ,(symbol-value var))))))
+          (mmm-get-local-variables-list type major-mode)))
+
+;; FIXME: Has no callers. Used for debugging?
+(defun mmm-get-saved-local (mode ovl var)
+  "Get the value of the local variable VAR saved for MODE and OVL, if any."
+  (cadr (assq var (mmm-get-saved-local-variables ovl mode))))
+
+;; FIXME: It's too easy to accidentally pass nil as MODE here.
+;; We probably should call this from `mmm-set-current-pair', and not
+;; rely on its callers to default to the primary mode when appropriate.
+;; Also, incorporate the opmimization from `mmm-fontify-region-list'.
+(defun mmm-set-local-variables (mode ovl)
+  "Set all the local variables saved for MODE and OVL.
+Looks up global, buffer and region saves.  When MODE is nil, just
+the region ones."
+  (mapcar (lambda (var)
+              ;; (car VAR) may be (GETTER . SETTER)
+              (if (consp (car var))
+                  (funcall (cdar var) (cadr var))
+                (make-local-variable (car var))
+                (set (car var) (cadr var))))
+          (mmm-get-saved-local-variables mode ovl)))
+
+;; Used for debugging.
+(defun mmm-diff-local-variables (mode ovl)
+  (let (res)
+    (mapc (lambda (var)
+            (let ((current-value (if (consp (car var))
+                                     (funcall (caar var))
+                                   (symbol-value (car var)))))
+              (unless (equal current-value (cadr var))
+                (push
+                 (message "var: %s, current: %s, saved: %s" (car var)
+                          current-value (cadr var))
+                 res))))
+          (mmm-get-saved-local-variables mode ovl))
+    res))
+
+(defun mmm-get-saved-local-variables (mode ovl)
+  (append (get mode 'mmm-local-variables)
+          (cdr (assq mode mmm-buffer-saved-locals))
+          (if ovl
+              (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-local-variables)
+            mmm-region-saved-locals-for-dominant)))
+
+(defun mmm-save-changed-local-variables (mode ovl)
+  "Save by-buffer and by-region variables for MODE and OVL.
+Called when we move to a new submode region, with MODE and OVL the
+region and mode for the previous position."
+  (let ((buffer-vars (cdr (assq (or mode mmm-primary-mode)
+                                mmm-buffer-saved-locals)))
+        (region-vars (if ovl
+                         (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-local-variables)
+                       mmm-region-saved-locals-for-dominant))
+        (set-local-value
+         (lambda (var)
+             (setcar (cdr var)
+                     ;; (car VAR) may be (GETTER . SETTER)
+                     (if (consp (car var))
+                         (funcall (caar var))
+                       (symbol-value (car var)))))))
+    (mapc set-local-value buffer-vars)
+    (mapc set-local-value region-vars)))
+
+(defun mmm-clear-local-variables ()
+  "Clear all buffer- and region-saved variables for current buffer."
+  (setq mmm-buffer-saved-locals ()
+        mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults ()
+        mmm-region-saved-locals-for-dominant ()))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; FONT LOCK
+;;{{{ Enable Font Lock
+
+(defun mmm-enable-font-lock (mode)
+  "Turn on font lock if it is not already on and MODE enables it."
+  (mmm-update-mode-info mode)
+  (and (not font-lock-mode)
+       (get mode 'mmm-font-lock-mode)
+       (font-lock-mode 1)))
+
+(defun mmm-update-font-lock-buffer ()
+  "Turn on font lock if any mode in the buffer enables it."
+  (if (cl-some (lambda (mode)
+                (get mode 'mmm-font-lock-mode))
+            (cons mmm-primary-mode
+                  (mapcar (lambda (ovl)
+                              (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-mode))
+                          (mmm-overlays-overlapping
+                           (point-min) (point-max)))))
+      (font-lock-mode 1)
+    (font-lock-mode 0)))
+
+;; FIXME: Most uses of this function happen when the buffer is parsed
+;; into regions manually. That should go away after
+;; syntax-propertize-function does this.
+(defun mmm-refontify-maybe (&optional start stop)
+  "Re-fontify from START to STOP, or entire buffer, if enabled."
+  (when font-lock-mode
+    (if (fboundp 'font-lock-flush)
+        (progn
+          (font-lock-flush start stop)
+          ;; FIXME: Do we really need to do this eagerly here?
+          (font-lock-ensure start stop))
+      (if (or start stop)
+          (font-lock-fontify-region (or start (point-min))
+                                    (or stop (point-max)))
+        (with-no-warnings (font-lock-fontify-buffer))))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Get Submode Regions
+
+;; In theory, these are general functions that have nothing to do
+;; with font-lock, but they aren't used anywhere else, so we might as
+;; well have them close.
+
+(defun mmm-submode-changes-in (start stop)
+  "Return a list of all submode-change positions from START to STOP.
+The list is sorted in order of increasing buffer position."
+  (let ((changes (sort (cl-remove-duplicates
+                        (mmm-mapcan (lambda (ovl)
+                                    `(,(overlay-start ovl)
+                                      ,(overlay-end ovl)))
+                                (mmm-overlays-overlapping start stop)))
+                       #'<)))
+    (when (or (not changes) (< start (car changes)))
+      (push start changes))
+    (let ((last (last changes)))
+      (when (> stop (car last))
+        (setcdr last (list stop))))
+    changes))
+
+(defun mmm-regions-in (start stop)
+  "Return a list of regions of the form (MODE BEG END OVL) whose disjoint
+union covers the region from START to STOP, including delimiters."
+  (when (> stop start)
+    (let ((regions
+           (cl-maplist (lambda (pos-list)
+                        (when (cdr pos-list)
+                          (let ((ovl (mmm-overlay-at (car pos-list) 'beg)))
+                            (list (if ovl
+                                      (overlay-get ovl 'mmm-mode)
+                                    mmm-primary-mode)
+                                  (car pos-list) (cadr pos-list)
+                                  ovl))))
+                    (mmm-submode-changes-in start stop))))
+      (setcdr (last regions 2) nil)
+      regions)))
+
+(defun mmm-regions-alist (start stop)
+  "Return a list of lists of the form \(MODE . REGIONS) where REGIONS
+is a list of elements of the form \(BEG END OVL). The disjoint union all
+of the REGIONS covers START to STOP."
+  (let ((regions (mmm-regions-in start stop))
+        alist)
+    (mapc (lambda (region)
+            (let* ((mode (car region))
+                   (elem (cdr region))
+                   (kv (assoc mode alist)))
+              (if kv
+                  (push elem (cdr kv))
+                (push (cons mode (list elem)) alist))))
+          regions)
+    (mapcar (lambda (kv)
+              (cons (car kv) (nreverse (cdr kv))))
+            alist)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Fontify Regions
+
+(defun mmm-fontify-region (start stop &optional loudly)
+  "Fontify from START to STOP keeping track of submodes correctly."
+  (let ((saved-mode mmm-current-submode)
+        (saved-ovl  mmm-current-overlay))
+    (unwind-protect
+        (progn
+          (when loudly
+            (message "Fontifying %s with submode regions..." (buffer-name)))
+          ;; Necessary to catch changes in font-lock cache state and position.
+          (mmm-save-changed-local-variables
+           mmm-current-submode mmm-current-overlay)
+          (mapc (lambda (elt)
+                    (when (get (car elt) 'mmm-font-lock-mode)
+                      (mmm-fontify-region-list (car elt) (cdr elt))))
+                (mmm-regions-alist start stop)))
+      ;; `post-command-hook' contains `mmm-update-submode-region',
+      ;; but jit-lock runs later, so we need to restore local vars now.
+      (mmm-set-current-pair saved-mode saved-ovl)
+      (mmm-set-local-variables (or saved-mode mmm-primary-mode) saved-ovl)))
+  (when loudly (message nil)))
+
+(defvar syntax-ppss-cache)
+(defvar syntax-ppss-last)
+
+(defun mmm-fontify-region-list (mode regions)
+  "Fontify REGIONS, each like (BEG END), in mode MODE."
+  (save-excursion
+    (let ((func (get mode 'mmm-fontify-region-function))
+          font-lock-extend-region-functions)
+      (mapc (lambda (reg)
+                (cl-destructuring-bind (beg end ovl) reg
+                  (goto-char beg)
+                  ;; Here we do the same sort of thing that
+                  ;; `mmm-update-submode-region' does, but we force it
+                  ;; to use a specific mode, and don't save anything,
+                  ;; fontify, or change the mode line.
+                  (mmm-set-current-pair mode ovl)
+                  (mmm-set-local-variables (unless (eq mmm-previous-submode mode)
+                                             mode)
+                                           mmm-current-overlay)
+                  (save-restriction
+                    (let ((font-lock-dont-widen t)
+                          ;; FIXME: Messing with syntax-ppss-* vars should not
+                          ;; be needed any more in Emacs≥26.
+                          syntax-ppss-last syntax-ppss-cache)
+                      ;; TODO: Remove this conditional when cc-mode
+                      ;; respects submode boundaries.
+                      (when (and ovl (not (memq mode mmm-c-derived-modes)))
+                        (narrow-to-region beg end))
+                      (funcall func beg end nil)))
+                  ;; Catch changes in font-lock cache.
+                  (mmm-save-changed-local-variables
+                   mmm-current-submode mmm-current-overlay)))
+              regions))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Syntax
+
+(defvar mmm-after-syntax-propertize-functions nil
+  "List of functions to call after applying `syntax-table' text
+properties to a submode region. It is passed four arguments: the
+region overlay, the submode and the bounds of the region.")
+
+(defun mmm-syntax-propertize-function (start stop)
+  "Composite function that applies `syntax-table' text properties.
+It iterates over all submode regions between START and STOP and
+calls each respective submode's `syntax-propertize-function'."
+  (let ((saved-mode mmm-current-submode)
+        (saved-ovl  mmm-current-overlay))
+    (mmm-save-changed-local-variables
+     mmm-current-submode mmm-current-overlay)
+    (unwind-protect
+        (mapc (lambda (elt)
+                  (let* ((mode (car elt))
+                         (func (get mode 'mmm-syntax-propertize-function))
+                         (beg (cadr elt)) (end (nth 2 elt))
+                         (ovl (nth 3 elt))
+                         ;; FIXME: Messing with syntax-ppss-* vars should not
+                         ;; be needed any more in Emacs≥26.
+                         syntax-ppss-cache
+                         syntax-ppss-last)
+                    (goto-char beg)
+                    (mmm-set-current-pair mode ovl)
+                    (mmm-set-local-variables mode mmm-current-overlay)
+                    (save-restriction
+                      (when mmm-current-overlay
+                        (narrow-to-region (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay)
+                                          (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay)))
+                      (cond
+                       (func
+                        (funcall func beg end))
+                       (font-lock-syntactic-keywords
+                        (let ((syntax-propertize-function nil))
+                          (font-lock-fontify-syntactic-keywords-region beg end))))
+                      (run-hook-with-args 'mmm-after-syntax-propertize-functions
+                                          mmm-current-overlay mode beg end))))
+              (mmm-regions-in start stop))
+      (mmm-set-current-pair saved-mode saved-ovl)
+      (mmm-set-local-variables (or saved-mode mmm-primary-mode) saved-ovl))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Indentation
+
+(defvar mmm-indent-line-function #'mmm-indent-line
+  "The function to call to indent a line.
+This will be the value of `indent-line-function' for the whole
+buffer. It's supposed to delegate to the appropriate submode's
+indentation function. See `mmm-indent-line' as the starting point.")
+
+(defun mmm-indent-line-narrowed ()
+  "An indent function which works on some modes where `mmm-indent-line' doesn't.
+Works like `mmm-indent-line', but narrows the buffer before indenting to
+appease modes which rely on constructs like (point-min) to indent."
+  (interactive)
+  (save-excursion
+    (back-to-indentation)
+    (mmm-update-submode-region)
+    (let ((indent-function (get
+                            (if (and mmm-current-overlay
+                                     (> (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay) (point)))
+                                mmm-current-submode
+                              mmm-primary-mode)
+                            'mmm-indent-line-function)))
+      (if mmm-current-overlay
+          (save-restriction
+            (narrow-to-region (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay)
+                              (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay))
+            (funcall indent-function))
+        (funcall indent-function)))))
+
+(defun mmm-indent-line ()
+  (interactive)
+  (funcall
+   (save-excursion
+      (back-to-indentation)
+      (mmm-update-submode-region)
+      (get
+       (if (and mmm-current-overlay
+                (> (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay) (point)))
+           mmm-current-submode
+         mmm-primary-mode)
+       'mmm-indent-line-function))))
+
+;;}}}
+(provide 'mmm-region)
+
+;;; mmm-region.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-rpm.el b/mmm-rpm.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..71fe923
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-rpm.el
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+;;; mmm-rpm.el --- MMM submode class for RPM spec files
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000 by Marcus Harnisch <Marcus.Harnisch@gmx.net>
+
+;; Author:  Marcus Harnisch <Marcus.Harnisch@gmx.net>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains the definition of an MMM Mode submode class for
+;; editing shell script sections within RPM (Redhat Package Manager)
+;; spec files. I recommend to use it in combination with
+;; rpm-spec-mode.el by Stig Bjørlykke <stigb@tihlde.hist.no> and Steve
+;; Sanbeg <sanbeg@dset.com> (http://www.xemacs.org/~stigb/rpm-spec-mode.el)
+
+;;; Installation:
+
+;; 1. Copy this file where Emacs can find it.
+;;
+;; 2. Add the following lines to one of your startup files (e.g. ~/.emacs):
+;;
+;;   (add-to-list 'mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+;;                '(rpm-spec-mode "\\.spec\\'" rpm-sh))
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+
+(defconst mmm-rpm-sh-start-tags
+  '("prep" "build" "install" "clean" "preun" "postun" "pre"
+    "post" "triggerin" "triggerun" "triggerpostun")
+  "List containing RPM tags that start a shell-script section in a spec file")
+
+(defvar mmm-rpm-sh-end-tags
+  (append '("files" "description" "package") mmm-rpm-sh-start-tags)
+  "List containing RPM tags that end a shell-script section in a spec file")
+
+(defvar mmm-rpm-sh-start-regexp
+  (concat "^%" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-rpm-sh-start-tags t) "\\b.*$")
+  "Regexp matching RPM tags that start a shell-script section in a spec file")
+
+(defvar mmm-rpm-sh-end-regexp
+  (concat "\\'\\|^%" (mmm-regexp-opt mmm-rpm-sh-end-tags t) "\\b.*$")
+  "Regexp matching RPM tags that end a shell-script section in a spec file")
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'rpm
+ `((rpm-sh
+    :submode sh-mode
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    ;; match tags that starts sh-script region
+    :front ,mmm-rpm-sh-start-regexp
+    ;; match end of buffer or next tag that ends sh-script region
+    :back ,mmm-rpm-sh-end-regexp
+    :front-offset 1
+    :back-offset 0
+    :save-matches 0
+    )))
+
+(provide 'mmm-rpm)
+
+;;; mmm-rpm.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-sample.el b/mmm-sample.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ee4419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-sample.el
@@ -0,0 +1,384 @@
+;;; mmm-sample.el --- Sample MMM submode classes
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2004, 2012-2015, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file contains several sample submode classes for use with MMM
+;; Mode. For a more detailed, advanced example, see `mmm-mason.el'.
+
+;; In order to use any of classes defined here, just require `mmm-auto' and
+;; add the respective (major mode -> class <- file extension) associations
+;; with `mmm-add-mode-ext-class'.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'cl-lib)
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+
+;;{{{ <Perl> in httpd.conf
+
+;; This is the simplest example. Many applications will need no more
+;; than a simple regexp.
+;;
+;; Usage: (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'apache-generic-mode nil 'httpd-conf-perl)
+
+(mmm-add-classes
+ '((httpd-conf-perl
+    :submode perl
+    :delimiter-mode nil
+    :front "<Perl>"
+    :back "</Perl>")))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ JavaScript in HTML
+
+;; We use two classes here, both for code in a <script> tag, one wrapped in
+;; CDATA, another not. And another class to group them together.
+;;
+;; Usage: (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-mode nil 'html-js)
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'html-js
+ '((js-script-cdata
+    :submode js-mode
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "<script[^>]*>[ \t\n]*\\(//\\)?<!\\[CDATA\\[[ \t]*\n?"
+    :back "[ \t]*\\(//\\)?]]>[ \t\n]*</script>")
+   (js-script
+    :submode js-mode
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "<script[^>]*>[ \t]*\n?"
+    :back "[ \t]*</script>"
+    :insert ((?j js-tag nil @ "<script type=\"text/javascript\">\n"
+                 @ "" _ "" @ "\n</script>" @)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ CSS in HTML
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'html-css
+ '((css-cdata
+    :submode css
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "<style[^>]*>[ \t\n]*\\(//\\)?<!\\[CDATA\\[[ \t]*\n?"
+    :back "[ \t]*\\(//\\)?]]>[ \t\n]*</style>")
+   (css
+    :submode css
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "<style[^>]*>[ \t]*\n?"
+    :back "[ \t]*</style>"
+    :insert ((?c css-tag nil @ "<style type=\"text/css\">\n"
+                 @ "" _ "" @ "\n</style>" @)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Here-documents
+
+;; Here we match the here-document syntax used by Perl and shell
+;; scripts.  We try to be automagic about recognizing what mode the
+;; here-document should be in.  To make sure that it is recognized
+;; correctly, the name of the mode, perhaps minus `-mode', in upper
+;; case, and/or with hyphens converted to underscores, should be
+;; separated from the rest of the here-document name by hyphens or
+;; underscores.
+
+(defvar mmm-here-doc-mode-alist '()
+  "Alist associating here-document name regexps to submodes.
+Normally, this variable is unnecessary, as the `here-doc' submode
+class tries to automagically recognize the right submode.  If you use
+here-document names that it doesn't recognize, however, then you can
+add elements to this alist.  Each element is \(REGEXP . MODE) where
+REGEXP is a regular expression matched against the here-document name
+and MODE is a major mode function symbol.")
+
+(defun mmm-here-doc-get-mode (string)
+  (string-match "[a-zA-Z_-]+" string)
+  (setq string (match-string 0 string))
+  (or (mmm-ensure-modename
+       ;; First try the user override variable.
+       (cl-some (lambda (pair)
+                (if (string-match (car pair) string) (cdr pair) nil))
+             mmm-here-doc-mode-alist))
+      (let ((words (split-string (downcase string) "[_-]+")))
+        (or (mmm-ensure-modename
+             ;; Try the whole name, stopping at "mode" if present.
+             (intern
+              (mapconcat #'identity
+                         (nconc (cl-ldiff words (member "mode" words))
+                                (list "mode"))
+                         "-")))
+            ;; Try each word by itself (preference list)
+            (cl-some (lambda (word)
+                      (mmm-ensure-modename (intern word)))
+                  words)
+            ;; Try each word with -mode tacked on
+            (cl-some (lambda (word)
+                      (mmm-ensure-modename
+                       (intern (concat word "-mode"))))
+                  words)
+            ;; Try each pair of words with -mode tacked on
+            (cl-loop for (one two) on words
+                  if (mmm-ensure-modename
+                      (intern (concat one two "-mode")))
+                  return it)
+            ;; I'm unaware of any modes whose names, minus `-mode',
+            ;; are more than two words long, and if the entire mode
+            ;; name (perhaps minus `-mode') doesn't occur in the
+            ;; here-document name, we can give up.
+            (signal 'mmm-no-matching-submode nil)))))
+
+(mmm-add-classes
+ '((here-doc
+    :front "<<[\"\'\`]?\\([a-zA-Z0-9_-]+\\)"
+    :front-offset (end-of-line 1)
+    :back "^~1$"
+    :save-matches 1
+    :delimiter-mode nil
+    :match-submode mmm-here-doc-get-mode
+    :insert ((?d here-doc "Here-document Name: " @ "<<" str _ "\n"
+                 @ "\n" @ str "\n" @))
+    )))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Embperl
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'embperl
+ '((embperl-perl
+    :submode perl
+    :front "\\[\\([-\\+!\\*\\$]\\)"
+    :back "~1\\]"
+    :save-matches 1
+    :match-name "embperl"
+    :match-face (("[+" . mmm-output-submode-face)
+                 ("[-" . mmm-code-submode-face)
+                 ("[!" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+                 ("[*" . mmm-code-submode-face)
+                 ("[$" . mmm-special-submode-face))
+    :insert ((?p embperl "Region Type (Character): " @ "[" str
+                 @ " " _ " " @ str "]" @)
+             (?+ embperl+ ?p . "+")
+             (?- embperl- ?p . "-")
+             (?! embperl! ?p . "!")
+             (?* embperl* ?p . "*")
+             (?$ embperl$ ?p . "$")
+             )
+    )
+   (embperl-comment
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front "\\[#"
+    :back "#\\]"
+    :insert ((?# embperl-comment nil @ "[#" @ " " _ " " @ "#]" @))
+    )))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ ePerl
+
+(mmm-add-group
+ 'eperl
+ '((eperl-expr
+    :submode perl
+    :face mmm-output-submode-face
+    :front "<:="
+    :back ":>"
+    :insert ((?= eperl-expr nil @ "<:=" @ " " _ " " @ ":>" @)))
+   (eperl-code
+    :submode perl
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "<:"
+    :back "_?:>"
+    :match-name "eperl"
+    :insert ((?p eperl-code nil @ "<:" @ " " _ " " @ ":>" @)
+             (?: eperl-code ?p . nil)
+             (?_ eperl-code_ nil @ "<:" @ " " _ " " @ "_:>" @)))
+   (eperl-comment
+    :submode text
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front ":>//"
+    :back "\n")
+   ))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ File Variables
+
+;; This submode class puts file local variable values, specified with
+;; a `Local Variables:' line as in (emacs)File Variables, into Emacs
+;; Lisp Mode.  It is a good candidate to put in `mmm-global-classes'.
+
+(defun mmm-file-variables-verify ()
+  ;; It would be nice to cache this somehow, which could be done in a
+  ;; buffer-local variable with markers for positions, but the trick
+  ;; is knowing when to expire the cache.
+  (let ((bounds
+         (save-excursion
+           (save-match-data
+             (goto-char (point-max))
+             (backward-page)
+             (and (re-search-forward "^\\(.*\\)Local Variables:" nil t)
+                  (list (match-string 1)
+                        (progn (end-of-line) (point))
+                        (and (search-forward
+                              (format "%sEnd:" (match-string 1))
+                              nil t)
+                             (progn (beginning-of-line)
+                                    (point)))))))))
+    (and bounds (caddr bounds)
+         (save-match-data
+           (string-match (format "^%s" (regexp-quote (car bounds)))
+                         (match-string 0)))
+         (> (match-beginning 0) (cadr bounds))
+         (< (match-end 0) (caddr bounds)))))
+
+(defun mmm-file-variables-find-back (bound)
+  (forward-sexp)
+  (if (> (point) bound)
+      nil
+    (looking-at "")))
+
+(mmm-add-classes
+ '((file-variables
+    :front ".+:"
+    :front-verify mmm-file-variables-verify
+    :back mmm-file-variables-find-back
+    :submode emacs-lisp-mode
+    :delimiter-mode nil
+    )))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ JSP Pages
+
+(mmm-add-group 'jsp
+ `((jsp-comment
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-comment-submode-face
+    :front "<%--"
+    :back "--%>"
+    :insert ((?- jsp-comment nil @ "<%--" @ " " _ " " @ "--%>" @))
+    )
+   (jsp-code
+    :submode java
+    :match-face (("<%!" . mmm-declaration-submode-face)
+                 ("<%=" . mmm-output-submode-face)
+                 ("<%"  . mmm-code-submode-face))
+    :front "<%[!=]?"
+    :back "%>"
+    :match-name "jsp"
+    :insert ((?% jsp-code nil @ "<%" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+             (?! jsp-declaration nil @ "<%!" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @)
+             (?= jsp-expression nil @ "<%=" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @))
+    )
+   (jsp-directive
+    :submode text-mode
+    :face mmm-special-submode-face
+    :front "<%@"
+    :back "%>"
+    :insert ((?@ jsp-directive nil @ "<%@" @ " " _ " " @ "%>" @))
+    )))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ SGML DTD
+
+;; Thanks to Yann Dirson <ydirson@fr.alcove.com> for writing and
+;; contributing this submode class.
+
+(mmm-add-classes
+ '((sgml-dtd
+    :submode dtd-mode
+    :face mmm-declaration-submode-face
+    :delimiter-mode nil
+    :front "<! *doctype[^>[]*\\["
+    :back "]>")))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ PHP in HTML
+
+(mmm-add-group 'html-php
+ '((html-php-output
+    :submode php-mode
+    :face mmm-output-submode-face
+    :front "<\\?php *echo "
+    :back "\\(\\?>\\|\\'\\)"
+    :include-front t
+    :front-offset 5
+    :insert ((?e php-echo nil @ "<?php" @ " echo " _ " " @ "?>" @))
+    )
+   (html-php-code
+    :submode php-mode
+    :face mmm-code-submode-face
+    :front "<\\?\\(php\\)?"
+    :back "\\(\\?>\\|\\'\\)"
+    :insert ((?p php-section nil @ "<?php" @ " " _ " " @ "?>" @)
+             (?b php-block nil @ "<?php" @ "\n" _ "\n" @ "?>" @))
+    )))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; NOT YET UPDATED
+;;{{{ HTML in PL/SQL;-COM-
+;-COM-
+;-COM-;; This one is the most complex example. In PL/SQL, HTML is generally
+;-COM-;; output as a (single quote delimited) string inside a call to htp.p or
+;-COM-;; its brethren. The problem is that there may be strings outside of
+;-COM-;; htp.p calls that should not be HTML, so we need to only look inside
+;-COM-;; these calls. The situation is complicated by PL/SQL's rule that two
+;-COM-;; sequential single quotes in a string mean to put a single quote
+;-COM-;; inside the string.
+;-COM-
+;-COM-;; These functions have not been thoroughly tested, and always search
+;-COM-;; the entire buffer, ignoring START and END.
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(defun mmm-html-in-plsql (start end)
+;-COM-  (save-match-data
+;-COM-    (let ((case-fold-search t))
+;-COM-      (and (re-search-forward "htp.p\\(\\|rn\\|rint\\)1?(" nil t)
+;-COM-           (mmm-html-in-plsql-in-htp
+;-COM-            ;; Find the end of the procedure call
+;-COM-            (save-excursion (forward-char -1) (forward-sexp) (point))
+;-COM-            start end)))))
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(defun mmm-html-in-plsql-in-htp (htp-end start end)
+;-COM-  (let (beg end)
+;-COM-    (or (and (re-search-forward "'" htp-end 'limit)
+;-COM-	     (setf beg (match-end 0))
+;-COM-	     ;; Find an odd number of 's to end the string.
+;-COM-	     (do ((lgth 0 (length (match-string 0))))
+;-COM-		 ((oddp lgth) t)
+;-COM-	       (re-search-forward "'+" nil t))
+;-COM-	     (setf end (1- (match-end 0)))
+;-COM-	     (cons (cons beg end)
+;-COM-		   (mmm-html-in-plsql-in-htp htp-end start end)))
+;-COM-	;; No more strings in the procedure call; look for another.
+;-COM-	(and (eql (point) htp-end)
+;-COM-	     (mmm-html-in-plsql start end)))))
+;-COM-
+;-COM-(add-to-list 'mmm-classes-alist
+;-COM-  '(htp-p (:function html-mode mmm-html-in-plsql)))
+;-COM-
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-sample)
+
+;;; mmm-sample.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-univ.el b/mmm-univ.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a2c86b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-univ.el
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+;;; mmm-univ.el --- The "Universal" Submode Class
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2013  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <mas@kurukshetra.cjb.net>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file defines the "universal" submode class, the default value
+;; of `mmm-global-classes', which specifies a standard way to indicate
+;; that part of a buffer should be in a different mode--for example,
+;; in an email message.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+(require 'mmm-vars)
+
+(defun mmm-univ-get-mode (string)
+  (string-match "[a-zA-Z-]+" string)
+  (setq string (match-string 0 string))
+  (let ((modestr (intern (if (string-match "mode\\'" string)
+                             string
+                           (concat string "-mode")))))
+    (or (mmm-ensure-modename modestr)
+        (signal 'mmm-no-matching-submode nil))))
+
+(mmm-add-classes
+ `((universal
+    :front "{%\\([a-zA-Z-]+\\)%}"
+    :back "{%/~1%}"
+    :insert ((?/ universal "Submode: " @ "{%" str "%}" @ "\n" _ "\n"
+                 @ "{%/" str "%}" @))
+    :match-submode mmm-univ-get-mode
+    :save-matches 1
+    )))
+
+(provide 'mmm-univ)
+
+
+;;; Local Variables:
+;;; mmm-global-classes: nil
+;;; End:
+
+;;; mmm-univ.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-utils.el b/mmm-utils.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d17ee44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-utils.el
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+;;; mmm-utils.el --- Coding Utilities for MMM Mode
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2003, 2011-2013  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file provides a number of macros and other coding utilities
+;; for MMM Mode.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+;;{{{ Valid Buffer
+
+;; We used to wrap almost everything in this, but I realized that
+;; only `mmm-mode-on' really needs it. Kept it as a macro, though,
+;; for modularity and in case we need it somewhere else.
+(defmacro mmm-valid-buffer (&rest body)
+  "Execute BODY if in a valid buffer for MMM Mode to be enabled.  This
+means not hidden, not a minibuffer, not in batch mode, and not in of
+`mmm-never-modes'."
+  `(unless (or (eq (aref (buffer-name) 0) ?\ )
+               (window-minibuffer-p (selected-window))
+               (memq major-mode mmm-never-modes)
+               noninteractive
+               mmm-in-temp-buffer)
+     ,@body))
+
+;;;(def-edebug-spec mmm-valid-buffer t)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Save Everything
+
+;; Never trust callback functions to preserve anything.
+(defmacro mmm-save-all (&rest body)
+  "Execute BODY forms, then restoring point, mark, current buffer,
+restrictions, and match data."
+  `(save-excursion
+     (save-restriction
+       (save-match-data
+         ,@body))))
+
+;;;(def-edebug-spec mmm-save-all t)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ String Formatting
+
+(defun mmm-format-string (string arg-pairs)
+  "Format STRING by replacing arguments as specified by ARG-PAIRS.
+Each element of ARG-PAIRS is \(REGEXP . STR) where each STR is to be
+substituted for the corresponding REGEXP wherever it matches."
+  (let ((case-fold-search nil))
+    (save-match-data
+      (dolist (pair arg-pairs)
+        (while (string-match (car pair) string)
+          (setq string (replace-match
+                        (if (fboundp 'format-mode-line)
+                            (format-mode-line (cdr pair))
+                          (cdr pair))
+                        t t string))))))
+  string)
+
+(defun mmm-format-matches (string &optional on-string)
+  "Format STRING by matches from the current match data.
+Strings like ~N are replaced by the Nth subexpression from the last
+global match.  Does nothing if STRING is not a string.
+
+ON-STRING, if supplied, means to use the match data from a
+`string-match' on that string, rather than the global match data."
+  (when (stringp string)
+    (let ((old-data (match-data))
+          subexp)
+      (save-match-data
+        (while (string-match "~\\([0-9]\\)" string)
+          (setq subexp (string-to-number (match-string-no-properties 1 string))
+                string (replace-match
+			(save-match-data
+			  (set-match-data old-data)
+			  (match-string-no-properties subexp on-string))
+			t t string))))))
+  string)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Save Keywords
+
+(defmacro mmm-save-keyword (param)
+  "If the value of PARAM as a variable is non-nil, return the list
+\(:PARAM (symbol-value PARAM)), otherwise NIL. Best used only when it
+is important that nil values disappear."
+  `(if (and (boundp ',param) ,param)
+       (list (intern (concat ":" (symbol-name ',param))) ,param)
+     nil))
+
+(defmacro mmm-save-keywords (&rest params)
+  "Return a list saving the non-nil elements of PARAMS. E.g.
+\(let \(\(a 1) \(c 2)) \(mmm-save-keywords a b c))  ==>  \(:a 1 :c 2)
+Use of this macro can make code more readable when there are a lot of
+PARAMS, but less readable when there are only a few. Also best used
+only when it is important that nil values disappear."
+  `(append ,@(mapcar (lambda (param)
+                         (macroexpand `(mmm-save-keyword ,param)))
+                     params)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Looking Back At
+
+(defun mmm-looking-back-at (regexp &optional bound)
+  "Return t if text before point matches REGEXP.
+Modifies the match data. If supplied, BOUND means not to look farther
+back that that many characters before point. Otherwise, it defaults to
+\(length REGEXP), which is good enough when REGEXP is a simple
+string."
+  (eq (point)
+      (save-excursion
+        (and (re-search-backward regexp
+               (- (point) (or bound (length regexp)))
+               t)
+             (match-end 0)))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Markers
+
+;; Mostly for remembering interactively made regions
+(defun mmm-make-marker (pos beg-p sticky-p)
+  "Make, and return, a marker at POS that is or isn't sticky.
+BEG-P represents whether the marker delimits the beginning of a
+region \(or the end of it). STICKY-P is whether it should be sticky,
+i.e. whether text inserted at the marker should be inside the region."
+  (let ((mkr (set-marker (make-marker) pos)))
+    (set-marker-insertion-type mkr (if beg-p (not sticky-p) sticky-p))
+    mkr))
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-utils)
+
+;;; mmm-utils.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm-vars.el b/mmm-vars.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b567bb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm-vars.el
@@ -0,0 +1,1133 @@
+;;; mmm-vars.el --- Variables for MMM Mode
+
+;; Copyright (C) 2000-2004, 2011-2015, 2018  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; Author: Michael Abraham Shulman <viritrilbia@gmail.com>
+
+;;{{{ GPL
+
+;; This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+;; any later version.
+
+;; This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
+;; the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+;; Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+;;}}}
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;; This file provides the definitions for the variables used by MMM
+;; Mode, as well as several functions to manipulate them. It also
+;; defines the errors that MMM Mode can signal.
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'mmm-compat)
+(require 'mmm-utils)
+(require 'cl-lib)
+
+;; MISCELLANEOUS
+;;{{{ Shut up the Byte Compiler
+
+;; Otherwise it complains about undefined variables.
+(defvar mmm-current-submode)
+(defvar mmm-save-local-variables)
+(defvar mmm-mode-string)
+(defvar mmm-submode-mode-line-format)
+(defvar mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist)
+(defvar mmm-mode-prefix-key)
+(defvar mmm-global-mode)
+(defvar mmm-primary-mode)
+(defvar mmm-classes-alist)
+(defvar mmm-current-overlay)
+(declare-function mmm-apply-all "mmm-class")
+(declare-function mmm-set-class-parameter "mmm-class" (class param value))
+(declare-function mmm-get-class-parameter "mmm-class" (class param))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Error Conditions
+
+;; Most of these should be caught internally and never seen by the
+;; user, except when the user is creating submode regions manually.
+
+;; Signalled when we try to put a submode region inside one where it
+;; isn't meant to go.
+(put 'mmm-subregion-invalid-parent
+     'error-conditions
+     '(mmm-subregion-invalid-parent mmm-error error))
+(put 'mmm-subregion-invalid-parent
+     'error-message
+     "Invalid submode region parent")
+
+;; Signalled when we try to put a submode region overlapping others in
+;; an invalid way.
+(put 'mmm-subregion-invalid-placement
+     'error-conditions
+     '(mmm-subregion-invalid-placement mmm-error error))
+(put 'mmm-subregion-invalid-placement
+     'error-message
+     "Submode region placement invalid")
+
+;; Signalled when we try to apply a submode class that doesn't exist.
+(put 'mmm-invalid-submode-class
+     'error-conditions
+     '(mmm-invalid-submode-class mmm-error error))
+(put 'mmm-invalid-submode-class
+     'error-message
+     "Invalid or undefined submode class")
+
+;; Signalled by :match-submode functions when they are unable to
+;; resolve a submode.  This error should *always* be caught internally
+;; and never seen by the user.
+(put 'mmm-no-matching-submode
+     'error-conditions
+     '(mmm-no-matching-submode mmm-error error))
+(put 'mmm-no-matching-submode
+     'error-message
+     "Internal error: no matching submode.")
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; USER VARIABLES
+;;{{{ Customization Group
+
+(defgroup mmm nil
+  "Multiple Major Modes in one buffer."
+  :group 'tools)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Save Local Variables
+
+(defvar mmm-c-derived-modes
+  '(c-mode c++-mode objc-mode pike-mode java-mode jde-mode javascript-mode
+    php-mode))
+
+(defvar mmm-save-local-variables
+  `(;; Don't use `function' (#') here!!  We're already inside `quote'!
+    major-mode
+    comment-start
+    comment-end
+    (comment-line-start-skip buffer (fortran-mode))
+    comment-start-skip
+    (comment-column buffer)
+    comment-indent-function
+    comment-line-break-function
+    sentence-end
+    ,@(when mmm-xemacs
+        '(mode-popup-menu
+          (((lambda () current-menubar) . set-buffer-menubar))
+          ))
+    (font-lock-keywords buffer)
+    font-lock-set-defaults
+    font-lock-major-mode
+    font-lock-keywords-only
+    font-lock-keywords-case-fold-search
+    font-lock-syntax-table
+    font-lock-mark-block-function       ; Override this?
+    font-lock-syntactic-keywords
+    font-lock-syntactic-face-function
+    parse-sexp-ignore-comments  ; Fixes indentation in PHP-mode?
+    ;; Can be different in different buffers
+    (c-basic-offset
+     buffer (c-mode c++-mode objc-mode pike-mode java-mode jde-mode))
+    ;; These are necessary for C syntax parsing
+    (c-class-key nil ,mmm-c-derived-modes)
+    (c-extra-toplevel-key nil ,mmm-c-derived-modes)
+    (c-inexpr-class-key nil ,mmm-c-derived-modes)
+    (c-conditional-key nil ,mmm-c-derived-modes)
+    semantic-bovinate-toplevel-override
+    semantic-toplevel-bovine-table
+    ;; Indentation style control variables.
+    ;; These have to be localized in Emacs: see `mmm-mode-on'.
+    ,@(mapcar
+       (lambda (var) (list var nil mmm-c-derived-modes))
+       '(c++-template-syntax-table
+	 c-<-op-cont-regexp 
+	 c->-op-cont-regexp
+         c-after-brace-list-key
+	 c-after-suffixed-type-decl-key
+	 c-after-suffixed-type-maybe-decl-key
+	 c-any-class-key
+	 c-asm-stmt-kwds
+	 c-assignment-op-regexp
+	 c-backslash-column
+	 c-basic-offset
+         c-before-context-fontification-functions
+	 c-bitfield-kwds
+	 c-block-comment-prefix
+	 c-block-decls-with-vars
+         c-block-prefix-charset
+         c-block-stmt-1-2-key
+	 c-block-stmt-1-key
+	 c-block-stmt-1-kwds
+	 c-block-stmt-2-key
+	 c-block-stmt-2-kwds
+	 c-brace-list-key
+         c-case-kwds-regexp
+	 c-cast-parens 
+	 c-class-key
+	 c-class-kwds
+	 c-cleanup-list
+	 c-colon-type-list-re 
+	 c-comment-only-line-offset
+	 c-comment-prefix-regexp
+	 c-comment-start-regexp
+	 c-cpp-defined-fns
+	 c-current-comment-prefix
+	 c-decl-block-key
+         c-decl-hangon-key
+         c-decl-prefix-or-start-re
+	 c-decl-prefix-re
+	 c-decl-spec-kwds
+         c-decl-start-kwds
+         c-decl-start-re
+	 c-doc-comment-start-regexp
+	 c-expr-kwds
+	 c-file-offsets
+	 c-file-style
+         c-not-primitive-type-keywords-regexp
+	 c-hanging-braces-alist
+	 c-hanging-colons-alist
+	 c-hanging-comment-ender-p
+	 c-hanging-comment-starter-p
+	 c-hanging-semi\&comma-criteria
+	 c-identifier-key 
+	 c-identifier-last-sym-match
+	 c-identifier-start 
+	 c-identifier-syntax-modifications
+	 c-identifier-syntax-table
+	 c-in-comment-lc-prefix
+	 c-indent-comment-alist
+	 c-indent-comments-syntactically-p
+	 c-indentation-style
+	 c-inexpr-block-kwds
+	 c-inexpr-class-kwds
+	 c-keywords
+	 c-keywords-obarray
+	 c-keywords-regexp
+	 c-known-type-key
+         c-label-kwds
+	 c-label-kwds-regexp
+	 c-label-minimum-indentation
+	 c-lambda-kwds
+	 c-literal-start-regexp 
+	 c-macro-with-semi-re
+         c-nonlabel-token-key
+         c-nonlabel-token-2-key
+	 c-nonsymbol-chars 
+	 c-nonsymbol-token-regexp
+	 c-not-decl-init-keywords
+	 c-offsets-alist
+	 c-opt-<>-arglist-start 
+	 c-opt-<>-arglist-start-in-paren
+	 c-opt-<>-sexp-key 
+	 c-opt-access-key
+	 c-opt-asm-stmt-key
+	 c-opt-bitfield-key
+	 c-opt-block-decls-with-vars-key
+	 c-opt-block-stmt-key
+	 c-opt-cpp-prefix 
+	 c-opt-cpp-start 
+	 c-opt-decl-spec-key
+	 c-opt-friend-key
+	 c-opt-identifier-concat-key
+	 c-opt-inexpr-block-key
+	 c-opt-inexpr-brace-list-key
+	 c-opt-inexpr-class-key
+	 c-opt-lambda-key
+	 c-opt-method-key
+	 c-opt-postfix-decl-spec-key
+	 c-opt-type-component-key
+	 c-opt-type-concat-key 
+	 c-opt-type-modifier-key 
+	 c-opt-type-suffix-key 
+	 c-other-decl-block-key
+	 c-other-decl-block-kwds
+	 c-other-decl-kwds
+	 c-overloadable-operators-regexp
+	 c-paragraph-separate 
+	 c-paragraph-start 
+	 c-paren-stmt-key 
+	 c-primary-expr-regexp 
+	 c-primitive-type-key 
+	 c-primitive-type-kwds
+	 c-protection-kwds
+         c-postfix-decl-spec-key
+	 c-recognize-<>-arglists 
+	 c-recognize-knr-p
+	 c-recognize-paren-inits 
+	 c-recognize-typeless-decls
+	 c-regular-keywords-regexp
+	 c-simple-stmt-key 
+	 c-simple-stmt-kwds
+	 c-special-brace-lists
+	 c-specifier-key 
+	 c-specifier-kwds
+	 c-stmt-delim-chars 
+	 c-stmt-delim-chars-with-comma
+         c-symbol-char-key
+	 c-symbol-key
+	 c-symbol-start 
+	 c-syntactic-eol
+	 c-syntactic-ws-end 
+	 c-syntactic-ws-start 
+	 c-type-decl-prefix-key 
+	 c-type-decl-suffix-key 
+	 c-type-prefix-key
+         c-typeof-key
+         c-prefix-spec-kwds-re
+         c-typedef-key
+	 c-typedef-decl-key
+	 comment-end 
+	 comment-start 
+	 comment-start-skip))
+    ,@(mapcar
+       (lambda (var) (list var nil '(js-mode)))
+       '(js--quick-match-re
+         js--quick-match-re-func))
+    ;; Skeleton insertion
+    skeleton-transformation
+    ;; Abbrev mode
+    abbrev-mode
+    local-abbrev-table
+    ;; And finally the syntax table and local map.
+    ((syntax-table . set-syntax-table) buffer)
+    ((current-local-map . use-local-map) buffer)
+    paragraph-separate
+    paragraph-start
+    (whitespace-active-style buffer)
+    (whitespace-display-table buffer)
+    (whitespace-display-table-was-local buffer)
+    (whitespace-font-lock buffer)
+    (whitespace-font-lock-mode buffer)
+    (whitespace-font-lock-keywords buffer)
+    (whitespace-mode buffer)
+    (whitespace-point--used buffer)
+    (whitespace-point buffer)
+    (whitespace-bob-marker buffer)
+    forward-sexp-function
+    smie-rules-function
+    smie-grammar
+    smie-forward-token-function
+    smie-backward-token-function
+    )
+  "Which local variables to save for major mode regions.
+Each element has the form \(VARIABLE [TYPE [MODES]]), causing VARIABLE
+to be saved for all major modes in the list MODES.  If MODES is t or
+absent, the variable is saved for all major modes.  MODES can also be
+a function of no arguments which returns non-nil whenever the variable
+should be saved.
+
+TYPE should be either the symbol `global', meaning to save the
+variable globally, the symbol `buffer', meaning to save it per buffer,
+or the symbol `region', meaning to save it for each submode region.
+If TYPE has any other value, such as nil, or is absent, the variable
+is saved globally.  If all optional parameters are omitted, the
+element may be simply VARIABLE instead of \(VARIABLE).
+
+It is possible for VARIABLE to be not a symbol but a cons cell of the
+form \(GETTER . SETTER), thus specifying special functions to set and
+get the value of the \"variable\".  This is used for objects like
+local maps, syntax tables, etc. which need to be installed in a
+special way.  GETTER should be a function of no arguments, and SETTER
+a function of one.  In this case, even if TYPE and MODES are omitted,
+the list cannot be flattened--it must be \((GETTER . SETTER)).
+\"Variables\" of this type cannot be seen with `mmm-get-saved-local'.
+
+A single variable may appear more than once in this list, with
+different modes and/or types.  If the same mode appears more than once
+for the same variable with different types, the behavior is undefined.
+Changing the value of this variable after MMM Mode has been activated
+in some buffer may produce unpredictable results.
+
+Globally saved variables are saved in the mmm-local-variables property
+of the mode symbol.  Buffer saved variables are saved in the alist
+`mmm-buffer-saved-locals'.  Region saved variables are saved in the
+mmm-local-variables property of the overlay.")
+
+(defvar mmm-buffer-saved-locals ()
+  "Stores saved local variables for this buffer, by mode.
+Each element looks like \(MODE \(VAR VALUE) ...).")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-buffer-saved-locals)
+
+(defvar mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults ()
+  "Stores saved defaults for region-saved locals, by mode.
+Each element looks like \(MODE \(VAR VALUE) ...).  Used to initialize
+new submode regions.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-region-saved-locals-defaults)
+
+(defvar mmm-region-saved-locals-for-dominant ()
+  "Stores saved region locals for the dominant major mode.
+The dominant major mode is considered to be one region for purposes of
+saving region variables.  Region-saved variables for submode regions
+are saved as overlay properties.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-region-saved-locals-for-dominant)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Submode Faces
+
+(defgroup mmm-faces nil
+  "Faces and coloring for submode regions.
+In general, only background colors should be set, to avoid interfering
+with font-lock."
+  :group 'mmm)
+
+(defcustom mmm-submode-decoration-level 1
+  "*Amount of coloring to use in submode regions.
+Should be either 0, 1, or 2, representing None, Low, and High amounts
+of coloring respectively.
+* None (0) means to use no coloring at all.
+* Low (1) means to use `mmm-default-submode-face' for all submode
+  regions \(except for \"non-submode\" regions, i.e. those that are of
+  the primary mode) and `mmm-delimiter-face' for region delimiters.
+* High (2) means to use different faces for different types of submode
+  regions and delimiters, such as initialization code, expressions that
+  are output, declarations, and so on, as specified by the submode
+  class.  The default faces are still used for regions that do not
+  specify a face."
+  :group 'mmm-faces
+  :type '(choice (const :tag "None" 0)
+                 (const :tag "Low" 1)
+                 (const :tag "High" 2)))
+
+(defface mmm-init-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "Pink"))
+				 (((background dark)) (:background "MediumOrchid"))
+				 (t (:background "Pink")))
+  "Face used for submodes containing initialization code."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-cleanup-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "Wheat"))
+				    (((background dark)) (:background "peru"))
+				    (t (:background "Wheat")))
+  "Face used for submodes containing cleanup code."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-declaration-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "Aquamarine"))
+					(((background dark)) (:background "DarkTurquoise"))
+					(t (:background "Aquamarine")))
+  "Face used for submodes containing declarations."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-comment-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "SkyBlue"))
+				    (((background dark)) (:background "SteelBlue"))
+				    (t (:background "SkyBlue")))
+  "Face used for submodes containing comments and documentation."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-output-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "Plum"))
+				    (((background dark)) (:background "MediumVioletRed"))
+				    (t (:background "Plum")))
+  "Face used for submodes containing expression that are output."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-special-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "MediumSpringGreen"))
+				    (((background dark)) (:background "ForestGreen"))
+				    (t (:background "MediumSpringGreen")))
+  "Face used for special submodes not fitting any other category."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-code-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "LightGray"))
+				 (((background dark)) (:background "DimGray"))
+				 (t (:background "LightGray")))
+  "Face used for submodes containing ordinary code."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-default-submode-face '((((background light)) (:background "gray85"))
+				    (((background dark)) (:background "gray20"))
+				    (t (:background "gray85")))
+  "Face used for all submodes at decoration level 1.
+Also used at decoration level 2 for submodes not specifying a type."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+(defface mmm-delimiter-face nil
+  "Face used to mark submode delimiters."
+  :group 'mmm-faces)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Mode Line Format
+
+(defcustom mmm-mode-string " MMM"
+  "*String to display in mode line as MMM minor mode indicator."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'string)
+
+(defcustom mmm-submode-mode-line-format "~M[~m]"
+  "*Format of the mode-line display when point is in a submode region.
+
+~M is replaced by the name of the primary major mode \(which may be
+replaced by a combined-mode function, see the info documentation).
+
+~m is replaced by the submode region overlay's `display-name'
+property, if it has one.  Otherwise it is replaced by the mode name of
+the submode region.
+
+If `mmm-primary-mode-display-name' is non-nil, then this variable is
+used even when point is not in a submode region \(i.e. it is in a
+primary mode region), with ~m being replaced by the value of that
+variable."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'string)
+
+(defvar mmm-primary-mode-display-name nil
+  "If non-nil, displayed as the primary mode name in the mode line.
+See also `mmm-buffer-mode-display-name'.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-primary-mode-display-name)
+
+(defvar mmm-buffer-mode-display-name nil
+  "If non-nil, displayed in the mode line instead of the primary mode
+name, which is then shown next to it as if it were a submode when in a
+primary mode region, i.e. outside all submode regions.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-buffer-mode-display-name)
+
+(defun mmm-set-mode-line ()
+  "Set the mode line display correctly for the current submode,
+according to `mmm-submode-mode-line-format'."
+  (let ((primary (or mmm-primary-mode-display-name
+		     (get mmm-primary-mode 'mmm-mode-name)))
+	(submode (and mmm-current-overlay
+		      (or (overlay-get mmm-current-overlay 'display-name)
+			  (get mmm-current-submode 'mmm-mode-name)))))
+    (if mmm-buffer-mode-display-name
+	(setq mode-name
+	      (mmm-format-string mmm-submode-mode-line-format
+				 `(("~M" . ,mmm-buffer-mode-display-name)
+				   ("~m" . ,(or submode primary)))))
+      (if submode
+	  (setq mode-name
+		(mmm-format-string mmm-submode-mode-line-format
+				   `(("~M" . ,primary)
+				     ("~m" . ,submode))))
+	(setq mode-name primary))))
+  (force-mode-line-update))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Submode Classes
+
+(defvar mmm-classes nil
+  "*List of submode classes that apply to a buffer.
+Generally set in a file local variables list.  Can either be one
+symbol, or a list of symbols.  Automatically buffer-local.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-classes)
+
+(defvar mmm-global-classes '(universal)
+  "*List of submode classes that apply to all buffers.
+Can be overridden in a file local variables list.")
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Modes and Extensions
+
+(defcustom mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist nil
+  "Alist of submode classes for major modes and/or file extensions.
+This variable can now be directly modified.
+
+Elements look like \(MODE EXT CLASS), where MODE is a major mode, EXT
+is a regexp to match a filename such as in `auto-mode-alist', and
+CLASS is a submode class. CLASS is activated in all buffers in mode
+MODE \(if non-nil) and whose filenames match EXT \(if non-nil). If
+both MODE and EXT are nil, CLASS is activated in all buffers. If CLASS
+is the symbol t, MMM Mode is turned on in all buffers matching MODE
+and EXT, but no classes are activated.
+
+See `mmm-global-mode'."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type '(repeat (list (symbol :tag "Major Mode")
+                       (string :tag "Filename Regexp")
+                       (symbol :tag "Class")))
+  :require 'mmm-mode)
+
+(defun mmm-add-mode-ext-class (mode ext class)
+  "Add an element to `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist', which see.
+That variable can now be directly modified, so this function is
+unnecessary. It probably won't go away, though."
+  (add-to-list 'mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist (list mode ext class)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Preferred Major Modes
+
+(defcustom mmm-major-mode-preferences
+  '((perl cperl-mode perl-mode)
+    (python python-mode python-mode)
+    (javascript javascript-mode c++-mode)
+    (java jde-mode java-mode c++-mode)
+    (css css-mode c++-mode))
+  "User preferences about what major modes to use.
+Each element has the form \(LANGUAGE . MODES) where LANGUAGE is the
+name of a programming language such as `perl' as a symbol, and MODES
+is a list of possible major modes to use, such as `cperl-mode' or
+`perl-mode'.  The first element of MODES which is `fboundp' is used
+for submodes of LANGUAGE.  The last element of MODES should be a mode
+which will always be available."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type '(repeat (cons symbol
+                       (repeat
+                        (restricted-sexp :match-alternatives
+                                         (fboundp))))))
+
+(defun mmm-add-to-major-mode-preferences (language mode &optional default)
+  "Add major mode MODE as acceptable for LANGUAGE.
+This sets the value of `mmm-major-mode-preferences'. If DEFAULT
+is non-nil, MODE is added at the front of the list of modes for
+LANGUAGE. Otherwise, it is added at the end. This may be used by
+packages to ensure that some mode is present, but not override
+any user-specified mode."
+  (let ((pair (assq language mmm-major-mode-preferences)))
+    (if pair
+        ;; Existing mode preferences
+        (if default
+            (setcdr pair (cons mode (cdr pair)))
+          (setcdr pair (append (cdr pair) (list mode))))
+      ;; No existing mode preference
+      (add-to-list 'mmm-major-mode-preferences (list language mode)))))
+
+(defun mmm-ensure-modename (symbol)
+  "Return SYMBOL if it is a valid submode name, else nil.
+Valid submode names are either `fboundp' or present as the `car' of an
+element in `mmm-major-mode-preferences'."
+  (if (or (fboundp symbol)
+          (assq symbol mmm-major-mode-preferences))
+      symbol
+    nil))
+
+(defun mmm-modename->function (mode)
+  "Convert MODE to a mode function, nil if impossible.
+Valid submode names are either `fboundp' or present as the `car' of an
+element in `mmm-major-mode-preferences'.  In the latter case, the
+first `fboundp' element of the `cdr' is returned, or nil if none."
+  (if (fboundp mode)
+      mode
+    (car (cl-remove-if-not
+          #'fboundp
+          (cdr (assq mode mmm-major-mode-preferences))))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Delimiter Regions
+
+(defcustom mmm-delimiter-mode 'fundamental-mode
+  "Major mode used by default for delimiter regions.
+Classes are encouraged to override this by providing a delimiter-mode
+parameter-- see `mmm-classes-alist'."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'function)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Key Bindings
+
+(defcustom mmm-mode-prefix-key [(control ?c) ?%]
+  "Prefix key for the MMM Minor Mode Keymap."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'vector)
+
+(defcustom mmm-command-modifiers '(control)
+  "List of key modifiers for MMM command keys.
+The MMM commands in the MMM Mode map, after `mmm-mode-prefix-key',
+are bound to default keys with these modifiers added. This variable
+must be set before MMM Mode is loaded to have an effect.
+
+It is suggested that the value of this variable be either nil or
+\(control), as the default keys are either plain keys or have only a
+meta modifier. The shift modifier is not particularly portable between
+Emacsen. The values of this variable and `mmm-insert-modifiers' should
+be disjoint."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type '(repeat (symbol :tag "Modifier")))
+
+(defcustom mmm-insert-modifiers '()
+  "List of key modifiers for MMM submode insertion keys.
+When a key pressed after `mmm-mode-prefix-key' has no MMM Mode command
+binding, and its modifiers include these, then its basic type, plus any
+modifiers in addition to these, is looked up in classes' :insert
+specifications.
+
+It is suggested that the value of this variable be either nil or
+\(control), allowing submode classes to specify the presence or
+absence of the meta modifier. The shift modifier is not particularly
+portable between Emacsen. The values of `mmm-command-modifiers' and
+this variable should be disjoint."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type '(repeat (symbol :tag "Modifier")))
+
+(defcustom mmm-use-old-command-keys nil
+  "Non-nil means to Use the old command keys for MMM Mode.
+MMM Mode commands then have no modifier while insertion commands have
+a control modifier, i.e. `mmm-command-modifiers' is set to nil and
+`mmm-insert-modifiers' is set to \(control). If nil, the values of
+these variables are as the default, or whatever the user has set them
+to. This variable must be set before MMM Mode is loaded."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'boolean)
+
+(defun mmm-use-old-command-keys ()
+  "Use the old command keys \(no control modifer) in MMM Mode."
+  (setq mmm-command-modifiers '()
+        mmm-insert-modifiers '(control)))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ MMM Hooks
+
+(defcustom mmm-mode-hook ()
+  "Hook run when MMM Mode is enabled in a buffer.
+
+A hook named mmm-<major-mode>-hook is also run, if it exists. For
+example, `mmm-html-mode-hook' is run whenever MMM Mode is entered with
+HTML mode the dominant mode.
+
+A hook named mmm-<submode>-submode-hook is run when a submode region
+of a given mode is created. For example, `mmm-cperl-mode-submode-hook'
+is run whenever a CPerl mode submode region is created, in any buffer.
+When this hooks are run, point is guaranteed to be at the start of
+the newly created submode region.
+
+Finally, a hook named mmm-<class>-class-hook is run whenever a buffer
+is first mmm-ified with a given submode class. For example,
+`mmm-mason-class-hook' is run whenever the `mason' class is first
+applied in a buffer."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'hook)
+
+(defun mmm-run-constructed-hook (body &optional suffix)
+  "Run the hook named `mmm-<BODY>-<SUFFIX>-hook', if it exists.
+If SUFFIX is nil or unsupplied, run `mmm-<BODY>-hook' instead."
+  (let ((hook (intern-soft (if suffix
+                               (format "mmm-%s-%s-hook" body suffix)
+                             (format "mmm-%s-hook" body)))))
+    (if hook (run-hooks hook))))
+
+(defun mmm-run-major-hook ()
+  (mmm-run-constructed-hook mmm-primary-mode))
+
+(defun mmm-run-submode-hook (submode)
+  (mmm-run-constructed-hook submode "submode"))
+
+(defvar mmm-class-hooks-run ()
+  "List of submode classes for which hooks have already been run in
+the current buffer.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-class-hooks-run)
+
+(defun mmm-run-class-hook (class)
+  (unless (member class mmm-class-hooks-run)
+    (mmm-run-constructed-hook class "class")
+    (add-to-list 'mmm-class-hooks-run class)))
+
+(defvar mmm-primary-mode-entry-hook nil
+  "Hook run when point moves into a region of the primary mode.
+Each submode region can have an `entry-hook' property which is run
+when they are entered, but since primary mode regions have no overlay
+to store properties, this is a buffer-local variable.
+
+N.B. This variable is not a standard Emacs hook.  Unlike Emacs'
+\"local hooks\" it has *no* global value, only a local one.  Its value
+should always be a list of functions \(possibly empty) and never a
+single function.  It may be used with `add-hook', however.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-primary-mode-entry-hook)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Major Mode Hook
+
+(defcustom mmm-major-mode-hook ()
+  "Hook run whenever a new major mode is finished starting up.
+MMM Mode implements this with a hack \(see comments in the source) so
+that `mmm-global-mode' will function correctly, but makes this hook
+available so that others can take advantage of the hack as well.
+
+Note that file local variables have *not* been processed by the time
+this hook is run. If a function needs to inspect them, it should also
+be added to `find-file-hook'. However, `find-file-hook' is not run
+when creating a non-file-based buffer, or when changing major modes in
+an existing buffer."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type 'hook)
+
+(defun mmm-run-major-mode-hook ()
+  (dolist (func mmm-major-mode-hook)
+    (ignore-errors (funcall func))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ MMM Global Mode
+
+;; There's a point to be made that this variable should default to
+;; `maybe' (i.e. not nil and not t), because that's what practically
+;; everyone wants.  I subscribe, however, to the view that simply
+;; *loading* a lisp extension should not change the (user-visible)
+;; behavior of Emacs, until it is configured or turned on in some
+;; way, which dictates that the default for this must be nil.
+(defcustom mmm-global-mode nil
+  "Specify in which buffers to turn on MMM Mode automatically.
+
+- If nil, MMM Mode is never enabled automatically.
+- If t, MMM Mode is enabled automatically in all buffers.
+- If any other symbol, MMM mode is enabled only in those buffers that
+  have submode classes associated with them. See `mmm-classes' and
+  `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist' for more information."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type '(choice (const :tag "Always" t)
+                 (const :tag "Never" nil)
+                 (other :tag "Maybe" maybe))
+  :require 'mmm-mode)
+
+;; These are not traditional editing modes, so mmm makes no sense, and
+;; can mess things up seriously if it doesn't know not to try.
+(defcustom mmm-never-modes
+  '(
+    help-mode
+    Info-mode
+    dired-mode
+    comint-mode
+    telnet-mode
+    shell-mode
+    eshell-mode
+    forms-mode
+    )
+  "List of modes in which MMM Mode is never activated."
+  :group 'mmm
+  :type '(repeat (symbol :tag "Mode")))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Buffer File Name
+
+(defvar mmm-set-file-name-for-modes '(mew-draft-mode)
+  "List of modes for which the temporary buffers MMM creates have a
+file name.  In these modes, this file name is the same as that of the
+parent buffer.  In general, this has been found to cause more problems
+than it solves, but some modes require it.")
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Idle Parsing
+
+(defcustom mmm-parse-when-idle nil
+  "Non-nil to automatically reparse the buffer when it has some
+  modifications and Emacs has been idle for `mmm-idle-timer-delay'."
+  :type 'boolean
+  :group 'mmm)
+
+(defcustom mmm-idle-timer-delay 0.2
+  "Delay in secs before re-parsing after user makes changes."
+  :type 'number
+  :group 'mmm)
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-idle-timer-delay)
+
+(defvar mmm-mode-parse-timer nil "Private variable.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-mode-parse-timer)
+(defvar mmm-mode-buffer-dirty nil "Private variable.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-mode-buffer-dirty)
+
+(defun mmm-mode-edit (_beg _end _len)
+  (setq mmm-mode-buffer-dirty t)
+  (mmm-mode-reset-timer))
+
+(defun mmm-mode-reset-timer ()
+  (when mmm-mode-parse-timer
+    (cancel-timer mmm-mode-parse-timer))
+  (setq mmm-mode-parse-timer
+        (run-with-idle-timer mmm-idle-timer-delay nil
+                             #'mmm-mode-idle-reparse (current-buffer))))
+
+(defun mmm-mode-idle-reparse (buffer)
+  (when (buffer-live-p buffer)
+    (with-current-buffer buffer
+      (when mmm-mode-buffer-dirty
+        (mmm-apply-all)
+        (setq mmm-mode-buffer-dirty nil)
+        (setq mmm-mode-parse-timer nil)))))
+
+;;}}}
+
+;; NON-USER VARIABLES
+;;{{{ Mode Variable
+
+(defvar mmm-mode nil
+  "Non-nil means MMM Mode is turned on in this buffer.
+Do not set this variable directly; use the function `mmm-mode'.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-mode)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Primary Mode
+
+(defvar mmm-primary-mode nil
+  "The primary major mode in the current buffer.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-primary-mode)
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Classes Alist
+
+;; Notes:
+;; 1. :parent could be an all-class argument.  Same with :keymap.
+;; 2. :match-submode really does have to be distinct from :submode,
+;; because 'functionp' isn't enough to distinguish which is meant.
+(defvar mmm-classes-alist nil
+  "Alist containing all defined mmm submode classes.
+A submode class is a named recipe for parsing a document into submode
+regions, and sometimes for inserting new ones while editing.
+
+Each element of this alist looks like \(CLASS . ARGS) where CLASS is a
+symbol naming the submode class and ARGS is a list of keyword
+arguments, called a \"class specifier\". There are a large number of
+accepted keyword arguments in the class specifier.
+
+The argument CLASSES, if supplied, must be a list of other submode
+class names, or class specifiers, representing other classes to call
+recursively.  The FACE arguments of these classes are overridden by
+the FACE argument of this class.  If the argument CLASSES is supplied,
+all other arguments to this class are ignored.  That is, \"grouping\"
+classes can do nothing but group other classes.
+
+The argument HANDLER, if supplied, also overrides any other processing.
+It must be a function, and all the arguments are passed to it as
+keywords, and it must do everything. See `mmm-ify' for what sorts of
+things it must do. This back-door interface should be cleaned up.
+
+The optional argument FACE gives the display face of the submode
+regions under high decoration (see `mmm-submode-decoration-level').
+It must be a valid face.  The standard faces used for submode regions
+are `mmm-*-submode-face' where * is one of `init', `cleanup',
+`declaration', `comment', `output', `special', or `code'.  A more
+flexible alternative is the argument MATCH-FACE.  MATCH-FACE can be a
+function, which is called with one argument, the form of the front
+delimiter \(found from FRONT-FORM, below), and should return the face
+to use.  It can also be an alist, with each element of the form
+\(DELIM . FACE).
+
+If neither CLASSES nor HANDLER are supplied, either SUBMODE or
+MATCH-SUBMODE must be.  SUBMODE specifies the submode to use for the
+submode regions, a symbol such as `cperl-mode' or `emacs-lisp-mode',
+while MATCH-SUBMODE must be a function to be called immediately after
+a match is found for FRONT, which is passed one argument, the form of
+the front delimiter \(found from FRONT-FORM, below), and return a
+symbol such as SUBMODE would be set to.  If MATCH-SUBMODE detects an
+invalid match--for example a specified mode which is not `fboundp'--it
+should \(signal 'mmm-no-matching-submode nil).
+
+FRONT and BACK are the means to find the submode regions, and can be
+either buffer positions \(number-or-markers), regular expressions, or
+functions. If they are absolute buffer positions, only one submode
+region is created, from FRONT to BACK. This is generally not used in
+named classes. \(Unnamed classes are created by interactive commands
+in `mmm-interactive-history').
+
+If FRONT is a regexp, then that regexp is searched for, and the end of
+its FRONT-MATCH'th match \(or the beginning thereof, if INCLUDE-FRONT
+is non-nil), plus FRONT-OFFSET, becomes the beginning of the submode
+region.  If FRONT is a function, that function is called instead, and
+must act somewhat like a search, in that it should start at point,
+take one argument as a search bound, and set the match data.  A
+similar pattern is followed for BACK \(the search starts at the
+beginning of the submode region), save that the beginning of its
+BACK-MATCH'th match \(or the end, if INCLUDE-BACK is non-nil) becomes
+the end of the submode region, plus BACK-OFFSET.
+
+If SAVE-MATCHES is non-nil, then BACK, if it is a regexp, is formatted
+by replacing strings of the form \"~N\" by the corresponding value of
+\(match-string n) after matching FRONT.
+
+FRONT-MATCH and BACK-MATCH default to zero.  They specify which
+sub-match of the FRONT and BACK regexps to treat as the delimiter.
+This number will be passed to any calls to `match-beginning' and
+company.
+
+FRONT- and BACK-OFFSET default to 0.  In addition to numbers, they can
+also be functions to call which should move point to the correct
+position for the beginning or end of the submode region.  Common
+choices include `beginning-of-line' and `end-of-line', and new
+functions can of course be written.  They can also be lists which will
+be applied in sequence, such as \(end-of-line 1) meaning move to end
+of line and then forward one character.
+
+FRONT-VERIFY and BACK-VERIFY, if supplied, must be functions that
+inspect the match data to see if a match found by FRONT or BACK
+respectively is valid.
+
+FRONT-DELIM \(resp. BACK-DELIM), if supplied, can take values like
+those of FRONT-OFFSET \(resp. BACK-OFFSET), specifying the offset from
+the start \(resp. end) of the match for FRONT \(resp. BACK) to use as
+the starting \(resp. ending) point for the front \(resp. back)
+delimiter.  If nil, it means not to make a region for the respective
+delimiter at all.
+
+DELIMITER-MODE, if supplied, specifies what submode to use for the
+delimiter regions, if any.  If `nil', the primary mode is used.  If
+not supplied, `mmm-delimiter-mode' is used.
+
+FRONT-FACE and BACK-FACE specify faces to use for displaying the
+delimiter regions, under high decoration.
+
+FRONT-FORM and BACK-FORM, if given, must supply a regexp used to match
+the *actual* delimiter.  If they are strings, they are used as-is.  If
+they are functions, they are called and must inspect the match data.
+If they are lists, their `car' is taken as the delimiter.  The default
+for both is \(regexp-quote \(match-string 0)).
+
+The last case--them being a list--is usually used to set the delimiter
+to a function.  Such a function must take 1-2 arguments, the first
+being the overlay in question, and the second meaning to insert the
+delimiter and adjust the overlay rather than just matching the
+delimiter.  See `mmm-match-front', `mmm-match-back', and
+`mmm-end-current-region'.
+
+CASE-FOLD-SEARCH, if specified, controls whether the search is
+case-insensitive. See `case-fold-search'. It defaults to `t'.
+
+CREATION-HOOK, if specified, should be a function which is run
+whenever a submode region is created, with point at the beginning of
+the new region.  One use for it is to set region-saved local variables
+\(see `mmm-save-local-variables').
+
+INSERT specifies the keypress insertion spec for such submode regions.
+INSERT's value should be list of elements of the form \(KEY NAME .
+SPEC). Each KEY should be either a character, a function key symbol,
+or a dotted list \(MOD . KEY) where MOD is a symbol for a modifier
+key. The use of any other modifier than meta is discouraged, as
+`mmm-insert-modifiers' is sometimes set to \(control), and other
+modifiers are not very portable. Each NAME should be a symbol
+representing the insertion for that key. Each SPEC can be either a
+skeleton, suitable for passing to `skeleton-insert' to create a
+submode region, or a dotted pair \(OTHER-KEY . ARG) meaning to use the
+skeleton defined for OTHER-KEY but pass it the argument ARG as the
+`str' variable, possible replacing a prompt string. Skeletons for
+insertion should have the symbol `_' where point \(or wrapped text)
+should go, and the symbol `@' in four different places: at the
+beginning of the front delimiter, the beginning of the submode region,
+the end of the submode region, and the end of the back delimiter.
+
+If END-NOT-BEGIN is non-nil, it specifies that a BACK delimiter cannot
+begin a new submode region.
+
+MATCH-NAME, if supplied, specifies how to determine the \"name\" for
+each submode region.  It must be a string or a function.  If it is a
+function, it is passed the value of FRONT-FORM and must return the
+name to use.  If it is a string, it is used as-is unless SAVE-NAME has
+a non-nil value, in which case, the string is interpreted the same as
+BACK when SAVE-MATCHES is non-nil.  If MATCH-NAME is not specified,
+the regions are unnamed.  Regions with the same name are considered
+part of the same chunk of code, and formatted as such, while unnamed
+regions are not grouped with any others.
+
+As a special optimization for insertion, if SKEL-NAME is non-nil, the
+insertion code will use the user-prompted string value as the region
+name, instead of going through the normal matching procedure.
+
+PRIVATE, if supplied and non-nil, means that this class is a private
+or internal class, usually one invoked by another class via :classes,
+and is not for the user to see.")
+
+;;;###autoload
+(defun mmm-add-classes (classes)
+  "Add the submode classes CLASSES to `mmm-classes-alist'."
+  (dolist (class classes)
+    (add-to-list 'mmm-classes-alist class)))
+
+(defun mmm-add-group (group classes)
+  "Add CLASSES and a \"grouping class\" named GROUP which calls them all.
+The CLASSES are all made private, i.e. non-user-visible."
+  (mmm-add-classes (mapcar (lambda (class)
+                               (append class
+                                       '(:private t)))
+                           classes))
+  (add-to-list 'mmm-classes-alist
+               (list group :classes (mapcar #'cl-first classes))))
+
+(defun mmm-add-to-group (group classes)
+  "Add CLASSES to the \"grouping class\" named GROUP.
+The CLASSES are all made private, i.e. non-user-visible."
+  (mmm-add-classes (mapcar (lambda (class)
+                               (append class
+                                       '(:private t)))
+                           classes))
+  (mmm-set-class-parameter group :classes
+			   (append  (mmm-get-class-parameter group :classes)
+				    (mapcar #'cl-first classes))))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Version Number
+
+(defconst mmm-version "0.5.7"
+  "Current version of MMM Mode.")
+
+(defun mmm-version ()
+  (interactive)
+  (message "MMM Mode version %s by Michael Abraham Shulman" mmm-version))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Temp Buffer Name
+
+(defvar mmm-temp-buffer-name "mmm-temp-buffer"
+  "Name for temporary buffers created by MMM Mode.
+Using non-special name, so that font-lock-mode will be enabled
+automatically when appropriate, and will set all related vars.")
+
+(defvar mmm-in-temp-buffer nil
+  "Bound to t when working in the temp buffer.")
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Interactive History
+
+(defvar mmm-interactive-history nil
+  "History of interactive mmm-ification in the current buffer.
+Elements are either submode class symbols or class specifications. See
+`mmm-classes-alist' for more information.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-interactive-history)
+
+(defun mmm-add-to-history (class)
+  (add-to-list 'mmm-interactive-history class))
+
+(defun mmm-clear-history ()
+  "Clears history of interactive mmm-ification in current buffer."
+  (interactive)
+  (setq mmm-interactive-history nil))
+
+;;}}}
+;;{{{ Mode/Ext Manipulation
+
+(defvar mmm-mode-ext-classes ()
+  "List of classes associated with current buffer by mode and filename.
+Set automatically from `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist'.")
+(make-variable-buffer-local 'mmm-mode-ext-classes)
+
+(defun mmm-get-mode-ext-classes ()
+  "Return classes for current buffer from major mode and filename.
+Uses `mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist' to find submode classes."
+  (or mmm-mode-ext-classes
+      (setq mmm-mode-ext-classes
+            (mapcar #'cl-third
+                    (cl-remove-if-not #'mmm-mode-ext-applies
+                                   mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist)))))
+
+(defun mmm-clear-mode-ext-classes ()
+  "Clear classes added by major mode and filename."
+  (setq mmm-mode-ext-classes nil))
+
+(defun mmm-mode-ext-applies (element)
+  (cl-destructuring-bind (mode ext _class) element
+    (and (if mode
+             (eq mode
+                 ;; If MMM is on in this buffer, use the primary mode,
+                 ;; otherwise use the normal indicator.
+                 (or mmm-primary-mode major-mode))
+           t)
+         (if ext
+             (and (buffer-file-name)
+                  (save-match-data
+                    (string-match ext (buffer-file-name))))
+           t))))
+
+(defun mmm-get-all-classes (global)
+  "Return a list of all classes applicable to the current buffer.
+These come from mode/ext associations, `mmm-classes', and interactive
+history, as well as `mmm-global-classes' if GLOBAL is non-nil."
+  (append mmm-interactive-history
+          (if (listp mmm-classes) mmm-classes (list mmm-classes))
+          (if global mmm-global-classes ())
+          (mmm-get-mode-ext-classes)))
+
+;;}}}
+
+(provide 'mmm-vars)
+
+;;; mmm-vars.el ends here
diff --git a/mmm.texinfo b/mmm.texinfo
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bd1d24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mmm.texinfo
@@ -0,0 +1,2108 @@
+\input texinfo
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename mmm.info
+@settitle MMM Mode Manual
+@c %**end of header
+@syncodeindex vr fn
+@set MASON_VERSION 0.896
+
+@dircategory GNU Emacs Lisp
+@direntry
+* MMM-Mode: (mmm).                 Multiple Major Modes for Emacs
+@end direntry
+
+@ifinfo
+
+Copyright 2000 Michael Abraham Shulman.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+     
+@ignore
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries a copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+
+@end ignore
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
+sections entitled ``Copying'' and ``GNU General Public License'' are
+included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+     
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@end ifinfo
+
+@titlepage
+@title MMM Mode Manual
+@subtitle Multiple Major Modes for Emacs
+@author Michael Abraham Shulman
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Copyright @copyright{} 2000 Michael Abraham Shulman.
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+     
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
+sections entitled ``Copying'' and ``GNU General Public License'' are
+included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+     
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@end titlepage
+
+@ifinfo
+@node Top, Overview, (dir), (dir)
+@top MMM Mode
+
+MMM Mode is a minor mode for Emacs which allows Multiple Major Modes to
+coexist in a single buffer.
+
+@end ifinfo
+
+@menu
+* Overview::                    An overview and introduction to MMM Mode.
+* Basics::                      The basics of how to use it.
+* Customizing::                 Customizing how it works to your needs.
+* Supplied Classes::            The supplied submode classes.
+* Writing Classes::             Writing your own submode classes.
+* Indices::                     Just that.
+
+@detailmenu
+ --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
+
+Overview of MMM Mode
+
+* Basic Concepts::              A simple explanation of how it works.
+* Installation::                How to install MMM Mode.
+* Quick Start::                 Getting started using MMM Mode quickly.
+
+MMM Mode Basics
+
+* MMM Minor Mode::              The Emacs minor mode that manages it all.
+* Submode Classes::             What they are and how to use them.
+* Selecting Classes::           How MMM Mode knows what classes to use.
+* Insertion::                   Inserting new submode regions automatically.
+* Re-parsing::                  Re-scanning for submode regions.
+* Interactive::                 Adding submode regions manually.
+* Global Mode::                 Turning MMM Mode on automatically.
+
+The MMM Minor Mode
+
+* Enabling MMM Mode::           Turning MMM Mode on and off.
+* MMM Mode Keys::               Default key bindings in MMM Mode.
+
+How MMM Mode selects submode classes
+
+* File Classes::                Classes for a single file.
+* Mode-Ext Classes::            Classes for a given mode or extension.
+* Global Classes::              Classes for all MMM Mode buffers.
+
+MMM Global Mode
+
+* Major Mode Hook::             Using MMM's Major Mode Hook
+
+Customizing MMM Mode
+
+* Region Coloring::             Changing or removing background colors.
+* Preferred Modes::             Choosing which major modes to use.
+* Mode Line::                   What is displayed in the mode line.
+* Key Bindings::                Customizing the MMM Mode key bindings.
+* Local Variables::             What local variables are saved for submodes.
+* Changing Classes::            Changing the supplied submode classes.
+* Hooks::                       How to make MMM Mode run your code.
+
+Supplied Submode Classes
+
+* Mason::                       Mason server-side Perl in HTML.
+* File Variables::              Elisp code in File Variables.
+* Here-documents::              Code in shell and Perl here-documents.
+* Javascript::                  Javascript embedded in HTML.
+* Embedded CSS::                CSS Styles embedded in HTML.
+* Embperl::                     Another syntax for Perl in HTML.
+* ePerl::                       A general Perl-embedding syntax.
+* JSP::                         Java code embedded in HTML.
+* RPM::                         Shell scripts in RPM Spec Files.
+* Noweb::                       Noweb literate programs.
+
+Writing Submode Classes
+
+* Basic Classes::               Writing a simple submode class.
+* Paired Delimiters::           Matching paired delimiters.
+* Region Placement::            Placing the region more accurately.
+* Submode Groups::              Grouping several classes together.
+* Calculated Submodes::         Deciding the submode at run-time.
+* Calculated Faces::            Deciding the display face at run-time.
+* Insertion Commands::          Inserting regions automatically.
+* Region Names::                Naming regions for syntax grouping.
+* Other Hooks::                 Running code at arbitrary points.
+* Delimiters::                  Controlling delimiter overlays.
+* Misc Keywords::               Other miscellaneous options.
+
+Indices
+
+* Concept Index::               Index of MMM Mode Concepts.
+* Function Index::              Index of functions and variables.
+* Keystroke Index::             Index of key bindings in MMM Mode.
+
+@end detailmenu
+@end menu
+
+@node Overview, Basics, Top, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Overview of MMM Mode
+@cindex overview of mmm-mode
+@cindex mmm-mode, overview of
+
+MMM Mode is a minor mode for Emacs which allows Multiple Major Modes to
+coexist in a single buffer. The name is an abbreviation of `Multiple
+Major Modes'@footnote{The name is derived from @file{mmm.el} for XEmacs
+by Gongquan Chen <chen@@posc.org>, from which MMM Mode was adapted.}. A
+major mode is a customization of Emacs for editing a certain type of
+text, such as code for a specific programming language. @xref{Major
+Modes, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}, for details.
+
+MMM Mode is a general extension to Emacs which is useful whenever one
+file contains text in two or more programming languages, or that
+should be in two or more different modes.  For example:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+CGI scripts written in any language, from Perl to PL/SQL, may want to
+output verbatim HTML, and the writer of such scripts may want to use
+Emacs' html-mode or sgml-mode to edit this HTML code, while remaining
+in the appropriate programming language mode for the rest of the
+file.  @xref{Here-documents}, for example.
+
+@item
+There are now many ``content delivery systems'' which turn the CGI
+script idea around and simply add extra commands to an HTML file,
+often in some programming language, which are interpreted on the
+server.  @xref{Mason}, @xref{Embperl}, @xref{ePerl}, @xref{JSP}.
+
+@item
+HTML itself can also contain embedded languages such as Javascript and
+CSS styles, for which Emacs has different major modes.
+@xref{Javascript}, and @xref{Embedded CSS}, for example.
+
+@item
+The idea of ``literate programming'' requires the same file to contain
+documentation (written as text, html, latex, etc.) and code (in an
+appropriate programming language).  @xref{Noweb}, for example.
+
+@item
+Emacs allows files of any type to contain `local variables', which can
+include Emacs Lisp code to be evaluated. @xref{File Variables, , ,
+emacs, The Emacs Manual}. It may be easier to edit this code in Emacs
+Lisp mode than in whatever mode is used for the rest of the file.
+@xref{File Variables}.
+
+@item
+There are many more possible uses for MMM Mode.  RPM spec files can
+contain shell scripts (@pxref{RPM}).  Email or newsgroup messages may
+contain sample code.  And so on.  We encourage you to experiment.
+@end itemize
+
+@menu
+* Basic Concepts::              A simple explanation of how it works.
+* Installation::                How to install MMM Mode.
+* Quick Start::                 Getting started using MMM Mode quickly.
+@end menu
+
+@node Basic Concepts, Installation, Overview, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Basic Concepts
+@cindex dominant major mode
+@cindex major mode, dominant
+@cindex default major mode
+@cindex major mode, default
+@cindex submode regions
+@cindex regions, submode
+@cindex overlays, submode
+@cindex submode overlays
+@cindex mmm-ification
+
+The way MMM Mode works is as follows. Each buffer has a @dfn{dominant}
+or @dfn{default} major mode, which is chosen as major modes normally
+are: the user can set it interactively, or it can be chosen
+automatically with `auto-mode-alist' (@pxref{Choosing Modes, , , emacs,
+The Emacs Manual}). Within the file, MMM Mode creates @dfn{submode
+regions} within which other major modes are in effect. While the point
+is in a submode region, the following changes occur:
+
+@enumerate
+@item
+The local keymap is that of the submode. This means the key bindings for
+the submode are available, while those of the dominant mode are not.
+@item
+The mode line (@pxref{Mode Line, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) changes
+to show which submode region is active. This can be configured; see
+@ref{Mode Line}.
+@item
+The major mode menu, both on the menu bar and the mouse popup, are that
+of the submode.
+@item
+Some local variables of the submode shadow those of the default mode
+(@pxref{Local Variables}). For the user, this serves to help make Emacs
+behave as if the submode were the major mode.
+@item
+The syntax table and indentation are those of the submode.
+@item
+Font-lock (@pxref{Font Lock, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) fontifies
+correctly for the submode.
+@item
+The submode regions are highlighted by a background color; see
+@ref{Region Coloring}.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+The submode regions are represented internally by Emacs Lisp objects
+known as @dfn{overlays}. Some of the above are implemented by overlay
+properties, and others are updated by an MMM Mode function in
+`post-command-hook'. You don't need to know this to use MMM Mode, but it
+may make any error messages you come across more understandable.
+@xref{Overlays, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
+more information on overlays.
+
+Because overlays are not saved with a file, every time a file is opened,
+they must be created.  Creating submode regions is occasionally referred
+to as @dfn{mmm-ification}.  (I've never had occasion to pronounce this,
+but if I did I would probably say `mummification'. Like what they did in
+ancient Egypt.)  You can mmm-ify a buffer interactively, but most often
+MMM Mode will find and create submode regions automatically based on a
+buffer's file extension, dominant mode, or local variables.
+
+
+@node Installation, Quick Start, Basic Concepts, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Installing MMM Mode
+
+MMM Mode has a standard installation process.  See the file INSTALL for
+generic information on this process.  To summarize, unpack the archive,
+@command{cd} to the created MMM Mode directory, type @samp{./configure},
+then @samp{make}, then @samp{make install}.  If all goes correctly, this
+will compile the MMM Mode elisp files, install them in your local
+site-lisp directory, and install the MMM Mode info file @file{mmm.info}
+in your local info directory.
+
+Now you need to configure your Emacs initialization file (usually
+@file{~/.emacs}) to use MMM Mode.  First, Emacs has to know where to
+find MMM Mode.  In other words, the MMM Mode directory has to be in
+@code{load-path}.  This can be done in the parent directory's
+@file{subdirs.el} file, or in the init file with a line such as:
+
+@lisp
+(add-to-list 'load-path "/path/to/site-lisp/mmm/")
+@end lisp
+
+Once @code{load-path} is configured, MMM Mode must be loaded.  You can
+load all of MMM Mode with the line
+
+@lisp
+(require 'mmm-mode)
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+but if you use MMM Mode only rarely, it may not be desirable to load all
+of it at the beginning of every editing session.  You can load just
+enough of MMM Mode so it will turn itself on when necessary and load the
+rest of itself, by using instead the line
+
+@lisp
+(require 'mmm-auto)
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+in your initialization file.
+
+One more thing you may want to do right now is to set the variable
+@code{mmm-global-mode}.  If this variable is @code{nil} (the default),
+MMM Mode will never turn itself on.  If it is @code{t}, MMM Mode will
+turn itself on in every buffer.  Probably the most useful value for it,
+however, is the symbol @code{maybe} (actually, anything that is not
+@code{nil} and not @code{t}), which causes MMM Mode to turn itself on in
+precisely those buffers where it would be useful.  You can do this with
+a line such as:
+
+@lisp
+(setq mmm-global-mode 'maybe)
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+in your initialization file.  @xref{Global Mode}, for more detailed
+information.
+
+
+@node Quick Start,  , Installation, Overview
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Getting Started Quickly
+
+Perhaps the simplest way to create submode regions is to do it
+interactively by specifying a region. First you must turn MMM Mode
+on---say, with @kbd{M-x mmm-mode}---then place point and mark around the
+area you want to make into a submode region, type @kbd{C-c % C-r}, and
+enter the desired major mode. @xref{Interactive}, for more details.
+
+A better way to add submode regions is by using submode classes, which
+store a lot of useful information for MMM Mode about how to add and
+manipulate the regions created.  @xref{Submode Classes}, for more
+details.  There are several sample submode classes that come with MMM
+Mode, which are documented later in this manual.  Look through these and
+determine if one of them fits your needs.  If so, I suggest reading the
+comments on that mode.  Then come back here to find out to use it.
+
+To apply a submode class to a buffer interactively, turn MMM Mode on as
+above, then type @kbd{C-c % C-c} and enter the name of the class.
+Submode regions should be added automatically, if there are any regions
+in the buffer appropriate to the submode class.
+
+If you want a given file to always use a given submode class, you can
+express this in a file variable: add a line containing the string
+@samp{-*- mmm-classes: @var{class} -*-} at the top of the file.
+@xref{File Variables, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}, for more information
+and other methods. Now whenever MMM Mode is turned on in that file, it
+will be mmm-ified according to @var{class}. If @code{mmm-global-mode} is
+non-nil, then MMM Mode will turn itself on whenever a file with a
+@code{mmm-classes} local variable is opened. @xref{Global Mode}, for more
+information.
+
+If you want a submode class to apply to @emph{all} files in a certain
+major mode or with a certain extension, add a line such as this to your
+initialization file:
+
+@lisp
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class @var{mode} @var{extension} @var{class})
+@end lisp
+
+@noindent
+After this call, any file opened whose name matches the regular
+expression @var{extension} @emph{and} whose default mode is @var{mode}
+will be automatically mmm-ified according to @var{class} (assuming
+@code{mmm-global-mode} is non-nil). If one of @var{extension} or
+@var{mode} is @code{nil}, a file need only satisfy the other one to be
+mmm-ified.
+
+You can now read the rest of this manual to learn more about how MMM
+Mode works and how to configure it to your preferences.  If none of the
+supplied submode classes fit your needs, then you can try to write your
+own.  @xref{Writing Classes}, for more information.
+
+@node Basics, Customizing, Overview, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter MMM Mode Basics
+
+This chapter explains the most important parts of how to use MMM Mode.
+
+@menu
+* MMM Minor Mode::              The Emacs minor mode that manages it all.
+* Submode Classes::             What they are and how to use them.
+* Selecting Classes::           How MMM Mode knows what classes to use.
+* Insertion::                   Inserting new submode regions automatically.
+* Re-parsing::                  Re-scanning for submode regions.
+* Interactive::                 Adding submode regions manually.
+* Global Mode::                 Turning MMM Mode on automatically.
+@end menu
+
+@node MMM Minor Mode, Submode Classes, Basics, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section The MMM Minor Mode
+@cindex mode, mmm minor
+@cindex minor mode, mmm
+@cindex mmm minor mode
+
+An Emacs minor mode is an optional feature which can be turned on or off
+in a given buffer, independently of the major mode. @xref{Minor Modes, ,
+, emacs, The Emacs Manual}. MMM Mode is implemented as a minor mode
+which manages the submode regions. This minor mode must be turned on in
+a buffer for submode regions to be effective. When activated, the MMM
+Minor mode is denoted by @samp{MMM} in the mode line (@pxref{Mode
+Line}).
+
+@menu
+* Enabling MMM Mode::           Turning MMM Mode on and off.
+* MMM Mode Keys::               Default key bindings in MMM Mode.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Enabling MMM Mode, MMM Mode Keys, MMM Minor Mode, MMM Minor Mode
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Enabling MMM Mode
+@cindex mmm mode, turning on
+@cindex mmm mode, turning off
+@cindex turning on mmm mode
+@cindex turning off mmm mode
+@cindex mmm mode, enabling
+@cindex mmm mode, disabling
+@cindex enabling mmm mode
+@cindex disabling mmm mode
+
+If @code{mmm-global-mode} is non-@code{nil} (@pxref{Global Mode}),
+then the MMM minor mode will be turned on automatically whenever a file
+with associated submode classes is opened (@pxref{Selecting Classes}).
+It is also turned on by interactive mmm-ification (@pxref{Interactive}),
+although the interactive commands do not have key bindings when it is
+not on and must be invoked via @kbd{M-x}. You can also turn it on (or
+off) manually with @kbd{M-x mmm-mode}, in which case it applies all
+submode classes associated with the buffer. Turning MMM Mode off
+automatically removes all submode regions from the buffer.
+
+@deffn Command mmm-mode @var{arg}
+Toggle the state of MMM Mode in the current buffer. If @var{arg} is
+supplied, turn MMM Mode on if and only if @var{arg} is positive.
+@end deffn
+
+@defun mmm-mode-on
+Turn MMM Mode on unconditionally in the current buffer.
+@end defun
+
+@defun mmm-mode-off
+Turn MMM Mode off unconditionally in the current buffer.
+@end defun
+
+@defvar mmm-mode
+This variable represents whether MMM Mode is on in the current buffer.
+Do not set this variable directly; use one of the above functions.
+@end defvar
+
+
+@node MMM Mode Keys,  , Enabling MMM Mode, MMM Minor Mode
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Key Bindings in MMM Mode
+@cindex mmm mode key bindings
+@cindex key bindings in mmm mode
+@findex mmm-insertion-help
+@kindex C-c % h
+
+When MMM Mode is on, it defines a number of key bindings. By default,
+these are bound after the prefix sequence @kbd{C-c %}. Minor mode
+keymaps are supposed to use @kbd{C-c @var{punctuation}} sequences, and I
+find this one to be a good mnemonic because @samp{%} is used by Mason to
+denote special tags. This prefix key can be customized; @ref{Key
+Bindings}.
+
+There are two types of key bindings in MMM Mode: @dfn{commands} and
+@dfn{insertions}. Command bindings run MMM Mode interactive functions to
+do things like re-parse the buffer or end the current submode region,
+and are defined statically as normal Emacs key-bindings. Insertion
+bindings insert submode region skeletons with delimiters into the
+buffer, and are defined dynamically, according to which submode classes
+(@pxref{Submode Classes}) are in effect, via a keymap default binding.
+
+To distinguish between the two, MMM Mode uses distinct modifier keys for
+each. By default, command bindings use the control key (e.g. @kbd{C-c %
+C-b} re-parses the buffer), and insertion bindings do not (e.g. @kbd{C-c
+% p}, when the Mason class is in effect, inserts a
+@samp{<%perl>...</%perl>} region). This makes the command bindings
+different from in previous versions, however, so the variable
+@code{mmm-use-old-bindings} is provided. If this variable is set to `t'
+before MMM Mode is loaded, the bindings will be reversed: insertion
+bindings will use the control key and command bindings will not.
+
+Normally, Emacs gives help on a prefix command if you type @kbd{C-h}
+after that command (e.g. @kbd{C-x C-h} displays all key bindings
+starting with @kbd{C-x}). Because of how insertion bindings are
+implemented dynamically with a default binding, they do not show up when
+you hit @kbd{C-c % C-h}. For this reason, MMM Mode defines the command
+@kbd{C-c % h} which displays a list of all currently valid insertion key
+sequences. If you use the defaults for command and insertion bindings,
+the @kbd{C-h} and @kbd{h} should be mnemonic.
+
+In the rest of this manual, I will assume you are using the defaults for
+the mode prefix (@kbd{C-c %}) and the command and insertion modifiers.
+You can customize them, however; @ref{Key Bindings}.
+
+
+@node Submode Classes, Selecting Classes, MMM Minor Mode, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Understanding Submode Classes
+@cindex submode classes
+@cindex classes, submode
+
+A submode class represents a ``type'' of submode region. It specifies
+how to find the regions, what their delimiters look like, what submode
+they should be, how to insert them, and how they behave in other ways.
+It is represented by a symbol, such as @code{mason} or
+@code{eval-elisp}.
+
+For example, in the Mason set of classes, there is one class
+representing all @samp{<%...%>} inline Perl regions, and one
+representing regions such as @samp{<%perl>...</%perl>},
+@samp{<%init>...</%init>}, and so on. These are different to Mason, but
+to Emacs they are all just Perl sections, so they are covered by the
+same submode class.
+
+But it would be tedious if whenever we wanted to use the Mason classes,
+we had to specify both of these. (Actually, this is a simplification:
+there are some half a dozen Mason submode classes.) So submode classes
+can also ``group'' others together, and we can refer to the @code{mason}
+class and mean all of them.
+
+The way a submode class is used is to @dfn{apply} it to a buffer. This
+scans the buffer for regions which should be submode regions according
+to that class, and also remembers the class for later, so that new
+submode regions can be inserted and scanned for later.
+
+
+@node Selecting Classes, Insertion, Submode Classes, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section How MMM Mode selects submode classes
+
+Submode classes that apply to a buffer come from three sources:
+mode/extension-associated classes, file-local classes, and interactive
+MMM-ification (@pxref{Interactive}). Whenever MMM Mode is turned on in a
+buffer (@pxref{MMM Minor Mode}, and @ref{Global Mode}), it inspects the
+value of two variables to determine which classes to automatically apply
+to the buffer. This covers the first two sources; the latter is covered
+in a later chapter.
+
+@menu
+* File Classes::                Classes for a single file.
+* Mode-Ext Classes::            Classes for a given mode or extension.
+* Global Classes::              Classes for all MMM Mode buffers.
+@end menu
+
+
+@node File Classes, Mode-Ext Classes, Selecting Classes, Selecting Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection File-Local Submode Classes
+
+@defvar mmm-classes
+This variable is always buffer-local when set. Its value should be
+either a single symbol or a list of symbols. Each symbol represents a
+submode class that is applied to the buffer.
+@end defvar
+
+@code{mmm-classes} is usually set in a file local variables list.
+@xref{File Variables, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}. The easiest way to
+do this is for the first line of the file to contain the string
+@samp{-*- mmm-classes: @var{classes} -*-}, where @var{classes} is the
+desired value of @code{mmm-classes} for the file in question. It can
+also be done with a local variables list at the end of the file.
+
+
+@node Mode-Ext Classes, Global Classes, File Classes, Selecting Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Submode Classes Associated with Modes and Extensions
+
+@defopt mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+This global variable associates certain submode classes with major modes
+and/or file extensions. Its value is a list of elements of the form
+@code{(@var{mode} @var{ext} @var{class})}. Any buffer whose major mode
+is @var{mode} (a symbol) @emph{and} whose file name matches @var{ext} (a
+regular expression) will automatically have the submode class
+@var{class} applied to it.
+
+If @var{mode} is @code{nil}, then only @var{ext} is considered to
+determine if a buffer fits the criteria, and vice versa. Thus if both
+@var{mode} and @var{ext} are nil, then @var{class} is applied to
+@emph{all} buffers in which MMM Mode is on. Note that @var{ext} can be
+any regular expression, although its name indicates that it most often
+refers to the file extension.
+
+If @var{class} is the symbol @code{t}, then no submode class is actually
+applied for this association. However, if @code{mmm-global-mode} is
+non-@code{nil} and non-@code{t}, MMM Mode will be turned on in matching
+buffers even if there are no actual submode classes being applied.
+@xref{Global Mode}.
+@end defopt
+
+@defun mmm-add-mode-ext-class @var{mode} @var{ext} @var{class}
+This function adds an element to @code{mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist},
+associating the submode class @var{class} with the major mode @var{mode}
+and extension @var{ext}.
+
+Older versions of MMM Mode required this function to be used to control
+the value of @code{mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist}, rather than setting it
+directly. In this version it is provided purely for convenience and
+backward compatibility.
+@end defun
+
+
+@node Global Classes,  , Mode-Ext Classes, Selecting Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection Globally Applied Classes and the Universal Class
+
+In addition to file-local and mode-ext-associated submode classes, MMM
+Mode also allows you to specify that certain submode classes apply to
+@emph{all} buffers in which MMM Mode is enabled.
+
+@defopt mmm-global-classes
+This variable's value should be a list of submode classes that apply to
+all buffers with MMM Mode on.  It can be overriden in a file local
+variables list, such as to disable global class for a specific file.
+Its default value is @code{(universal)}.
+@end defopt
+
+The default global class is the ``universal class'', which is defined in
+the file @file{mmm-univ.el} (loaded automatically), and allows the
+author of text to specify that a certain section of it be in a specific
+major mode.  Thus, for example, when writing an email message that
+includes sample code, the author can allow readers of the message (who
+use emacs and MMM) to view the code in the appropriate major mode.  The
+syntax used is @samp{@{%@var{mode}%@} ... @{%/@var{mode}%@}}, where
+@var{mode} should be the name of the major mode, with or without the
+customary @samp{-mode} suffix: for example, both @samp{cperl} and
+@samp{cperl-mode} are acceptable.
+
+The universal class also defines an insertion key, @samp{/}, which
+prompts for the submode to use.  @xref{Insertion}.  The universal class
+is most useful when @code{mmm-global-mode} is set to @code{t};
+@ref{Global Mode}.
+
+
+@node Insertion, Re-parsing, Selecting Classes, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Inserting new submode regions
+
+So much for noticing submode regions already present when you open a
+file. When editing a file with MMM Mode on, you will often want to add a
+new submode region. MMM Mode provides several facilities to help you.
+The simplest is to just hit a few keys and have the region and its
+delimiters inserted for you.
+
+Each submode class can define an association of keystrokes with
+``skeletons'' to insert a submode region. If there are several submode
+classes enabled in a buffer, it is conceivable that the keys they use
+for insertion might conflict, but unlikely as most buffers will not use
+more than one or two submode classes groups.
+
+As an example of how insertion works, consider the Mason classes. In a
+buffer with MMM Mode enabled and Mason associated, the key sequence
+@kbd{C-c % p} inserts the following perl section (the semicolon is to
+prevent CPerl Mode from getting confused---@pxref{Mason}):
+
+@example
+<%perl>-<-;
+-!-
+->-</%perl>
+@end example
+
+In this schematic representation, the string @samp{-!-} represents the
+position of point (the cursor), @samp{-<-} represents the beginning of
+the submode region, and @samp{->-} its end.
+
+All insertion keys come after the MMM Mode prefix keys (by default
+@kbd{C-c %}; @pxref{Key Bindings}) and are by default single characters
+such as @kbd{p}, @kbd{%}, and @kbd{i}. To avoid confusion, all the MMM
+Mode commands are bound by default to control characters (after the same
+prefix keys), such as @kbd{C-b}, @kbd{C-%} and @kbd{C-r}. This is a
+change from earlier versions of MMM Mode, and can be customized; see
+@ref{Key Bindings}.
+
+To find out what insertion keys are available, consult the documentation
+for the submode class you are using. If it is one of the classes
+supplied with MMM Mode, you can find it in this Info file.
+
+Because insertion keys are implemented with a ``default binding'' for
+flexibility, they do not show up in the output of @kbd{C-h m} and cannot
+be found with @kbd{C-h k}. For this reason, MMM Mode supplies the
+command @kbd{C-c % h} (@code{mmm-insertion-help} to view the available
+insertion keys.
+
+
+@node Re-parsing, Interactive, Insertion, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Re-Parsing Submode Regions
+@cindex re-parsing submode regions
+@cindex parsing submode regions
+@cindex submode regions, re-parsing
+@cindex regions, submode, re-parsing
+@cindex submode regions, clearing
+@cindex clearing submode regions
+@cindex regions, submode, clearing
+@kindex C-c % C-b
+@kindex C-c % C-g
+@kindex C-c % C-%
+@kindex C-c % C-5
+@kindex C-c % C-k
+
+Describe @code{mmm-parse-buffer}, @code{mmm-parse-region},
+@code{mmm-parse-block}, and @code{mmm-clear-current-region}.
+
+@node Interactive, Global Mode, Re-parsing, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Interactive MMM-ification Functions
+@cindex interactive mmm-ification
+@cindex mmm-ification, interactive
+@cindex mmm-ification by region
+@cindex mmm-ification by regexp
+@cindex mmm-ification by class
+@cindex region, mmm-ification by
+@cindex regexp, mmm-ification by
+@cindex class, mmm-ification by
+@kindex C-c % C-r
+@kindex C-c % C-c
+@kindex C-c % C-x
+@cindex mmm-ification, interactive history
+@cindex history of interactive mmm-ification
+@cindex interactive mmm-ification, history of
+
+There are several commands you can use to create submode regions
+interactively, rather than by applying a submode class to a buffer.
+These commands (in particular, @code{mmm-ify-region}), can be useful
+when editing a file or email message containing a snippet of code in
+some other language.  Also see @ref{Global Classes}, for an alternate
+approach to the same problem.
+
+@table @kbd
+@item C-c % C-r
+Creates a submode region between point and mark. Prompts for the submode
+to use, which must be a valid Emacs major mode name, such as
+@code{emacs-lisp-mode} or @code{cperl-mode}. Adds markers to the
+interactive history. (@code{mmm-ify-region})
+
+@item C-c % C-c
+Applies an already-defined submode class to the buffer, which it prompts
+for. Adds this class to the interactive history.
+(@code{mmm-ify-by-class})
+
+@item C-c % C-x
+Scans the buffer for submode regions (prompts for the submode) using
+front and back regular expressions that it also prompts for. Briefly, it
+starts at the beginning of the buffer and searches for the front regexp.
+If it finds a match, it searches for the back regexp. If it finds a
+match for that as well, it makes a submode region between the two
+matches and continues searching until no more matches are found. Adds
+the regexps to the interactive history. (@code{mmm-ify-by-regexp})
+
+@end table
+
+These commands are also useful when designing a new submode class
+(@pxref{Submode Classes}). Working with the regexps interactively can
+make it easier to debug and tune the class before starting to use it on
+automatic. All these commands also add to value of the following
+variable.
+
+@defvar mmm-interactive-history
+Stores a history of all interactive mmm-ification that has been
+performed in the current buffer. This way, for example, the re-parsing
+functions (@pxref{Re-parsing}) will respect interactively added regions,
+and the insertion keys for classes that were added interactively are
+available.
+@end defvar
+
+If for any reason you want to ``wipe the slate clean'', this command
+should help you. By default, it has no key binding, so you must invoke
+it with @kbd{M-x mmm-clear-history @key{RET}}.
+
+@deffn Command mmm-clear-history
+Clears all history of interactive mmm-ification in the current buffer.
+This command does not affect existing submode regions; to remove them,
+you may want to re-parse the buffer with @kbd{C-c % C-b}
+(@code{mmm-parse-buffer}).
+@end deffn
+
+
+@node Global Mode,  , Interactive, Basics
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section MMM Global Mode
+@cindex mode, mmm global
+@cindex global mmm mode
+@cindex mmm global mode
+@vindex mmm-never-modes
+
+When a file has associated submode classes (@pxref{Selecting Classes}),
+you may want MMM Mode to turn itself on and parse that file for submode
+regions automatically whenever it is opened in an Emacs buffer. The
+value of the following variable controls when MMM Mode turns itself on
+automatically.
+
+@defopt mmm-global-mode
+Do not be misled by the fact that this variable's name ends in
+@samp{-mode}: it is not a simple on/off switch. There are three possible
+(meanings of) values for it: @code{t}, @code{nil}, and anything else.
+
+When this variable is @code{nil}, MMM Mode is never enabled
+automatically. If it is enabled manually, such as by typing @kbd{M-x
+mmm-mode}, any submode classes associated with the buffer will still be
+used, however.
+
+When this variable is @code{t}, MMM Mode is enabled automatically in
+@emph{all} buffers, including those not visiting files, except those
+whose major mode is an element of @code{mmm-never-modes}. The default
+value of this variable contains modes such as @code{help-mode} and
+@code{dired-mode} in which most users would never want MMM Mode, and
+in which MMM might cause problems.
+
+When this variable is neither @code{nil} nor @code{t}, MMM Mode is
+enabled automatically in all buffers that would have associated submode
+classes; i.e. only if there would be something for it to do. The value
+of @code{mmm-never-modes} is still respected, however. Note that this
+can include buffers not visiting files, if that buffer's major mode is
+present in @code{mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist} with a @code{nil} value for
+@var{ext} (@pxref{Mode-Ext Classes}). Submode class values of @code{t}
+in @code{mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist} cause MMM Mode to be enabled in
+matching buffers, but supply no submode classes to be applied.
+@end defopt
+
+@menu
+* Major Mode Hook::             Using MMM's Major Mode Hook
+@end menu
+
+
+@node Major Mode Hook,  , Global Mode, Global Mode
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@subsection The Major Mode Hook
+@cindex hook, major mode
+@cindex major mode hook
+@vindex mmm-major-mode-hook
+
+This section is intended for users who understand Emacs Lisp and want to
+know how MMM Global Mode is implemented, and perhaps use the same
+technique. In fact, MMM Mode exports a hook variable that you can use
+easily, without understanding any of the details---see below.
+
+In order to enable itself in @emph{all} buffers, however, MMM Mode has
+to hook itself into all major modes.  Global Font Lock Mode from the
+standard Emacs distribution (@pxref{Font Lock, , , emacs, The Emacs
+Manual}) has a similar problem, and solves it by adding a function to
+@code{change-major-mode-hook}, which is run by
+@code{kill-all-local-variables}, which is run in turn by all major mode
+functions at the @emph{beginning}.  This function stores a list of which
+buffers need fontification.  It then adds a different function to
+@code{post-command-hook}, which checks if the current buffer needs
+fontification, and if so performs it.  MMM Global Mode uses the same
+technique.
+
+In the interests of generality, and for your use, the function that MMM
+Mode runs in @code{post-command-hook} (@code{mmm-run-major-mode-hook})
+is not specific to MMM Mode, but rather runs the hook variable
+@code{mmm-major-mode-hook}, which by default contains a function
+(@code{mmm-mode-on-maybe}) which possibly turns MMM Mode on, depending
+on the value of @code{mmm-global-mode}.  Thus, to run another function
+in all major modes, all you need to do is add it to this hook.  For
+example, the following line in an initialization file will turn on Auto
+Fill Mode (@pxref{Auto Fill, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) in all
+buffers:
+
+@lisp
+(add-hook 'mmm-major-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
+@end lisp
+
+@node Customizing, Supplied Classes, Basics, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Customizing MMM Mode
+
+This chapter explains how to customize the appearance and functioning of
+MMM Mode however you want.
+
+@menu
+* Region Coloring::             Changing or removing background colors.
+* Preferred Modes::             Choosing which major modes to use.
+* Mode Line::                   What is displayed in the mode line.
+* Key Bindings::                Customizing the MMM Mode key bindings.
+* Local Variables::             What local variables are saved for submodes.
+* Changing Classes::            Changing the supplied submode classes.
+* Hooks::                       How to make MMM Mode run your code.
+@end menu
+
+@node Region Coloring, Preferred Modes, Customizing, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Customizing Region Coloring
+@cindex faces, submode
+@cindex submode faces
+@cindex customizing submode faces
+@cindex default submode face
+
+By default, MMM Mode highlights all submode regions with a background
+color.  There are three levels of this decoration, controlled by the
+following variable:
+
+@defopt mmm-submode-decoration-level
+This variable controls the level of coloring of submode regions.  It
+should be one of the integers 0, 1, or 2, representing (respectively)
+none, low, and high coloring.
+@end defopt
+
+No coloring means exactly that.  Submode regions have the same
+background as the rest of the text.  This produces the minimal
+interference with font-lock coloration.  In particular, if you want to
+use background colors for font-lock, this may be a good idea, because
+the submode highlight, if present, overrides any font-lock background
+coloring.
+
+Low coloring uses the same background color for all submode regions.
+This color is specified with the face @code{mmm-default-submode-face}
+(@pxref{Faces, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) which can be customized,
+either through the Emacs ``customize'' interface or using direct Lisp
+commands such as @code{set-face-background}.  Of course, other aspects
+of the face can also be set, such as the foreground color, bold,
+underline, etc.  These are more likely to conflict with font-lock,
+however, so only a background color is recommended.
+
+High coloring uses multiple background colors, depending on the function
+of the submode region.  The recognized functions and their meanings are
+as follows:
+
+@table @samp
+@item init
+Code that is executed at the beginning of (something), as initialization
+of some sort.
+
+@item cleanup
+Code that is executed at the end of (something), as some sort of clean
+up facility.
+
+@item declaration
+Code that provides declarations of some sort, perhaps global or local
+arguments, variables, or methods.
+
+@item comment
+Text that is not executed as code, but instead serves to document the
+code around it.  Submode regions of this function often use a mode such
+as Text Mode rather than a programming language mode.
+
+@item output
+An expression that is evaluated and its value interpolated into the
+output produced.
+
+@item code
+Executed code not falling under any other category.
+
+@item special
+Submode regions not falling under any other category, such as component
+calls.
+
+@end table
+
+The different background colors are provided by the faces
+@code{mmm-@var{function}-submode-face}, which can be customized in the
+same way as @code{mmm-default-submode-face}.
+
+
+@node Preferred Modes, Mode Line, Region Coloring, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Preferred Major Modes
+
+Certain of the supplied submode classes know only the language that
+certain sections are written in, but not what major mode you prefer to
+use to edit such code.  For example, many people prefer CPerl mode over
+Perl mode; you may have a special mode for Javascript or just use C++
+mode.  This variable allows you to tell submodes such as Mason
+(@pxref{Mason}) and Embedded Javascript (@pxref{Javascript}) what major
+mode to use for the submodes:
+
+@defopt mmm-major-mode-preferences
+The elements of this list are cons cells of the form
+@code{(@var{language} . @var{mode})}.  @var{language} should be a symbol
+such as @code{perl}, @code{html-js}, or @code{java}, while @var{mode}
+should be the name of a major mode such as @code{perl-mode},
+@code{cperl-mode}, @code{javascript-mode}, or @code{c++-mode}.
+
+You probably won't have to set this variable at all; MMM tries to make
+intelligent guesses about what modes you prefer.  For example, if a
+function called @code{javascript-mode} exists, it is chosen, otherwise
+@code{c++-mode} is used.  Similarly for @code{jde-mode} and
+@code{java-mode}.
+@end defopt
+
+If you do need to change the defaults, you may find the following
+function convenient.
+
+@defun mmm-set-major-mode-preferences @var{language} @var{mode} &optional @var{default}
+Set the preferred major mode for LANGUAGE to MODE.  If there is already
+a mode specified for LANGUAGE, and DEFAULT is nil or unsupplied, then it
+is changed.  If DEFAULT is non-nil, then any existing mode is unchanged.
+This is used by packages to ensure that some mode is present, but not
+override any user-specified mode.  If you are not writing a submode
+class, you should ignore the third argument.
+@end defun
+
+Thus, for example, to use @code{my-java-mode} for Java code, you would
+use the following line:
+
+@lisp
+(mmm-set-major-mode-preferences 'java 'my-java-mode)
+@end lisp
+
+
+@node Mode Line, Key Bindings, Preferred Modes, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Customizing the Mode Line Display
+
+By default, when in a submode region, MMM Mode changes the section of
+the mode line (@pxref{Mode Line, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) that
+normally displays the major mode name---for example, @samp{HTML}---to
+instead show both the dominant major mode and the currently active
+submode---for example, @samp{HTML[CPerl]}.  You can change this format,
+however.
+
+@defopt mmm-submode-mode-line-format
+The value of this variable should be a string containing one or both of
+the escape sequences @samp{~M} and @samp{~m}.  The string displayed in
+the major mode section of the mode line when in a submode is obtained by
+replacing all occurrences of @samp{~M} with the dominant major mode name
+and @samp{~m} with the currently active submode name.  For example, to
+display only the currently active submode, set this variable to
+@samp{~m}.  The default value is @samp{~M[~m]}.
+@end defopt
+
+The MMM minor mode also normally displays the string @samp{MMM} in the
+minor mode section of the mode line to indicate when it is active.  You
+can customize or disable this as well.
+
+@defopt mmm-mode-string
+This string is displayed in the minor mode section of the mode line when
+the MMM minor mode is active.  If nonempty, it should begin with a space
+to separate the MMM indicator from that of other minor modes.  To
+eliminate the indicator entirely, set this variable to the empty string.
+@end defopt
+
+
+@node Key Bindings, Local Variables, Mode Line, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Customizing the MMM Mode Key Bindings
+
+The default MMM Mode key bindings are explained in @ref{MMM Mode Keys},
+and in @ref{Insertion}.  There are a couple of ways to customize these
+bindings.
+
+@defopt mmm-mode-prefix-key
+The value of this variable (default is @kbd{C-c %}) should be a key
+sequence to use as the prefix for the MMM Mode keymap.  Minor modes
+typically use @kbd{C-c} followed by a punctuation character, but you can
+change it to any user-available key sequence.  To have an effect, this
+variable should be set before MMM Mode is loaded.
+@end defopt
+
+@defopt mmm-use-old-command-keys
+When this variable is @code{nil}, MMM Mode commands use the control
+modifier and insertion keys no modifier.  Any other value switches the
+two, so that @code{mmm-parse-buffer}, for example, is bound to @kbd{C-c
+% b}, while perl-section insertion in the Mason class is bound to
+@kbd{C-c % C-p}.  This variable should be set before MMM Mode is loaded
+to have an effect.
+@end defopt
+
+When MMM is loaded, it uses the value of @code{mmm-use-old-command-keys}
+to set the values of the variables @code{mmm-command-modifiers} and
+@code{mmm-insert-modifiers}, so if you prefer you can set these
+variables instead.  They should each be a list of key modifiers, such as
+@code{(control)} or @code{()}.  The Meta modifier is used in some of the
+command and insertion keys, so it should not be used, and the Shift
+modifier is not particularly portable between Emacsen---if it works for
+you, feel free to use it.  Other modifiers, such as Hyper and Super, are
+not universally available, but are valid when present.
+
+
+@node Local Variables, Changing Classes, Key Bindings, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Changing Saved Local Variables
+
+A lot of the functionality of MMM Mode---that which makes the major mode
+appear to change---is implemented by saving and restoring the values of
+local variables, or pseudo-variables.  You can customize what variables
+are saved, and how, with the following variable.
+
+@defvar mmm-save-local-variables
+At its simplest, this is a list each of whose elements is a buffer-local
+variable whose value is saved and restored for each major mode.  Each
+elements can also, however, be a list whose first element is the
+variable symbol and whose subsequent elements specify how and where the
+variable is to be saved.  The second element of the list, if present,
+should be one of the symbols @code{global}, @code{buffer}, or
+@code{region}.  If not present, the default value is @code{global}.  The
+third element, if present, should be a list of major mode symbols in
+which to save the variable.  In the list form, the variable symbol
+itself can be replaced with a cons cell of two functions, one to get the
+value and one to set the value.  This is called a ``pseudo-variable''.
+@end defvar
+
+Globally saved variables are the same in all (MMM-controlled) buffers
+and submode regions of each major mode listed in the third argument, or
+all major modes if it is @code{t} or not present.  Buffer-saved
+variables are the same in all submode regions of a given major mode in
+each buffer, and region-saved variables can be different for each
+submode region.
+
+Pseudo-variables are used, for example, to save and restore the syntax
+table (@pxref{Syntax, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) and mode keymaps
+(@pxref{Keymaps, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}).
+
+
+@node Changing Classes, Hooks, Local Variables, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Changing the Supplied Submode Classes
+
+If you need to use MMM with a syntax for which a submode class is not
+supplied, and you have some facility with Emacs Lisp, you can write your
+own; see @ref{Writing Classes}.  However, sometimes you will only want
+to make a slight change to one of the supplied submode classes.  You can
+do this, after that class is loaded, with the following functions.
+
+@defun mmm-set-class-parameter @var{class} @var{param} @var{value}
+Set the value of the keyword parameter @var{param} of the submode class
+@var{class} to @var{value}.  @xref{Writing Classes}, for an explanation
+of the meaning of each keyword parameter.  This creates a new parameter
+if one is not already present in the class.
+@end defun
+
+@defun mmm-get-class-parameter @var{class} @var{param}
+Get the value of the keyword parameter @var{param} for the submode class
+@var{class}.  Returns @code{nil} if there is no such parameter.
+@end defun
+
+
+
+@node Hooks,  , Changing Classes, Customizing
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Hooks Provided by MMM Mode
+
+MMM Mode defines several hook variables (@pxref{Hooks, , , emacs, The
+Emacs Manual}) which are run at different times.  The most often used is
+@code{mmm-major-mode-hook} which is described in @ref{Major Mode Hook},
+but there are a couple others.
+
+@defvar mmm-mode-hook
+This normal hook is run whenever MMM Mode is enabled in a buffer.
+@end defvar
+
+@defvar mmm-@var{major-mode}-hook
+This is actually a whole set of hook variables, a different one for
+every major mode.  Whenever MMM Mode is enabled in a buffer, the
+corresponding hook variable for the dominant major mode is run.
+@end defvar
+
+@defvar mmm-@var{submode}-submode-hook
+Again, this is a set of one hook variable per major mode.  These hooks
+are run whenever a submode region of the corresponding major mode is
+created in any buffer, with point at the start of the new submode
+region.
+@end defvar
+
+@defvar mmm-@var{class}-class-hook
+This is a set of one hook variable per submode class.  These hooks are
+run when a submode class is first applied to a given buffer.
+@end defvar
+
+Submode classes also have a @code{:creation-hook} parameter which should
+be a function to run whenever a submode region is created with that
+class, with point at the beginning of the submode region.  This can be
+set for supplied submode classes with @code{mmm-set-class-parameter};
+@ref{Changing Classes}.
+
+
+@node Supplied Classes, Writing Classes, Customizing, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Supplied Submode Classes
+
+This chapter describes the submode classes that are supplied with MMM
+Mode.
+
+@menu
+* Mason::                       Mason server-side Perl in HTML.
+* File Variables::              Elisp code in File Variables.
+* Here-documents::              Code in shell and Perl here-documents.
+* Javascript::                  Javascript embedded in HTML.
+* Embedded CSS::                CSS Styles embedded in HTML.
+* Embperl::                     Another syntax for Perl in HTML.
+* ePerl::                       A general Perl-embedding syntax.
+* JSP::                         Java code embedded in HTML.
+* RPM::                         Shell scripts in RPM Spec Files.
+* Noweb::                       Noweb literate programs.
+@end menu
+
+@node Mason, File Variables, Supplied Classes, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Mason: Perl in HTML
+
+Mason is a syntax to embed Perl code in HTML and other documents.  See
+@uref{http://www.masonhq.com} for more information.  The submode class
+for Mason components is called `mason' and is loaded on demand from
+`mmm-mason.el'.  The current Mason class is intended to correctly
+recognize all syntax valid in Mason @value{MASON_VERSION}.  There are
+insertion keys for most of the available syntax; use
+@code{mmm-insertion-help} (@kbd{C-c % h} by default) with Mason on to
+get a list.
+
+If you want to have mason submodes automatically in all Mason files, you
+can use automatic mode and filename associations; the details depend on
+what you call your Mason components and what major mode you use.
+@xref{Mode-Ext Classes}.  If you use an extension for your Mason files
+that emacs does not automatically place in your preferred HTML Mode, you
+will probably want to associate that extension with your HTML Mode as
+well; @ref{Choosing Modes, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}.  This also goes
+for ``special'' Mason files such as autohandlers and dhandlers.
+
+The Perl mode used is controlled by the user: @xref{Preferred Modes}.
+The default is to use CPerl mode, if present.  Unfortunately, there are
+also certain problems with CPerl mode in submode regions.  (Not to say
+that the original perl-mode would do any better---it hasn't been much
+tried.)  First of all, the first line of a Perl section is usually
+indented as if it were a continuation line.  A fix for this is to start
+with a semicolon on the first line.  The insertion key commands do this
+whenever the Mason syntax allows it.
+
+@example
+<%perl>;
+print $var;
+</%perl>
+@end example
+
+In addition, some users have reported that the CPerl indentation
+sometimes does not work. This problem has not yet been tracked down,
+however, and more data about when it happens would be helpful.
+
+Some people have reported problems using PSGML with Mason.  Adding the
+following line to a @file{.emacs} file should suffice to turn PSGML off
+and cause emacs to use a simpler HTML mode:
+
+@lisp
+(autoload 'html-mode "sgml-mode" "HTML Mode" t)
+@end lisp
+
+Earlier versions of PSGML may require instead the following fix:
+
+@lisp
+(delete '("\\.html$" . sgml-html-mode) auto-mode-alist)
+(delete '("\\.shtml$" . sgml-html-mode) auto-mode-alist)
+@end lisp
+
+Other users report using PSGML with Mason and MMM Mode without
+difficulty.  If you don't have problems and want to use PSGML, you may
+need to replace @code{html-mode} in the suggested code with
+@code{sgml-html-mode}.  (Depending on your version of PSGML, this may
+not be necessary.)  Similarly, if you are using XEmacs and want to use
+the alternate HTML mode @code{hm--html-mode}, replace @code{html-mode}
+with that symbol.
+
+One problem that crops up when using PSGML with Mason is that even
+ignoring the special tags and Perl code (which, as I've said, haven't
+caused me any problems), Mason components often are not a complete SGML
+document.  For instance, my autohandlers often say
+
+@example
+<body>
+  <% $m->call_next %>
+</body>
+@end example
+
+in which case the actual components contain no doctype declaration,
+@code{<html>}, @code{<head>}, or @code{<body>}, confusing PSGML.  One
+solution I've found is to use the variable @code{sgml-parent-document}
+in such incomplete components; try, for example, these lines at the end
+of a component.
+
+@example
+%# Local Variables:
+%# sgml-parent-document: ("autohandler" "body" nil ("body"))
+%# sgml-doctype: "/top/level/autohandler"
+%# End:
+@end example
+
+This tells PSGML that the current file is a sub-document of the file
+@file{autohandler} and is included inside a @code{<body>} tag, thus
+alleviating its confusion.
+
+
+@node File Variables, Here-documents, Mason, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Elisp in a Local Variables List
+
+Emacs allows the author of a file to specify major and minor modes to be
+used while editing that file, as well as specifying values for other
+local Elisp variables, with a File Variables list.  @xref{File
+Variables, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}.  Since file variables values
+are Elisp objects (and with the @code{eval} special ``variable'', they
+are forms to be evaluated), one might want to edit them in
+@code{emacs-lisp-mode}.  The submode class @code{file-variables} allows
+this, and is suitable for turning on in a given file with
+@code{mmm-classes}, or in all files with @code{mmm-global-classes}.
+
+
+@node Here-documents, Javascript, File Variables, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Here-documents
+
+One of the long-time standard syntaxes for outputting large amounts of
+code (or text, or HTML, or whatever) from a script (notably shell
+scripts and Perl scripts) is the here-document syntax:
+
+@example
+print <<END_HTML;
+<html>
+  <head>
+    <title>Test Page</title>
+  </head>
+  <body>
+END_HTML
+@end example
+
+The @code{here-doc} submode class recognizes this syntax, and can even
+guess the correct submode to use in many cases.  For instance, it would
+put the above example in @code{html-mode}, noticing the string
+@samp{HTML} in the name of the here-document.  If you use less than
+evocative here-document names, or if the submode is recognized
+incorrectly for any other reason, you can tell it explicitly what
+submode to use.
+
+@defopt mmm-here-doc-mode-alist
+The value of this variable should be an alist, each element a cons pair
+associating a regular expression to a submode symbol.  Whenever a
+here-document name matches one of these regexps, the corresponding
+submode is applied.  For example, if this variable contains the element
+@code{("CODE" . cc-mode)}, then any here-document whose name contains
+the string @samp{CODE} will be put in @code{cc-mode}.  The value of this
+variable overrides any guessing that the @code{here-doc} submode class
+would do otherwise.
+@end defopt
+
+
+@node Javascript, Embedded CSS, Here-documents, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Javascript in HTML
+
+The submode class @code{html-js} allows for embedding Javascript code in
+HTML documents.  It recognizes both this syntax:
+
+@example
+<script language="Javascript">
+function foo(...) @{
+   ...
+@}
+</script>
+@end example
+
+and this syntax:
+
+@example
+<input type="button" onClick="validate();">
+@end example
+
+The mode used for Javascript regions is controlled by the user;
+@xref{Preferred Modes}.
+
+
+@node Embedded CSS, Embperl, Javascript, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section CSS embedded in HTML
+
+CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) can also be embedded in HTML.  The
+@code{embedded-css} submode class recognizes this syntax:
+
+@example
+<style>
+h1 @{
+   ...
+@}
+</style>
+@end example
+
+It uses @code{css-mode} if present, @code{c++-mode} otherwise.  This can
+be customized: @xref{Preferred Modes}.
+
+
+@node Embperl, ePerl, Embedded CSS, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Embperl: More Perl in HTML
+
+Embperl is another syntax for embedding Perl in HTML.  See
+@uref{http://perl.apache.org/embperl} for more information.  The
+@code{embperl} submode class recognizes most if not all of the Embperl
+embedding syntax.  Its Perl mode is also controllable by the user;
+@xref{Preferred Modes}.
+
+
+@node ePerl, JSP, Embperl, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section ePerl: General Perl Embedding
+
+Yet another syntax for embedding Perl is called ePerl.  See
+@uref{http://www.engelschall.com/sw/eperl/} for more information.  The
+@code{eperl} submode class handles this syntax, using the Perl mode
+specified by the user; @xref{Preferred Modes}.
+
+
+@node JSP, RPM, ePerl, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section JSP: Java Embedded in HTML
+
+JSP (Java Server Pages) is a syntax for embedding Java code in HTML.
+The submode class @code{jsp} handles this syntax, using a Java mode
+specified by the user; @xref{Preferred Modes}.  The default is
+@code{jde-mode} if present, otherwise @code{java-mode}.
+
+
+@node RPM, Noweb, JSP, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section RPM Spec Files
+
+@file{mmm-rpm.el} contains the definition of an MMM Mode submode class
+for editing shell script sections within RPM (Redhat Package Manager)
+spec files.  It is recommended for use in combination with
+@file{rpm-spec-mode.el} by Stig Bjørlykke <stigb@@tihlde.hist.no> and
+Steve Sanbeg <sanbeg@@dset.com>
+(@uref{http://www.xemacs.org/~stigb/rpm-spec-mode.el}).
+
+Suggested setup code:
+
+@lisp
+(add-to-list 'mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+             '(rpm-spec-mode "\\.spec\\'" rpm-sh))
+@end lisp
+
+Thanks to Marcus Harnisch <Marcus.Harnisch@@gmx.net> for contributing
+this submode class.
+
+@node Noweb,  , RPM, Supplied Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Noweb literate programming
+
+@file{mmm-noweb.el} contains the definition of an MMM Mode submode
+class for editing Noweb documents.  Most Noweb documents use \LaTeX
+for the documentation chunks.  Code chunks in Noweb are
+document-specific, and the mode may be set with a local variable
+setting in the document.  The variable @var{mmm-noweb-code-mode}
+controls the global code chunk mode. Since Noweb files may have many
+languages in their code chunks, this mode also allows setting the mode
+by specifying a mode in the first line or two of a code chunk, using
+the normal Emacs first-line mode setting syntax.  Note that this
+first-line mode setting only matches a single word for the mode name,
+and does not support the variable name setting of the generalized
+first file line syntax.
+
+@verbatim
+% -*- mode: latex; mmm-noweb-code-mode: c++; -*-
+% First chunk delimiter!
+@
+\noweboptions{smallcode}
+
+\title{Sample Noweb File}
+\author{Joe Kelsey\\
+\nwanchorto{mailto:bozo@bozo.bozo}{\tt bozo@bozo.bozo}}
+\maketitle
+
+@
+\section{Introduction}
+Normal noweb documentation for the required [[*]] chunk.
+<<*>>=
+// C++ mode here!
+// We might list the program here, or simply included chunks.
+<<myfile.cc>>
+@ %def myfile.cc
+
+@
+\section{[[myfile.cc]]}
+This is [[myfile.cc]].  MMM noweb-mode understands code quotes in
+documentation.
+<<myfile.cc>>=
+// This section is indented separately from previous.
+@ 
+
+@
+\section{A Perl Chunk}
+We need a Perl chunk.
+<<myfile.pl>>=
+#!/usr/bin/perl
+# -*- perl -*-
+# Each differently named chunk is flowed separately.
+@ 
+
+\section{Finish [[myfile.cc]]}
+When we resume a previously defined chunk, they are indented together.
+<<myfile.cc>>=
+// Pick up where we left off...
+@ 
+
+@end verbatim
+
+The quoted code chunks inside documentation chunks are given the mode
+found in the variable @var{mmm-noweb-quote-mode}, if set, or the value
+in @var{mmm-noweb-code-mode} otherwise.  Also, each quoted chunk is
+set to have a unique name to prevent them from being indented as a
+unit.
+
+Suggested setup code:
+@lisp
+(mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'latex-mode "\\.nw\\'" 'noweb)
+(add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.nw\\'" . latex-mode))
+@end lisp
+
+In mmm-noweb buffers, each differently-named code chunk has a
+different @code{:name}, allowing all chunks with the same name to get
+indented together.
+
+This mode also supplies special paragraph filling operations for use
+in documentation areas of the buffer.  From a primary-mode
+(@code{latex-mode, , emacs}) region, pressing @kbd{C-c % C-q} will mark all
+submode regions with word syntax (@code{mmm-word-other-regions}), fill
+the current paragraph (@code{(fill-paragraph justify)}), and remove the
+syntax markings (@code{mmm-undo-syntax-other-regions}).
+
+Thanks to Joe Kelsey <joe@@zircon.seattle.wa.us> for contributing this
+class.
+
+
+@node Writing Classes, Indices, Supplied Classes, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Writing Submode Classes
+
+Sometimes (perhaps often) you may want to use MMM with a syntax for
+which it is suited, but for which no submode is supplied.  In such cases
+you may have to write your own submode class.  This chapter briefly
+describes how to write a submode class, from the basic to the advanced,
+with examples.
+
+@menu
+* Basic Classes::               Writing a simple submode class.
+* Paired Delimiters::           Matching paired delimiters.
+* Region Placement::            Placing the region more accurately.
+* Submode Groups::              Grouping several classes together.
+* Calculated Submodes::         Deciding the submode at run-time.
+* Calculated Faces::            Deciding the display face at run-time.
+* Insertion Commands::          Inserting regions automatically.
+* Region Names::                Naming regions for syntax grouping.
+* Other Hooks::                 Running code at arbitrary points.
+* Delimiters::                  Controlling delimiter overlays.
+* Misc Keywords::               Other miscellaneous options.
+@end menu
+
+@node Basic Classes, Paired Delimiters, Writing Classes, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Writing Basic Submode Classes
+@cindex simple submode classes
+@cindex submode classes, simple
+
+Writing a submode class can become rather complex, if the syntax to
+match is complicated and you want to take advantage of some of MMM
+Mode's extra features.  But a simple submode class is not particularly
+difficult to write.  This section describes the basics of writing
+submode classes.
+
+Submode classes are stored in the variable @code{mmm-classes-alist}.
+Each element of this list represents a single submode class.  For
+convenience, the function @code{mmm-add-classes} takes a list of submode
+classes and adds them all to this alist.  Each class is represented by a
+list containing the class name---a symbol such as @code{mason} or
+@code{html-js}---followed by pairs of keywords and arguments called a
+@dfn{class specifier}.  For example, consider the specifier for the
+submode class @code{embedded-css}:
+
+@lisp
+(mmm-add-classes
+ '((embedded-css
+    :submode css
+    :face mmm-declaration-submode-face
+    :front "<style[^>]*>"
+    :back "</style>")))
+@end lisp
+
+The name of the submode is @code{embedded-css}, the first element of the
+list.  The rest of the list consists of pairs of keywords (symbols
+beginning with a colon) such as @code{:submode} and @code{:front}, and
+arguments, such as @code{css} and @code{"<style[^>]*>"}.  It is the
+keywords and arguments that specify how the submode works.  The order of
+keywords is not important; all that matters is the arguments that follow
+them.
+
+The three most important keywords are @code{:submode}, @code{:front},
+and @code{:back}.  The argument following @code{:submode} names the
+major mode to use in submode regions.  It can be either a symbol naming
+a major mode, such as @code{text-mode} or @code{c++-mode}, or a symbol
+to look up in @code{mmm-major-mode-preferences} (@pxref{Preferred
+Modes}) such as @code{css}, as in this case.
+
+The arguments following @code{:front} and @code{:back} are regular
+expressions (@pxref{Regexps, , , emacs, The Emacs Manual}) that should
+match the delimiter strings which begin and end the submode regions.  In
+our example, CSS regions begin with a @samp{<style>} tag, possibly with
+parameters, and end with a @samp{</style>} tag.
+
+The argument following @code{:face} specifies the face (background
+color) to use when @code{mmm-submode-decoration-level} is 2 (high
+coloring).  @xref{Region Coloring}, for a list of canonical available
+faces.
+
+There are many more possible keywords arguments.  In the following
+sections, we will examine each of them and their uses in writing submode
+classes.
+
+
+@node Paired Delimiters, Region Placement, Basic Classes, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Matching Paired Delimiters
+
+A simple pair of regular expressions does not always suffice to exactly
+specify the beginning and end of submode regions correctly.  For this
+reason, there are several other possible keyword/argument pairs which
+influence the matching process.
+
+Many submode regions are marked by paired delimiters.  For example, the
+tags used by Mason (@pxref{Mason}) include @samp{<%init>...</%init>} and
+@samp{<%args>...</%args>}.  It would be possible to write a separate
+submode class for each type of region, but there is an easier way: the
+keyword argument @code{:save-matches}.  If supplied and non-nil, it
+causes the regular expression @code{:back}, before being searched for,
+to be formatted by replacing all strings of the form @samp{~@var{N}}
+(where @var{N} is an integer) with the corresponding numbered
+subexpression of the match for @code{:front}.  As an example, here is an
+excerpt from the @code{here-doc} submode class.  @xref{Here-documents},
+for more information about this submode.
+
+@lisp
+:front "<<\\([a-zA-Z0-9_-]+\\)"
+:back "^~1$"
+:save-matches 1
+@end lisp
+
+The regular expression for @code{:front} matches @samp{<<} followed by a
+string of one or more alphanumeric characters, underscores, and dashes.
+The latter string, which happens to be the name of the here-document, is
+saved as the first subexpression, since it is surrounded by
+@samp{\(...\)}.  Then, because the value of @code{:save-matches} is
+present and non-nil, the string @samp{~1} is replaced in the value of
+@code{:back} by the name of the here-document, thus creating a regular
+expression to match the correct ending delimiter.
+
+
+@node Region Placement, Submode Groups, Paired Delimiters, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Placing Submode Regions Precisely
+
+Normally, a submode region begins immediately after the end of the
+string matching the @code{:front} regular expression and ends
+immediately before the beginning of the string matching the @code{:back}
+regular expression.  This can be changed with the keywords
+@code{:include-front} and @code{:include-back}.  If their arguments are
+@code{nil}, or they do not appear, the default behavior is unchanged.
+But if the argument of @code{:include-front} (respectively,
+@code{:include-back}) is non-nil, the submode region will begin
+(respectively, end) immediately before (respectively, after) the string
+matching the @code{:front} (respectively, @code{:back}) regular
+expression.  In other words, these keywords specify whether or not the
+delimiter strings are @emph{included} in the submode region.
+
+When @code{:front} and @code{:back} are regexps, the delimiter is
+normally considered to be the entire matched region.  This can be
+changed using the @code{:front-match} and @code{:back-match}
+keywords.  The values of the keywords is a number specifying the
+submatch.  This defaults to zero (specifying the whole regexp).
+
+Two more keywords which affect the placement of the region
+@code{:front-offset} and @code{:back-offset}, which both take integers
+as arguments.  The argument of @code{:front-offset} (respectively,
+@code{:back-offset}) gives the distance in characters from the beginning
+(respectively, ending) location specified so far, to the actual point
+where the submode region begins (respectively, ends).  For example, if
+@code{:include-front} is nil or unsupplied and @code{:front-offset} is
+2, the submode region will begin two characters after the end of the
+match for @code{:front}, and if @code{:include-back} is non-nil and
+@code{:back-offset} is -1, the region will end one character before the
+end of the match for @code{:back}.
+
+In addition to integers, the arguments of @code{:front-offset} and
+@code{:back-offset} can be functions which are invoked to move the point
+from the position specified by the matches and inclusions to the correct
+beginning or end of the submode region, or lists whose elements are
+either functions or numbers and whose effects are applied in sequence.
+To help disentangle these options, here is another excerpt from the
+@code{here-doc} submode class:
+
+@lisp
+:front "<<\\([a-zA-Z0-9_-]+\\)"
+:front-offset (end-of-line 1)
+:back "^~1$"
+:save-matches 1
+@end lisp
+
+Here the value of @code{:front-offset} is the list @code{(end-of-line
+1)}, meaning that from the end of the match for @code{:front}, go to the
+end of the line, and then one more character forward (thus to the
+beginning of the next line), and begin the submode region there.  This
+coincides with the normal behavior of here-documents: they begin on the
+following line and go until the ending flag.
+
+If the @code{:back} should not be able to start a new submode region,
+set the @code{:end-not-begin} keyword to non-nil.
+
+@node Submode Groups, Calculated Submodes, Region Placement, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Defining Groups of Submodes
+
+Sometimes more than one submode class is required to accurately reflect
+the behavior of a single type of syntax.  For example, Mason has three
+very different types of Perl regions: blocks bounded by matched tags
+such as @samp{<%perl>...</%perl>}, inline output expressions bounded by
+@samp{<%...%>}, and single lines of code which simply begin with a
+@samp{%} character.  In cases like these, it is possible to specify an
+``umbrella'' class, to turn all these classes on or off together.
+
+@defun mmm-add-group @var{group} @var{classes}
+The submode classes @var{classes}, which should be a list of lists,
+similar to what might be passed to @code{mmm-add-classes}, are added
+just as by that function.  Furthermore, another class named
+@var{group} is added, which encompasses all the classes in
+@var{classes}.
+@end defun
+
+Technically, an group class is specified with a @code{:classes} keyword
+argument, and the subsidiary classes are given a non-nil @code{:private}
+keyword argument to make them invisible.  But in general, all you should
+ever need to know is how to invoke the function above.
+
+@defun mmm-add-to-group @var{group} @var{classes}
+Adds a list of classes to an already existing group.  This can be
+used, for instance, to add a new quoting definition to @var{html-js}
+using this example to add the quote characters ``%=%'':
+
+@lisp
+(mmm-add-to-group 'html-js '((js-html
+			     :submode javascript
+			     :face mmm-code-submode-face
+			     :front "%=%"
+			     :back "%=%"
+			     :end-not-begin t)))
+@end lisp
+@end defun
+
+
+@node Calculated Submodes, Calculated Faces, Submode Groups, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Calculating the Correct Submode
+
+In most cases, the author of a submode class will know in advance what
+major mode to use, such as @code{text-mode} or @code{c++-mode}.  If
+there are multiple possible modes that the user might desire, then
+@code{mmm-major-mode-preferences} should be used (@pxref{Preferred
+Modes}).  The function @code{mmm-set-major-mode-preferences} can be
+used, with a third argument, to ensure than the mode is present.
+
+In some cases, however, the author has no way of knowing in advance even
+what language the submode region will be in.  The @code{here-doc} class
+is one of these.  In such cases, instead of the @code{:submode} keyword,
+the @code{:match-submode} keyword must be used.  Its argument should be
+a function, probably written by the author of the submode class, which 
+calculates what major mode each region should use.
+
+It is invoked immediately after a match is found for @code{:front}, and
+is passed one argument: a string representing the front delimiter.
+Normally this string is simply whatever was matched by @code{:front},
+but this can be changed with the keyword @code{:front-form}
+(@pxref{Delimiters}).  The function should then return a symbol
+that would be a valid argument to @code{:submode}: either the name of a
+mode, or that of a language to look up a preferred mode.  If it detects
+an invalid match---for example, the user has specified a mode which is
+not available---it should @code{(signal 'mmm-no-matching-submode nil)}.
+
+Since here-documents can contain code in any language, the
+@code{here-doc} submode class uses @code{:match-submode} rather than
+@code{:submode}.  The function it uses is @code{mmm-here-doc-get-mode},
+defined in @file{mmm-sample.el}, which inspects the name of the
+here-document for flags indicating the proper mode.  For example, this
+code should probably be in @code{perl-mode} (or @code{cperl-mode}):
+
+@example
+print <<PERL;
+s/foo/bar/g;
+PERL
+@end example
+
+This function is also a good example of proper elisp hygiene: when
+writing accessory functions for a submode class, they should usually be
+prefixed with @samp{mmm-} followed by the name of the submode class, to
+avoid namespace conflicts.
+
+
+@node Calculated Faces, Insertion Commands, Calculated Submodes, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Calculating the Correct Highlight Face
+
+As explained in @ref{Basic Classes}, the keyword @code{:face} should be
+used to specify which of the standard submode faces (@pxref{Region
+Coloring}) a submode region should be highlighted with under high
+decoration.  However, sometimes the function of a region can depend on
+the form of the delimiters as well.  In this case, a more flexible
+alternative to @code{:face} is @code{:match-face}.  Its value can be a
+function, which is called with one argument---the form of the front
+delimiter, as with @code{:match-submode}---and should return the face to
+use.  A more common value for @code{:match-face} is an association list,
+a list of pairs @code{(@var{delim} . @var{face})}, each specifying that
+if the delimiter is @var{delim}, the corresponding region should be
+highlighted with @var{face}.  For example, here is an excerpt from the
+@code{embperl} submode class:
+
+@lisp
+:submode perl
+:front "\\[\\([-\\+!\\*\\$]\\)"
+:back "~1\\]"
+:save-matches 1
+:match-face (("[+" . mmm-output-submode-face)
+             ("[-" . mmm-code-submode-face)
+             ("[!" . mmm-init-submode-face)
+             ("[*" . mmm-code-submode-face)
+             ("[$" . mmm-special-submode-face))
+@end lisp
+
+Thus, regions beginning with @samp{[+} are highlighted as output
+expressions, which they are, while @samp{[-} and @samp{[*} regions are
+highlighted as simple executed code, and so on.  Note that
+@var{mmm-submode-decoration-level} must be set to 2 (high decoration)
+for different faces to be displayed.
+
+
+@node Insertion Commands, Region Names, Calculated Faces, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Specifying Insertion Commands
+
+As described in @ref{Insertion}, submode classes can specify key
+sequences which automatically insert submode regions, with delimiters
+already in place.  This is done by the keyword argument @code{:insert}.
+Its value should be a list, each element of which specifies a single
+insertion key sequence.  As an example, consider the following insertion
+key sequence specifier, from the @code{embperl} submode class:
+
+@lisp
+(?p embperl "Region Type (Character): "
+    @@ "[" str @@ " " _ " " @@ str "]" @@)
+@end lisp
+
+As you can see, the specifier is a list.  The first element of the list
+is the character @samp{p}.  (The question mark tells Emacs that this is
+a character object, not a one-character symbol.)  In general, the first
+element can be any key, including both characters such as @samp{?p} and
+function keys such as @samp{return}.  It can also be a dotted pair in
+which the first element is a modifier symbol such as @code{meta}, and
+the second is a character or function key.  The use of any other
+modifier than meta is discouraged, as `mmm-insert-modifiers' is
+sometimes set to \(control), and other modifiers are not very portable.
+The second element is a symbol identifying this key sequence.  The third
+element is a prompt string which is used to ask the user for input when
+this key sequence is invoked.  If it is nil, the user is not prompted.
+
+The rest of the list specifies the actual text to be inserted, where the
+submode region and delimiters should be, and where the point should end
+up.  (Actually, this string is simply passed to @code{skeleton-insert};
+see the documentation string of that function for more details on the
+permissible elements of such a skeleton.)  Strings and variable names
+are inserted and interpolated.  The value entered by the user when
+prompted, if any, is available in the variable @code{str}.  The final
+location of the point (or the text around which the region is to be
+wrapped) is marked with a single underscore @samp{_}.  Finally, the
+@@-signs mark the delimiters and submode regions.  There should be four
+@@-signs: one at the beginning of the front delimiter, one at the
+beginning of the submode region, one at the end of the submode region,
+and one at the end of the back delimiter.
+
+The above key sequence, bound by default to @kbd{C-c % p}, always
+prompts the user for the type of region to insert.  It can also be
+convenient to have separate key sequences for each type of region to be
+inserted, such as @kbd{C-c % +} for @samp{[+...+]} regions, @kbd{C-c %
+-} for @samp{[-...-]} regions, and so on.  So that the whole skeleton
+doesn't have to be written out half a dozen times, there is a shortcut
+syntax, as follows:
+
+@lisp
+(?+ embperl+ ?p . "+")             
+@end lisp
+
+If the key sequence specification is a dotted list with four elements,
+as this example is, it means to use the skeleton defined for the key
+sequence given as the third element (@code{?p}), but to pass it the
+fourth (dotted) element (@code{"+"}) as the `str' variable; the user is
+not prompted.
+
+
+@node Region Names, Other Hooks, Insertion Commands, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Giving Names to Submode Regions for Grouping
+
+Submode regions can be given ``names'' which are used for grouping.
+Names are always strings and are compared as strings.  Regions with
+the same name are considered part of the same chunk of code.  This is
+used by the syntax and fontification functions.  Unnamed regions are
+not grouped with any others.
+
+By default, regions are nameless, but with the @code{:match-name}
+keyword argument a name can be supplied.  This argument must be a
+string or a function.  If it is a function, it is passed a string
+representing the front delimiter found, and must return the name to
+use.  If it is a string, it is used as-is for the name, unless
+@code{:save-name} has a non-nil value, in which case expressions such
+as @samp{~1} are substituted with the corresponding matched
+subexpression from @code{:front}.  This is the same as how
+@code{:back} is interpreted when @code{:save-matches} is non-nil.
+
+As a special optimization for region insertion (@pxref{Insertion
+Commands}), the argument @code{:skel-name} can be set to a non-nil
+value, in which case the insertion code will use the user-prompted
+string value as the region name, instead of going through the normal
+matching procedure.
+
+
+@node Other Hooks, Delimiters, Region Names, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Other Hooks into the Scanning Process
+
+Sometimes, even the flexibility allowed by all the keyword arguments
+discussed so far is insufficient to correctly match submode regions.
+There are several other keyword arguments which accept custom functions
+to be invoked at various points in the MMM-ification process.
+
+First of all, the arguments of @code{:front} and @code{:back}, in
+addition to regular expressions, can be themselves functions.  Such
+functions should ``act like'' a regular expression search: they should
+start searching at point, take one argument as a limit for the search,
+and return its result by setting the match data (presumably by calling
+some regexp matching function).
+
+This is rarely necessary, however, because often all that is needed is a
+simple regexp search, followed by some sort of verification.  The
+keyword arguments @code{:front-verify} and @code{:back-verify}, if
+supplied, may be functions which are invoked after a match is found for
+@code{:front} or @code{:back}, respectively, and should inspect the
+match data (such as with @code{match-string}) and return non-nil if a
+submode region should be begun at this match, nil if this match should
+be ignored and the search continue after it.
+
+The keyword argument @code{:creation-hook}, if supplied, should be a
+function that is invoked whenever a submode region of this class is
+created, with point at the beginning of the new region.  This can be
+used, for example, to set local variables appropriately.
+
+Finally, the entire MMM-ification process has a ``back door'' which
+allows class authors to take control of the entire thing.  If the
+keyword argument @code{:handler} is supplied, it overrides any other
+processing and is called, and passed all other class keyword arguments,
+instead of @code{mmm-ify} to create submode regions.  If you need to
+write a handler function, I suggest looking at the source for
+@code{mmm-ify} to get an idea of what must be done.
+
+
+@node Delimiters, Misc Keywords, Other Hooks, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Controlling the Delimiter Regions and Forms
+
+MMM also makes overlays for the delimiter regions, to keep track of
+their position and form.  Normally, the front delimiter overlay starts
+at the beginning of the match for @code{:front} and ends at the
+beginning of the submode region overlay, while the back delimiter
+overlay starts at the end of the submode region overlay and ends at
+the end of the match for @code{:back}.  You can supply offsets from
+these positions using the keyword arguments @code{:front-delim} and
+@code{:back-delim}, which take values of the same sort as
+@code{:front-offset} and @code{:back-offset}.
+
+In addition, the delimiter regions can be in a major mode of their
+own.  There are usually only two meaningful modes to use: the primary
+mode or a non-mode like fundamental-mode.  These correspond to the
+following two situations:
+
+@itemize
+@item
+If the delimiter syntax which specifies the submode regions is
+something @emph{added to} the syntax of the primary mode by a
+pre-interpreter, then the delimiter regions should be in a non-mode.
+This is the case, for example, with all server-side HTML script
+extensions, such as @xref{Mason}, @xref{Embperl}, and @xref{ePerl}.
+It is also the case for literate programming such as @xref{Noweb}.
+This is the default behavior.  The non-mode used is controlled by the
+variable @code{mmm-delimiter-mode}, which defaults to
+fundamental-mode.
+
+@item
+If, on the other hand, the delimiter syntax and inclusion of different
+modes is an @emph{intrinsic part} of the primary mode, then the
+delimiter regions should remain in the primary mode.  This is the
+case, for example, with @xref{Embedded CSS}, and @xref{Javascript},
+since the @code{<style>} and @code{<script>} tags are perfectly valid
+HTML.  In this case, you should give the keyword parameter
+@code{:delimiter-mode} with a value of @code{nil}, meaning to use the
+primary mode.
+@end itemize
+
+The keyword parameter @code{:delimiter-mode} can be given any major
+mode as an argument, but the above two situations should cover the
+vast majority of cases.
+
+The delimiter regions can also be highlighted, if you wish.  The
+keyword parameters @code{:front-face} and @code{:back-face} may be
+faces specifying how to highlight these regions under high
+decoration.  Under low decoration, the value of the variable
+@code{mmm-delimiter-face} is used (by default, nothing), and of course
+under no decoration there is no coloring.
+
+Finally, for each submode region overlay, MMM Mode stores the ``form''
+of the front and back delimiters, which are regular expressions that
+match the delimiters.  At present these are not used for much, but in
+the future they may be used to help with automatic updating of regions
+as you type.  Normally, the form stored is the result of evaluating
+the expression @code{(regexp-quote (match-string 0))} after each match
+is found.
+
+You can customize this with the keyword argument @code{:front-form}
+(respectively, @code{:back-form}).  If it is a string, it is used
+verbatim for the front (respectively, back) form.  If it is a function,
+that function is called and should inspect the match data and return the
+regular expression to use as the form.
+
+In addition, the form itself can be set to a function, by giving a
+one-element list containing only that function as the argument to
+@code{:front-form} or @code{:back-form}.  Such a function should take
+1-2 arguments.  The first argument is the overlay to match the delimiter
+for.  If the second is non-nil, it means to insert the delimiter and
+adjust the overlay; if nil it means to match the delimiter and return
+the result in the match data.
+
+
+@node Misc Keywords,  , Delimiters, Writing Classes
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Miscellaneous Other Keyword Arguments
+
+You can specify whether delimiter searches should be case-sensitive with
+the keyword argument @code{:case-fold-search}.  It defaults to @code{t},
+meaning that case should be ignored.  See the documentation for the
+variable @code{case-fold-search}.
+
+@node Indices,  , Writing Classes, Top
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@chapter Indices
+
+@menu
+* Concept Index::               Index of MMM Mode Concepts.
+* Function Index::              Index of functions and variables.
+* Keystroke Index::             Index of key bindings in MMM Mode.
+@end menu
+
+@node Concept Index, Function Index, Indices, Indices
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Concept Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+
+@node Function Index, Keystroke Index, Concept Index, Indices
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Function and Variable Index
+
+@printindex fn
+
+
+@node Keystroke Index,  , Function Index, Indices
+@comment  node-name,  next,  previous,  up
+@section Keystroke Index
+
+@printindex ky
+
+
+@bye
+
+@c Local Variables:
+@c mode: texinfo
+@c mode: font-lock
+@c mode: outline-minor
+@c End:
diff --git a/tests/highlighting.el b/tests/highlighting.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ce2269
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tests/highlighting.el
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+;; Copyright (C) 2013-2014  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; This file is part of GNU Emacs.
+
+;; GNU Emacs is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+;; (at your option) any later version.
+
+;; GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'ert-x)
+
+(defvar foo-mode-keywords
+  `((,(concat "\\b"
+              (regexp-opt '("foo" "bar") t)
+              "\\b")
+     . font-lock-keyword-face)))
+
+(define-derived-mode foo1-mode fundamental-mode ""
+  (setq font-lock-defaults '(foo-mode-keywords t t)))
+
+(ert-deftest mmm-font-lock-without-font-lock-syntax-table ()
+  (ert-with-test-buffer nil
+    (let (mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+          mmm-parse-when-idle)
+      (insert "foo // foo_bar")
+      (fundamental-mode)
+      (mmm-mode-on)
+      (mmm-ify-by-regexp 'foo1-mode "// " 0 "\\'" 0 nil)
+      (font-lock-fontify-region (point-min) (point-max))
+      (beginning-of-buffer)
+      (should-not (get-text-property (point) 'face))
+      (search-forward "fo" nil nil 2)
+      (should (eq (get-text-property (point) 'face) font-lock-keyword-face))
+      (search-forward "ba")
+      (should (eq (get-text-property (point) 'face) font-lock-keyword-face)))))
+
+(define-derived-mode foo2-mode fundamental-mode ""
+  (setq font-lock-defaults '(foo-mode-keywords t t ((?_ . "w")))))
+
+(ert-deftest mmm-font-lock-with-font-lock-syntax-table ()
+  (ert-with-test-buffer nil
+    (let (mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+          mmm-parse-when-idle)
+      (insert "foo // foo_bar")
+      (fundamental-mode)
+      (mmm-mode-on)
+      (mmm-ify-by-regexp 'foo2-mode "// " 0 "\\'" 0 nil)
+      (font-lock-fontify-region (point-min) (point-max))
+      (should-not (next-single-property-change (point-min) 'face)))))
+
+(define-derived-mode foo3-mode fundamental-mode ""
+  (setq font-lock-defaults '(foo-mode-keywords nil t ((?_ . "w")))))
+
+(ert-deftest mmm-syntax-propertize-function-preserves-current-syntax-table ()
+  (ert-with-test-buffer nil
+    (let (mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+          mmm-parse-when-idle)
+      (insert "foo_and_bar\n\nfoo")
+      (foo3-mode)
+      (mmm-mode-on)
+      (syntax-ppss-flush-cache (point-min))
+      ;; It locally changes `syntax-table' to `font-lock-syntax-table'
+      ;; and calls `syntax-ppss' inside that before fontifying.
+      (font-lock-fontify-region (point-min) (point-max))
+      (let ((pt (next-single-property-change (point-min) 'face)))
+        (should pt)
+        (goto-char pt)
+        (should (looking-at "foo\\'"))))))
+
+(ert-deftest mmm-fontify-region-list-ignores-outside-for-syntactic-ff-tion ()
+  (ert-with-test-buffer nil
+    (let (mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+          mmm-parse-when-idle)
+      (insert "unpaired '!\n")
+      (insert "js>>\n")
+      (insert "var woo = js;\n")
+      (foo1-mode)
+      (mmm-mode-on)
+      (syntax-ppss-flush-cache (point-min))
+      (mmm-ify-by-regexp 'js-mode "js>>\n" 0 "\\'" 0 nil)
+      (font-lock-fontify-region (point-min) (point-max))
+      (search-backward "var")
+      (should (eq 'font-lock-keyword-face
+                  (get-text-property (point) 'face))))))
+
+(ert-deftest mmm-fontify-region-list-carries-string-after-subregion ()
+  (ert-with-test-buffer nil
+    (let (mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist
+          mmm-parse-when-idle)
+      (insert "<p class=\"foo <% 1 + 2 %> bar tee\"</p>")
+      (html-mode)
+      (mmm-mode-on)
+      (syntax-ppss-flush-cache (point-min))
+      (mmm-ify-by-regexp 'js-mode "<%" 0 "%>" 0 nil)
+      (font-lock-fontify-region (point-min) (point-max))
+      (search-backward "1")
+      (should (null (get-text-property (point) 'face)))
+      (search-forward "bar")
+      (should (eq 'font-lock-string-face
+                  (get-text-property (point) 'face))))))
diff --git a/tests/html-erb.el b/tests/html-erb.el
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe34c86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tests/html-erb.el
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+;; Copyright (C) 2013  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+;; This file is part of GNU Emacs.
+
+;; GNU Emacs is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+;; the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+;; (at your option) any later version.
+
+;; GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+;; GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+;; along with GNU Emacs.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+;;; Commentary:
+
+;;; Code:
+
+(require 'ert)
+(require 'ert-x)
+(require 'mmm-erb)
+
+(defvar mmm-erb-text
+  "<%= foo do %>
+     <div class=\"clear\"/>
+   <% end %>")
+
+(defconst mmm-erb-edge-emacs (string-lessp "24.3.50" emacs-version))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-current-overlay-string ()
+  (buffer-substring-no-properties
+   (overlay-start mmm-current-overlay)
+   (overlay-end mmm-current-overlay)))
+
+(defmacro mmm-erb-deftest (name &rest body)
+  (let ((expected-result (and (eq (car body) :expected-result)
+                              (nth 1 body))))
+    (when expected-result
+      (setq body (nthcdr 2 body)))
+    `(ert-deftest ,(intern (format "mmm-erb-%s" name)) ()
+       :expected-result ,(or expected-result :passed)
+       (ert-with-test-buffer nil
+         (let ((buffer-file-name "foo.html.erb")
+               (mmm-global-mode 'maybe)
+               mmm-parse-when-idle
+               mmm-mode-ext-classes-alist)
+           (mmm-add-mode-ext-class 'html-erb-mode "\\.html\\.erb\\'" 'erb)
+           (html-erb-mode)
+           (mmm-mode-on-maybe)
+           (should mmm-mode)
+           ,@body)))))
+
+(put 'mmm-erb-deftest 'lisp-indent-function 'defun)
+
+(mmm-erb-deftest parses-buffer
+  (insert mmm-erb-text)
+  (mmm-apply-all)
+  (should (not mmm-current-overlay))
+  (search-backward "foo")
+  (should (mmm-update-current-submode))
+  (should (string= " foo do " (mmm-erb-current-overlay-string)))
+  (search-forward "end")
+  (should (mmm-update-current-submode))
+  (should (string= " end " (mmm-erb-current-overlay-string))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-assert-string-syntax ()
+  (goto-char (point-min))
+  (search-forward "\"")
+  (should (nth 3 (syntax-ppss)))
+  (search-forward "\"")
+  (should (not (nth 3 (syntax-ppss)))))
+
+(defun mmm-erb-assert-non-string-syntax ()
+  (goto-char (point-min))
+  (search-forward "\"")
+  (should (not (nth 3 (syntax-ppss))))
+  (search-forward "\"")
+  (should (not (nth 3 (syntax-ppss)))))
+
+(mmm-erb-deftest attribute-values-are-strings
+  (insert mmm-erb-text)
+  (mmm-apply-all)
+  (mmm-erb-assert-string-syntax))
+
+(mmm-erb-deftest quotes-outside-tags-dont-make-strings
+  :expected-result (if mmm-erb-edge-emacs :passed :failed)
+  (insert "<% foo do %><p>\"foo bar\"</p><% end %>")
+  (mmm-apply-all)
+  (mmm-erb-assert-non-string-syntax))
+
+(mmm-erb-deftest gt-inside-subregion-doesnt-change-nesting
+  (insert "<% if 2 > 1 %><div class=\"foo\"/><% end %>")
+  (mmm-apply-all)
+  (mmm-erb-assert-string-syntax))
+
+(mmm-erb-deftest lt-inside-subregion-doesnt-change-nesting
+  :expected-result (if mmm-erb-edge-emacs :passed :failed)
+  (insert "<% if 2 < 1 %><p>\"foo bar\"</p><% end %>")
+  (mmm-apply-all)
+  (mmm-erb-assert-non-string-syntax))
diff --git a/texinfo.tex b/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa52853
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5484 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{1999-01-05}%
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex
+%   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+%   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%   ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list).
+% The texinfo.tex in the texinfo distribution itself could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+% 
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.
+% Please include a precise test case in each bug report,
+% including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem.
+% 
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For simple
+% manuals, however, you can get away with:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file.
+% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined  \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined     \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined     \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined       \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined     \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined  \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined  \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined      \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined      \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}\fi
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset
+\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\else
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
+   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\fi
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+% 
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
+\def\singlespace{%
+  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
+  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
+  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+  %\kern \baselineskip}%
+  \setleading \singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
+  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
+  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
+  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
+@endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+  % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
+  % break, since the best break might be right here.
+  \allowbreak
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
+  %
+  % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+  % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+  % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+  % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+  % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+  %
+  % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+  % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+  % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+  % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+  % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+  % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+  % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+  \penalty9999
+  %
+  % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+  \kern -#1\mil
+  %
+  % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+% 
+\def\enddots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 2em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page    forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+
+\def\inmargin#1{%
+\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
+  \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\\=12
+  \catcode`~=12
+  \catcode`^=12
+  \catcode`_=12
+  \catcode`|=12
+  \catcode`<=12
+  \catcode`>=12
+  \catcode`+=12
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent  is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
+\let\paragraphindent=\comment
+
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+\let\chapter=\relax
+\let\unnumbered=\relax
+\let\top=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\section=\relax
+\let\subsec=\relax
+\let\subsubsec=\relax
+\let\subsection=\relax
+\let\subsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendix=\relax
+\let\appendixsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\contents=\relax
+\let\smallbook=\relax
+\let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \relax
+  \let\deffn = \relax
+  \let\deffnx = \relax
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \relax
+  \let\defmac = \relax
+  \let\defmethod = \relax
+  \let\defop = \relax
+  \let\defopt = \relax
+  \let\defspec = \relax
+  \let\deftp = \relax
+  \let\deftypefn = \relax
+  \let\deftypefun = \relax
+  \let\deftypevar = \relax
+  \let\deftypevr = \relax
+  \let\defun = \relax
+  \let\defvar = \relax
+  \let\defvr = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \catcode32 = 10
+  %
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
+  %
+  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  %
+  % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+  % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+  %   @c @end ifinfo
+  % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+  % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+  \catcode`\c = 14
+  %
+  % And now expand that command.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm = \nullfont  \let\tenit = \nullfont  \let\tensl = \nullfont
+    \let\tenbf = \nullfont  \let\tentt = \nullfont  \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
+    \let\tensf = \nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
+    % smallexample)
+    \let\indrm = \nullfont  \let\indit = \nullfont  \let\indsl = \nullfont
+    \let\indbf = \nullfont  \let\indtt = \nullfont  \let\indsc = \nullfont
+    \let\indsf = \nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+    % Do not execute macro definitions.
+    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+%
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  %
+  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
+  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+  \gdef\value{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
+    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+    \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
+% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
+% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
+% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
+% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% 
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
+% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
+% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+  \edef\temp{%
+    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+    %
+    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \iflinks 
+     \readauxfile
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+% 
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
+% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
+% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
+% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
+% aren't very useful.
+\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\let\indtt=\ninett
+\let\indttsl=\ninettsl
+\let\indsf=\indrm
+\let\indbf=\indrm
+\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\font\indi=cmmi9
+\font\indsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
+% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
+% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+
+%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
+%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
+%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+  \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \resetmathfonts}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\indexfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
+  \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
+  \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+  % just treat them as a normal -.
+  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
+% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
+\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument
+% specifying the text to display.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
+% Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here.
+% 
+\def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish}
+\def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})%
+  \else
+    \code{#1}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref.
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\let\email=\uref
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+% 
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+         \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \oldpage
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   %
+   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \shortcontents
+     \contents
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \contents
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{\number\day\space
+\ifcase\month\or
+January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+\space\number\year}
+
+% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+%\space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings
+% It generates no output of its own
+
+\def\thistitle{No Title}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.
+    \nobreak
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.  
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+% 
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
+% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
+% just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
+% percent of \hsize for this column.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
+  \global\advance\colcount by 1
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
+  \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+  \def\firstarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+    \let\go = \relax
+  \else
+    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+      \global\setpercenttrue
+    \else
+      \ifsetpercent
+         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+      \else
+         \global\advance\colcount by 1
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
+                            % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+    \else
+      \let\go = \setuptable
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+  \go
+}
+
+% multitable syntax
+\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
+                           % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
+                           % maintained, even if it is never used.
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \let\item\crcr
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
+  %
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+  % The table preamble
+  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+  \everycr{\noalign{%
+  %
+  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+  %
+  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+  % the first one.
+  % 
+  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+  % to the width of each template entry.
+  % 
+  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+  % 
+  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+  \rightskip=0pt
+  \ifnum\colcount=1
+    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent \else
+      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+    \fi
+   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+  % For example:
+  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+  % @item @code{#}
+  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+  % characters.
+  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\else
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+\def\ { }%
+% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
+\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
+\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
+\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
+\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
+\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
+\def\={\realbackslash =}%
+\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
+\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
+\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
+\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
+\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
+\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
+\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
+\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
+\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
+\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
+\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
+\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
+\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
+\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
+\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
+\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
+% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
+% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
+% laboriously list every single command here.)
+\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
+% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+\let\{ = \mylbrace
+\let\} = \myrbrace
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
+\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
+\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
+\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
+\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
+\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
+%
+% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+\let\value = \expandablevalue
+%
+\unsepspaces
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+% Just ignore accents.
+\let\,=\indexdummyfont
+\let\"=\indexdummyfont
+\let\`=\indexdummyfont
+\let\'=\indexdummyfont
+\let\^=\indexdummyfont
+\let\~=\indexdummyfont
+\let\==\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\c=\indexdummyfont
+\let\d=\indexdummyfont
+\let\u=\indexdummyfont
+\let\v=\indexdummyfont
+\let\H=\indexdummyfont
+\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{oe}%
+\def\ae{ae}%
+\def\aa{aa}%
+\def\OE{OE}%
+\def\AE{AE}%
+\def\AA{AA}%
+\def\o{o}%
+\def\O{O}%
+\def\l{l}%
+\def\L{L}%
+\def\ss{ss}%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\url=\indexdummyfont
+\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
+\let\env=\indexdummyfont
+\let\command=\indexdummyfont
+\let\option=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+\def\@{@}%
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+ @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+% 
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+% 
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+  \fi
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+        %
+        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
+          \let\subentry = \empty
+        \else
+          \def\subentry{ #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off
+        % to get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
+        %
+        % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the
+        % original text, including any font commands.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index string.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+          \toks0 = {#3}%
+          \edef\temp{\temp{\the\toks0}}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+        % like this:
+        % @end defun
+        % @tindex whatever
+        % @defun ...
+        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+        % the previous defun.
+        % 
+        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+        % 
+        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+        % 
+        \iflinks
+          \ifvmode
+            \skip0 = \lastskip
+            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
+          \fi
+          %
+          \temp % do the write
+          %
+          % 
+          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
+  }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \indexbreaks
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 11
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    (Index is nonexistent)
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      (Index is empty)
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+  %
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  % 
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  \penalty -300
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  % 
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent = 2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+    %
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+    % 
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from
+    % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page.
+    % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it
+    % out.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and
+    % this will be a no-op.
+    \unvbox\partialpage
+    %
+    % Unvbox the main output page.
+    \unvbox255
+    \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+  }}%
+  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+% 
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+  % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+  \advance\vsize by \ht\partialpage
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
+    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    \balancecolumns
+    %
+    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+  }%
+  \eject
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+  %
+  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+  \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  % Called at the end of the double column material.
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {%
+    \vbadness = 10000
+    \loop
+      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+    \repeat
+  }%
+  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  %
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Define chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1
+\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                       {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+% the toc entries.)
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
+  }%
+  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+% 
+% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
+% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+% 
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1{%
+  \iftocfileopened\else
+    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+  \fi
+  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+% 
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+   %
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \savepageno = \pageno
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+      %
+      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}%
+     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+     \ifeof 1 \else
+       \closein 1
+       \input \jobname.toc
+     \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+      \ifeof 1 \else
+        \closein 1
+        \input \jobname.toc
+      \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+  % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+  \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+  %
+  % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
+  % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+  \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+%                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode 43=12 % plus
+  \catcode`\"=12
+  \catcode`\==12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  %
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \singlespace
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+% 
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
+% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
+% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
+% whatever) command.
+% 
+% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
+% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts
+  \lisp
+}
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+% 
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \singlespace
+  \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% Define formatter for defuns
+% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\def\ampnr{\&}
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+%    such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+% 
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+% @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does.  Sigh.
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+% 
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %
+  \medbreak %
+  % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\hyphenchar\tensl=0
+#1%
+\hyphenchar\tensl=45
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defunx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+
+\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+
+% @defmethod, and so on
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+
+\def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
+
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+
+\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
+
+\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now @defvar
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defvarx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
+
+\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
+
+\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+   \immediate\write\macscribble{#1}%
+   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+   \input \jobname.tmp
+   \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\{=12
+  \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\^^M=12
+  \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\\=12}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 
+  \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
+\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
+    \errmessage{Macro \the\macname\ not defined.}%
+  \else
+    \cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \expandafter\let \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \undefined
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg 
+  \fi \next}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+% 
+\def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}}
+
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
+% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
+% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
+% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
+% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+% 
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+  \indexdummies
+  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  \else
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\normalturnoffactive
+     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+    }%
+    % [mynode], 
+    [\printednodename],\space
+    % page 3
+    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+  {\let\folio=0
+   \normalturnoffactive
+   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+   \iflinks
+     \next
+   \fi
+  }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \csname X#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+% 
+\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
+  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
+  \catcode`\\ = 0
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\'=0
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+  \hang
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
+\def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+% 
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
+  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \nobreak\medskip
+    \nobreak
+    \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
+    \bigbreak
+  \else
+    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{paper sizes,}
+% And other related parameters.
+
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format.  We
+% call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = \hsize
+    \divide\emergencystretch by 45
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
+% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+  \pageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \pagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \deftypemargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+  %
+  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
+  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
+  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
+  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
+% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{13.6pt}%
+  %
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
+\def\afourwide{%
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+% 
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+% 
+\letterpaper
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+\escapechar=`\@
+
+% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@realbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@normalbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  The @rm below
+% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
+@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
+
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End: